2020 FIAT
®
500L OWNER’S MANUAL
2020 FIAT
®
500L
20_BG_OM_EN_USC
First Edition
atusa.com (U.S.) or atcanada.com/en (Canada)
©2019 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. FIAT is a registered trademark of FCA Group
Marketing S.p.A., used under license by FCA US LLC. App Store is a registered trademark
of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
Whether it’s providing information about specic product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what
steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you’ll nd the app an important extension of
your FIAT
®
brand vehicle.
Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App Store
®
or Google
Play
®
Store and enter the search keyword “FIAT” (U.S. residents only).
mopar.com owners.mopar.ca
DOWNLOAD A FREE ELECTRONIC COPY OF THE MOST
UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL, UCONNECT AND
WARRANTY BOOKLETS
U. S. Canada
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in an accident and
personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their attention off the
road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is
moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you
nd yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces
prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new FIAT
®
brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference source for
common questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit www.mopar.com (U.S.), www.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local
FIAT
®
brand dealer.
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle.
This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle.
Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make
changes in design and specications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself
to install them on products previously manufactured.
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in
substitution therefore.
If you are the rst registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by calling
1-888-242-6342 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143 (Canada) or by contacting your dealer.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual,
Navigation/Uconnect manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover. U.S. residents can purchase
replacement kits by visiting www.techauthority.com and Canadian residents can purchase replacement kits by calling 1-800-387-1143.
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reexes are slower and your
judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
WARNING
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL: Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability
can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive.
Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend or use public transportation.
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not
idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear
gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information
go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................................... 6
2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ................................................................................ 8
3 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ....................................................55
4 SAFETY ........................................................................................................................................75
5 STARTING AND OPERATING ............................................................................................ 118
6 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY .................................................................................................. 142
7 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE ...................................................................................169
8 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ........................................................................................206
9 MULTIMEDIA ............................................................................................................................ 214
10 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE ................................................................................................. 267
11 INDEX........................................................................................................................................... 271
1
10
9
8
7
5
6
4
3
2
11
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 1
2
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION ......................................................... 6
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL .................................... 7
Essential Information ........................................... 7
Symbols................................................................. 7
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS ................................... 7
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS ............. 7
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS .......................................................................... 8
Key With Remote Control..................................... 8
IGNITION SWITCH ..................................................10
Key-In-Ignition Reminder....................................11
SENTRY KEY............................................................. 11
Key Programming ..............................................11
Replacement Keys ............................................. 11
General Information ...........................................11
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM ...................................12
To Arm The System............................................. 12
To Disarm The System ....................................... 12
Central Lock/Unlock
(Switch Safe Lock Device) — If Equipped.......... 13
DOORS ..................................................................... 13
Power Door Locks............................................... 13
Doors Lock With One Or More Doors Open ...... 14
Auto-Relocking (Only For Rear Doors)............... 14
Child-Protection Door Lock System
(Rear Doors) .......................................................15
SEATS........................................................................15
Manual Adjustment (Front Seats)..................... 15
Manual Adjustment (Rear Seats)...................... 17
Power Adjustment (Front Seats) —
If Equipped.......................................................... 19
Heated Seats — If Equipped .............................. 19
Rear Armrest — If Equipped............................... 20
HEAD RESTRAINTS .................................................20
Reactive Head Restraints — Front Seats.......... 20
Rear Head Restraint Adjustment ...................... 21
Front Head Restraint Removal.......................... 21
Rear Head Restraint Removal........................... 22
STEERING WHEEL ...................................................22
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column .................... 22
MIRRORS .................................................................23
Inside Day/Night Mirror .................................... 23
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped......... 23
Conversation Mirror — If Equipped.................... 24
Power Mirrors .................................................... 24
Folding Mirrors ................................................... 24
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped............................ 24
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped ......... 24
EXTERIOR LIGHTS ...................................................25
Headlights .......................................................... 25
Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) —
If Equipped ......................................................... 25
High Beams ........................................................ 26
Flash-To-Pass...................................................... 26
Parking Lights..................................................... 26
Follow Me Home/Headlight Delay .................... 26
Front Fog Lights — If Equipped.......................... 26
Courtesy Lights/Approaching Lights................. 26
INTERIOR LIGHTS ................................................... 27
Interior Lights Controls .......................................27
Rear Dome Lights — If Equipped........................28
WIPERS AND WASHERS........................................ 28
Front Wiper Operation ........................................28
Rear Wiper/Washer Operation...........................30
CLIMATE CONTROLS ............................................. 31
Manual Climate Control Overview......................31
Automatic Climate Control Overview .................34
Climate Control Functions..................................37
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)...............37
Operating Tips ....................................................38
WINDOWS ............................................................... 40
Power Windows...................................................40
Wind Buffeting ....................................................41
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED....................... 41
Opening ...............................................................42
Closing .................................................................42
Anti-Pinch Protect Feature..................................42
Sunroof Reinitialization ......................................42
Wind Buffeting ....................................................43
Power Sun Blind..................................................43
HOOD........................................................................ 43
Opening ...............................................................43
Closing .................................................................44
LIFTGATE.................................................................. 44
Opening ...............................................................44
Cargo Area Features ..........................................45
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 2
3
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED ............48
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink® ... 48
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming............ 50
Using HomeLink® ..............................................50
Security ............................................................... 51
Troubleshooting Tips..........................................51
General Information ...........................................51
INTERNAL EQUIPMENT...........................................52
Storage................................................................ 52
Cupholders ......................................................... 53
Power Outlets...................................................... 53
Cigar Lighter — If Equipped ............................... 53
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED................54
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT
PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER ..........................................55
Instrument Cluster Descriptions........................56
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY .........................57
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons ..... 57
Change Engine Oil Indicator System ................ 58
Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items ........... 59
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES.....................65
Red Warning Lights ............................................65
Yellow Warning Lights ........................................68
Yellow Indicator Lights ....................................... 71
Green Indicator Lights........................................72
White Indicator Lights ........................................72
Blue Indicator Lights .......................................... 73
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II .........73
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity ...................................................... 73
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS..............................................................74
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES ..................................................75
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .......................... 75
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System ............ 76
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS..............................81
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ......... 81
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS .......................84
Occupant Restraint Systems Features ............ 84
Important Safety Precautions............................ 84
Seat Belt Systems ............................................. 85
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) ........... 91
Child Restraints................................................102
Transporting Pets ............................................115
SAFETY TIPS ......................................................... 115
Transporting Passengers.................................115
Exhaust Gas......................................................115
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside
The Vehicle ......................................................115
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle .........................................117
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE .......................................118
Normal Starting................................................ 118
Cold Weather Operation .................................. 118
Extended Park Starting.................................... 119
If Engine Fails To Start .................................... 119
After Starting .................................................... 119
Turbo Charger “Cool Down” ............................ 119
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS .........119
MODE SELECTOR – IF EQUIPPED.......................120
Operating Modes.............................................. 120
PARKING BRAKE .................................................122
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ..............................122
Key Ignition Park Interlock .............................. 123
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System .. 123
Six-Speed Automatic Transmission ............... 123
AUTOSTICK.............................................................127
Operation.......................................................... 127
ELECTRIC POWER STEERING..............................128
SPEED CONTROL .................................................128
To Activate ........................................................ 129
To Set A Desired Speed................................... 129
To Vary The Speed Setting .............................. 129
To Accelerate For Passing ............................... 130
To Resume Speed............................................ 130
To Deactivate .................................................. 130
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 3
4
REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED ..................130
Rear Park Assist Sensors.................................131
Rear Park Assist Audible Alerts .......................131
Indications On Display — If Equipped..............132
Failure Indications............................................133
Cleaning The Rear Park Assist System ...........133
Park Assist System Usage Precautions...........133
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA ................134
ADDING FUEL ........................................................136
VEHICLE LOADING ...............................................137
Certification Label ............................................137
TRAILER TOWING .................................................138
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.) .............................................139
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle..139
DRIVING TIPS.........................................................140
Driving On Slippery Surfaces ...........................140
Driving Through Water ....................................140
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS .........................142
BULB REPLACEMENT ...........................................142
Replacement Bulbs .........................................142
Replacing Exterior Bulbs..................................144
FUSES .....................................................................146
General Information .........................................146
Underhood Fuses .............................................146
Interior Fuses....................................................148
Rear Interior Fuses...........................................151
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING —
IF EQUIPPED ......................................................... 152
Jack Location....................................................152
Removal Of Jack And Tools .............................152
Spare Tire Removal..........................................153
Preparations For Jacking ................................154
Jacking Instructions .........................................155
Reinstalling The Jack And Tools ......................158
Spare Tire Storage ...........................................159
TIRE SERVICE KIT .................................................159
JUMP STARTING ................................................... 161
Preparations For Jump Start ...........................161
Jump Starting Procedure ................................. 162
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS............................. 163
IGNITION KEY REMOVAL OVERRIDE.................. 164
GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE .............................. 165
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE ................................ 165
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE........................... 167
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE
SYSTEM (EARS) ................................................... 168
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR).......................... 168
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING ..................................... 169
Maintenance Plan ............................................170
Heavy Duty Use Of The Vehicle .......................172
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 1.4L TURBO ........... 173
Checking Oil Level............................................174
Adding Washer Fluid .......................................174
Maintenance-Free Battery............................... 174
Pressure Washing ............................................175
DEALER SERVICE .................................................175
Engine Oil ......................................................... 175
Engine Oil Filter ................................................ 176
Engine Air Cleaner Filter ................................. 177
Air Conditioner Maintenance .......................... 177
Body Lubrication .............................................. 178
Windshield Wiper Blades................................. 178
Exhaust System ............................................... 179
Cooling System................................................. 181
Brake System .................................................. 184
Automatic Transmission.................................. 184
RAISING THE VEHICLE..........................................186
TIRES .....................................................................186
Tire Safety Information ................................... 186
Tires — General Information ........................... 192
Tire Types.......................................................... 196
Spare Tires — If Equipped ............................... 197
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care ........................... 199
Tire Chains and Traction Devices .................. 200
Tire Rotation Recommendations .................... 200
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES .....................201
Treadwear......................................................... 201
Traction Grades................................................ 201
Temperature Grades........................................ 202
VEHICLE STORAGE................................................202
BODYWORK...........................................................203
Protection From Atmospheric Agents ............. 203
Body And Underbody Maintenance ................ 203
Preserving The Bodywork ................................ 203
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 4
5
INTERIORS ............................................................204
Seats And Fabric Parts.....................................204
Plastic And Coated Parts..................................205
Leather Parts ....................................................205
Glass Surfaces .................................................205
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
IDENTIFICATION DATA..........................................206
Vehicle Identification Number .........................206
BRAKE SYSTEM.....................................................206
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS....206
Torque Specifications.......................................207
FUEL REQUIREMENTS ..........................................207
1.4L Turbo.........................................................207
Reformulated Gasoline ...................................208
Materials Added To Fuel ..................................208
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ............................208
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles ....209
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications .........209
MMT In Gasoline...............................................209
Fuel System Cautions.......................................210
Carbon Monoxide Warnings.............................210
FLUID CAPACITIES ................................................211
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ...................................211
Engine ..............................................................211
Chassis .............................................................213
MULTIMEDIA
CYBERSECURITY ..................................................214
UCONNECT SETTINGS .......................................... 215
Uconnect 4/4 NAV Settings.............................215
SAFETY AND GENERAL INFORMATION ............. 226
Safety Guidelines .............................................226
UCONNECT 4/4 NAV WITH 7-INCH DISPLAY.... 227
Introduction ......................................................227
Radio Mode ......................................................228
Media Mode......................................................235
Phone Mode .....................................................244
Navigation Mode — If Equipped ......................255
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS .............. 259
Radio Operation ...............................................259
Player Operation...............................................259
IPOD®/USB/MEDIA PLAYER CONTROL ........... 259
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES ...... 260
Regulatory And Safety Information .................260
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK
TIPS ....................................................................... 261
Introducing Uconnect.......................................261
Get Started .......................................................261
Basic Voice Commands ...................................262
Radio.................................................................262
Media ................................................................263
Phone................................................................263
Navigation (4 NAV) — If Equipped ...................263
Siri® Eyes Free — If Equipped .........................264
Android Auto™ — If Equipped .........................264
Apple CarPlay® — If Equipped ........................265
General Information.........................................266
Additional Information .....................................266
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE .............................................267
Prepare For The Appointment......................... 267
Prepare A List ................................................... 267
Be Reasonable With Requests ....................... 267
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE .................................267
FCA US LLC Customer Center.......................... 268
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center ................. 268
In Mexico Contact ............................................ 268
Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands ................ 268
Customer Assistance For The Hearing
Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY)....................... 268
Service Contract .............................................. 268
WARRANTY INFORMATION .................................269
MOPAR PARTS......................................................269
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ...........................269
In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C............................................... 269
In Canada ......................................................... 269
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS ...........................270
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 5
6
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
Dear Customer,
Congratulations on selfecting your new vehicle.
Be assured that it represents precision work-
manship, distinctive styling, and high quality.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with
the assistance of service and engineering
specialists to acquaint you with the operation
and maintenance of your vehicle. It is supple-
mented by Warranty Information, and customer
oriented documents. In the Warranty Informa-
tion, available online, you will find a description
of the services that FCA US LLC offers to its
customers, the Warranty Certificate and the
details of the terms and conditions for main-
taining its validity. Please take the time to read
all of these publications carefully before driving
your vehicle for the first time. Following the
instructions, recommendations, tips, and
important warnings in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your
vehicle. Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle
controls, particularly those used for braking,
steering, transmission, and transfer case
shifting (if equipped). Learn how your vehicle
handles on different road surfaces. Your driving
skills will improve with experience.
This Owner’s Manual describes all versions of
this vehicle. Options and equipment dedicated
to specific markets or versions are not expressly
indicated in the text. Therefore, you should only
consider the information which is related to the
trim level, engine, and version that you have
purchased. Any content introduced throughout
the Owner’s Information, that may or may not be
applicable to your vehicle, will be identified with
the wording “If Equipped”. All data contained in
this publication are intended to help you use
your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA US
LLC aims at a constant improvement of the
vehicles produced. For this reason, it reserves
the right to make changes to the model
described for technical and/or commercial
reasons. For further information, contact an
authorized dealer.
When it comes to service, remember that an
authorized dealer knows your vehicle best, has
factory-trained technicians and genuine
MOPAR® parts, and cares about your satisfac-
tion.
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 6
INTRODUCTION 7
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Essential Information
Consult the Table of Contents at the front of this
Owner’s Manual to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends
on the items of equipment ordered, certain
descriptions and illustrations may differ from
your vehicle's equipment.
The detailed Index at the back of this Owner's
Manual contains a complete listing of all
subjects.
Symbols
Some vehicle components have colored labels
whose symbols indicate precautions to be
observed when using this component. Refer to
“Warning Lights and Messages” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further infor-
mation on the symbols used in your vehicle.
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS
against operating procedures that could result
in a collision, bodily injury and/or death. It also
contains CAUTIONS against procedures that
could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do
not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may
miss important information. Observe all Warn-
ings and Cautions.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this
vehicle could seriously affect its
roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a
collision resulting in serious injury or death.
1
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 7
8
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS
Key With Remote Control
The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) key fob
contains an integrated key. To use the mechan-
ical key, simply push the mechanical key
release button.
Integrated Key
NOTE:
The authorized dealer that sold you your vehicle
has the key code numbers for your vehicle locks.
These numbers can be used to order duplicate
keys from an authorized dealer.
To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the unlock button on the key
fob once to unlock the driver’s door, or twice
within five seconds, to unlock all doors and the
liftgate. The turn signal lights will flash to
acknowledge the unlock signal. The illuminated
entry system will also turn on.
To unlock the liftgate only, push and release the
liftgate button on the key fob once. The liftgate
external handle will be enabled and it will be
possible to use it to open the liftgate. After 30
seconds the external handle will be disabled
again. The turn signal lights will flash to
acknowledge the unlock signal.
To Lock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the lock button on the key fob
to lock all doors and the liftgate. The turn signal
lights will flash and the horn will chirp to
acknowledge the signal.
Locking Doors With A Key
1. Insert the key with either side up.
2. Turn the key to the right to lock the door.
3. Turn the key to the left to unlock the door.
Replacing The Battery In The Key With
Remote Control
Key Fob Components
1 — Unlock Button
2 — Mechanical Key Release Button
3 — Lock Button
4 — Liftgate Button
1 — Mechanical Key
2 — Screw
3 — Battery Case
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 8
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 9
To replace the battery, proceed as follows:
1. Push the mechanical release button to
open the mechanical key.
2. Turn the screw to unlock using a small
screwdriver.
3. Take out the battery case and replace the
battery making sure that polarities are
correct.
4. Replace the battery case inside the key
and lock it by turning the screw to lock.
NOTE:
Used batteries should be properly disposed of as
specified by law; see an authorized dealer for
assistance needed.
Programming Additional Key Fobs
Refer to “Sentry Key” in this chapter for further
information.
If you do not have a programmed key fob,
contact an authorized dealer for details.
Request For Additional Remote Controls
The system can recognize up to eight remote
controls. Should a new remote control be
necessary, go to an authorized dealer. Bring an
ID document and the vehicle ownership docu-
ments with you.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic Develop-
ment applicables aux appareils radio exempts
de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouil-
lage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en comprom-
ettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
2
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 9
10 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
IGNITION SWITCH
The ignition switch can be turned to three
different positions:
STOP (OFF/LOCK): engine off, key can be
removed. Some electrical devices (e.g. sound
system, central door locking system, etc.) can
operate.
NOTE:
The transmission must be shifted into PARK
before the key is turned to the STOP (OFF/LOCK)
position. Then, the key can be removed.
AVV (START): engine start-up.
MAR (ACC/ON/RUN): driving position. All elec-
trical devices are enabled.
If the key is turned to the STOP (OFF/LOCK)
position before shifting into PARK, the key will
have to be moved to the driving MAR (ACC/ON/
RUN) position and back to STOP (OFF/LOCK).
Then, the key can be removed.
Ignition Switch
1 — STOP (OFF/LOCK)
2 — MAR (ACC/ON/RUN)
3 — AVV (START)
WARNING!
Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the auto-
matic transmission into PARK or the manual
transmission into FIRST gear or REVERSE,
apply the parking brake, then turn the engine
OFF, remove the key fob from the vehicle and
lock your vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be warned
not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
dren. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat
build-up may cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation. Always
remove the key from the ignition and lock all
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 10
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 11
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
If the driver's door is opened when the key is in
the ignition and the ignition switch is in the
STOP (OFF/LOCK) position, a signal will sound
to remove the key.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents
unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the
vehicle. The system does not need to be armed
or activated. Operation is automatic, regardless
of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.
The system uses ignition keys which have an
embedded electronic chip (transponder) to
prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. There-
fore, only keys that are programmed to the
vehicle can be used to start and operate the
vehicle.
NOTE:
A key which has not been programmed is also
considered an invalid key, even if it is cut to fit the
ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle.
If the vehicle security light is on after the key is
turned to the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position, it
indicates that there is a problem with the elec-
tronics.
All of the keys provided with your new vehicle
have been programmed to the vehicle elec-
tronics.
Key Programming
Programming key fobs may be performed at an
authorized dealer.
Replacement Keys
Only keys that have been programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start the
vehicle. Once a Sentry Key has been
programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
programmed to any other vehicle. When having
the Sentry Key Immobilizer system serviced,
bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized
dealer.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic Develop-
ment applicables aux appareils radio exempts
de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouil-
lage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en comprom-
ettre le fonctionnement.
CAUTION!
Always remove the Sentry Key from the
vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the
vehicle unattended.
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not
compatible with some aftermarket remote
starting systems. Use of these systems may
result in vehicle starting problems and loss of
security protection.
2
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 11
12 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equip-
ment.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM
The vehicle security alarm monitors the vehicle
doors for unauthorized entry and the ignition
switch for unauthorized operation. While the
vehicle security alarm is armed, interior
switches for door locks and liftgate release are
disabled. If something triggers the alarm, the
vehicle security alarm will provide the following
audible and visible signals: the horn will pulse,
the park lamps and/or turn signals will flash,
and the vehicle security light on the instrument
panel will flash.
To Arm The System
1. Remove the key from the ignition switch
and exit the vehicle.
2. With all doors and liftgate closed, lock the
door using the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
key fob.
3. The horn will sound and the vehicle secu-
rity light on the central lock/unlock button
on the dashboard will switch on for approx-
imately three seconds. This shows that the
vehicle security alarm is about to arm.
During this period, if a door is opened, or
the ignition switch is turned to MAR (ACC/
ON/RUN), or the power door locks are
unlocked in any manner, the vehicle secu-
rity alarm will automatically disarm. After
approximately three seconds, the vehicle
security light will flash. This shows that the
vehicle security alarm is fully armed.
The activation of the vehicle security alarm is
followed by a self-diagnosis stage. If a fault is
detected during the self-diagnosis stage, the
horn will sound a second time.
If the horn sounds a second time, check that all
doors, the hood, and the liftgate are closed
correctly, and then rearm the system.
If the vehicle security alarm sounds the horn a
second time even when all doors, hood and lift-
gate are correctly closed, a fault has occurred in
the operation of the system. Contact an autho-
rized dealer.
NOTE:
The vehicle security alarm with not arm when the
mechanical key is used on a single door lock
cylinder.
To Disarm The System
Push unlock on the key fob, or insert the key
into the ignition switch and turn the ignition
switch to the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position.
NOTE:
The vehicle security alarm will not disarm when
the metal insert of the key is used on a single
door lock cylinder.
The vehicle security alarm is designed to protect
your vehicle; however, you can create condi-
tions where the vehicle security alarm will arm
unexpectedly. If you remain in the vehicle and
lock the doors with the key fob, once the vehicle
security alarm is armed, when you pull the door
handle to exit, the alarm will sound. If this
occurs, push the unlock button on the key fob to
disarm the vehicle security alarm.
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 12
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 13
Central Lock/Unlock (Switch Safe Lock
Device) — If Equipped
This safety device prevents the operation of the
interior door handles and the door locking/
unlocking button.
It prevents the opening of the doors from inside
the passenger compartment, serving as an
obstacle to break-in attempts (e.g. broken
window).
We recommend that you activate the Safe Lock
device each time the vehicle is parked.
Safe Lock Device Location
Activating The Safe Lock Device
The Safe Lock device is enabled on all the doors
by quickly double-pushing the lock button on
the key fob.
The direction indicators flash three times and
the LED above the button flashes to indicate
that the Safe Lock device has been activated. If
one or more of the doors are not closed
correctly, the Safe Lock device will not activate,
preventing a person from getting stuck inside
the passenger compartment by entering the car
through, and then closing, the open door.
Deactivating The Safe Lock Device
The Safe Lock device deactivates automatically:
By pushing the unlock button on the key fob.
By placing the ignition in the MAR (ACC/ON/
RUN) position.
DOORS
Power Door Locks
Push the central lock/unlock button located on
the instrument panel, in the switch bank below
the radio. The button has an LED that indicates
whether the doors are locked or unlocked.
LED ON: Doors locked. Pushing the central
lock/unlock button once will unlock all doors.
The LED will switch off once the doors are
unlocked.
LED OFF: Doors unlocked. Pushing the central
lock/unlock button once will lock all doors. The
LED will switch on once the doors are locked.
Central Lock/Unlock Button
Once the doors have been locked with the key
fob, it will no longer be possible to unlock them
by pushing the central lock/unlock button.
NOTE:
With central locking active (LED on), opening one
of the front doors, it is possible to perform a
central unlocking (LED off). With central locking
active (LED on), in order to open one of the rear
passenger doors, it is necessary to pull the
internal door handle twice. With one of the rear
doors open (LED off), the unlocking is performed
only for that door, not for all of the vehicle.
2
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 13
14 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
To unlock the front doors, pull the inside door
handle to the first detent. If the rear doors are
locked, you must pull the door handle once to
unlock the door and pull the door handle a
second time to open the door.
Doors Lock With One Or More Doors Open
It is possible to lock the vehicle using the
Remote Keyless Entry, internal button, or
external key fob. The vehicle can also be
locked if one or more doors are open. At a
lock command request, the LED illuminates.
At closing of the last door, the vehicle main-
tains the central locking status if the key is
not placed in the ignition; otherwise the
vehicle will be unlocked and the LED will no
longer be illuminated.
NOTE:
If the key is not inserted in the ignition switch, but
is inside the vehicle, the system does not recog-
nize the presence of the key and after the closing
of last door, the vehicle remains locked.
Auto-Relocking (Only For Rear Doors)
With the vehicle locked and all doors closed
(LED on), if a passenger opens one of the rear
doors (LED off), as soon as the door is closed, it
will be locked again (LED on).
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat
build-up may cause serious injury or death.
For personal security and safety in the event
of a collision, lock the vehicle doors as you
drive as well as when you park and leave the
vehicle.
Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the auto-
matic transmission into PARK or the manual
transmission into FIRST gear or REVERSE,
apply the parking brake, turn the vehicle OFF,
remove the key fobs from vehicle, and lock all
doors. and lock your vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving
children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous
for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be warned
not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
dren. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation. Always
remove the key from the ignition and lock all
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 14
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 15
(Continued)
Child-Protection Door Lock System
(Rear Doors)
To provide a safer environment for small chil-
dren riding in the rear seats, the rear doors are
equipped with a Child-Protection Door Lock
system.
Example Child-Protection Door Lock Location
To Engage Or Disengage The Child-Protection
Door Lock System
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert the tip of the key into the lock and
rotate clockwise to the lock position or
counter clockwise to the unlock position.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear
door.
NOTE:
For emergency exit from the rear seats when the
Child-Protection Door Lock System is engaged,
unlock the doors using the central unlock button,
roll down the window and open the door using the
exterior handle.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint
System of the vehicle.
Manual Adjustment (Front Seats)
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a
collision. Remember that the rear doors can
only be opened from the outside when the
Child-Protection locks are engaged (locked).
WARNING!
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside
or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be
seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
seat belts. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the
seat could cause you to lose control. The seat
belt might not be adjusted properly and you
could be injured. Adjust the seat only while
the vehicle is parked.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against
your chest. In a collision you could slide under
the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally
injured. Use the recliner only when the
vehicle is parked.
WARNING! (Continued)
2
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 15
16 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Forward/Rearward Adjustment
The adjusting bar is located at the front of the
seats, near the floor.
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar and
move the seat forward or rearward. Release the
bar once the desired position is reached. Then,
using body pressure, move forward and rear-
ward on the seat to be sure that the seat
adjusters have latched.
Adjusting Bar
Seat Height Adjustment
The seat height adjustment lever is located on
the outboard side of the seat. Pull upward on
the lever to raise the seat height or push down-
ward on the lever to lower the seat height.
Height Adjustment Lever
Recliner Adjustment
The recline lever is located on the outboard side
of the seat. To recline the seat, lean forward
slightly, lift the lever, lean back to the desired
position and release the lever. To return the
seatback to its normal upright position, lean
forward and lift the lever. Release the lever
once the seatback is in the upright position.
Recline Lever
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the
seat could cause you to lose control. The seat
belt might not be properly adjusted, and you
could be severely injured or killed. Only adjust
a seat while the vehicle is parked.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the seat belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision, you could slide under the
seat belt and be severely injured or killed.
Use the recliner only when the vehicle is
parked.
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 16
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17
Manual Adjustment (Rear Seats)
Rear Seats Forward/Rearward Adjustment
The adjusting bar is located at the front of the
seats, near the floor.
Adjusting Bars
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar and
move the seat forward or rearward. Release the
bar once the desired position is reached. Then,
using body pressure, move forward and rear-
ward on the seat to be sure that the seat
adjusters have latched.
Reclining Rear Seats
The recliner handle is located on the outside of
the seat cushion. To adjust the seatback, lift
upward on the handle, lean back on the seat-
back and when you reach the desired position,
release the handle.
Rear Seat Recliner Handle
WARNING!
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the
top of the seatback. This could impair
visibility or become a dangerous projectile in
a sudden stop or collision.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could
result in loss of control which could cause a
collision and serious injury or death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening
the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked.
Serious injury or death could result from a
poorly adjusted seat belt.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so
that the shoulder belt is no longer resting
against your chest. In a collision you could
slide under the seat belt, which could result
in serious injury or death.
2
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 17
18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Fold And Tumble Rear Seat
NOTE:
Prior to folding the rear seat, it may be neces-
sary to reposition the front seats.
Be sure that the front seats are fully upright
and positioned forward. This will allow the rear
seat to fold down easily.
1. Lift the seatback release lever located on
the upper outboard side of the seat.
Seatback Release Lever
2. Fold the seatback forward.
Seatback Folded
NOTE:
You may experience deformation in the seat
cushion from the seat belt buckles if the seats
are left folded for an extended period of time.
This is normal and by simply opening the seats to
the open position, over time the seat cushion will
return to its normal shape.
3. Locate the seatback recline lever on the
outboard side of the seat and lift upward
on the lever.
Seatback Recline Lever
4. Slowly flip the entire seat forward.
Folding Rear Seat
5. Slowly flip the entire seat rearward and
firmly lock the seat into position.
6. Raise the rear seatback and firmly lock the
seatback into position.
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 18
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19
Power Adjustment (Front Seats) — If
Equipped
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Push the power lumbar switch to adjust the
lumbar support. Release the switch when you
reach the desired position.
Power Lumbar Switch
Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the front driver and
passenger seats may be equipped with heaters
in both the seat cushions and seatbacks. The
controls for the front heated seats are located
on the outer side of the seat.
Heated Seat Switch
Push the heated seat switch once to turn the
heated seat on.
Push the heated seat switch a second time to
turn the heated seat off.
NOTE:
Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic
illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medica-
tion, alcohol use, exhaustion or other phys-
ical condition must exercise care when using
the seat heater. It may cause burns even at
low temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time.
Do not place anything on the seat or seat-
back that insulates against heat, such as a
blanket or cushion. This may cause the seat
heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has
been overheated could cause serious burns
due to the increased surface temperature of
the seat.
2
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 19
20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Armrest — If Equipped
To use the armrest, fold it downward.
Folding Rear Seat Armrest
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk
of injury by restricting head movement in the
event of a rear impact. Head restraints should
be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint
is located above the top of your ear.
Reactive Head Restraints — Front Seats
The front driver and passenger seats are
equipped with Reactive Head Restraints. In the
event of a rear impact, the Reactive Head
Restraints will automatically extend forward,
minimizing the gap between the back of the
occupant's head and the Reactive Head
Restraint.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
head restraint. To lower the head restraint,
push the adjustment button located at the base
of the head restraint, and push downward on
the head restraint.
Head Restraint
The Reactive Head Restraints will automatically
return to their normal position following a rear
impact. If the Reactive Head Restraints do not
return to their normal position, see an autho-
rized dealership immediately.
WARNING!
All occupants, including the driver, should not
operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat
until the head restraints are placed in their
proper positions in order to minimize the risk
of neck injury in the event of a crash.
Head restraints should never be adjusted
while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly
adjusted or removed could cause serious
injury or death in the event of a collision.
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 20
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21
NOTE:
Do not reposition the head restraint 180 degrees
to the incorrect position in an attempt to gain
additional clearance to the back of the head.
Rear Head Restraint Adjustment
The rear seats are equipped with adjustable
head restraints, the outboard head restraints
have two comfort positions, while the central
head restraint has to be used in the raised posi-
tion. When there are no occupants in the center
seat, the head restraint can be lowered for
maximum visibility for the driver. When the
center seat is being occupied, the head
restraint has to be in the raised position.
To raise the outboard head restraints, pull
upward on the head restraint. To lower the head
restraints, push the adjustment button located
at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.
Adjustment Buttons
For proper routing of a Child Seat Tether, refer
to “Occupant Restraints System” in “Safety” for
further information.
Front Head Restraint Removal
The head restraints should only be removed by
qualified technicians, for service purposes only.
If either of the head restraints require removal,
see an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could cause serious
injury or death to occupants of the vehicle.
Always securely stow removed head
restraints in a location outside the occupant
compartment.
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled
in the vehicle to properly protect the occu-
pants. Follow the re-installation instructions
above prior to operating the vehicle or occu-
pying a seat.
Do not place items over the top of the Reac-
tive Head Restraint, such as coats, seat
covers or portable DVD players. These items
may interfere with the operation of the Reac-
tive Head Restraint in the event of a collision
and could result in serious injury or death.
WARNING!
All occupants, including the driver, should not
operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat
until the head restraints are placed in their
proper positions in order to minimize the risk
of neck injury in the event of a crash.
Head restraints should never be adjusted
while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly
adjusted or removed could cause serious
injury or death in the event of a collision.
2
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 21
22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Head Restraint Removal
To remove the outboard or center head
restraints, raise it as far as it can go. Then, push
the adjustment button and the release button
at the base of each post while pulling the head
restraint up. To reinstall the head restraint, put
the head restraint posts into the holes and push
downward. Then, adjust it to the appropriate
height.
STEERING WHEEL
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column
This feature allows you to tilt the steering
column upward or downward. It also allows you
to lengthen or shorten the steering column. The
tilt/telescoping control handle is located on the
steering column, below the turn signal lever.
Tilt/Telescoping Control Handle
To unlock the steering column, pull the control
handle down. To tilt the steering column, move
the steering wheel upward or downward as
desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering
column, pull the steering wheel outward or push
it inward as desired. To lock the steering column
in position, push the control handle up until fully
engaged.
WARNING!
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could cause serious
injury or death to occupants of the vehicle.
Always securely stow removed head
restraints in a location outside the occupant
compartment.
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled
in the vehicle to properly protect the occu-
pants. Follow the re-installation instructions
above prior to operating the vehicle or occu-
pying a seat.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while
driving. Adjusting the steering column while
driving or driving with the steering column
unlocked, could cause the driver to lose
control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this
warning may result in serious injury or death.
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 22
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror
A single ball joint mirror is provided in the
vehicle. It is a twist on mirror that has a fixed
position at the windshield. The mirror installs on
the windshield button with a counterclockwise
rotation and requires no tools for mounting. The
mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and
right for various drivers. The mirror should be
adjusted to center on the view through the rear
window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be
reduced by moving the small control under the
mirror to the night position (toward the rear of
the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted
while the small control under the mirror is set in
the day position (toward the windshield).
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight
glare from vehicles behind you. You can turn the
feature on or off by pushing the button at the
base of the mirror. A light to the left of the
button will illuminate to indicate when the
dimming feature is activated. The sensor to the
right of the button does not illuminate.
NOTE:
This feature is disabled when the vehicle is
moving in REVERSE.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during
cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution
directly onto the mirror. Apply the solution
onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean.
2
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 23
24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Conversation Mirror — If Equipped
There is a conversation mirror located at the top
of the overhead console.
Conversation Mirror Location
To access the conversation mirror, pull down-
ward on the mirror until it reaches the open
position.
Conversation Mirror
Power Mirrors
The power mirror controls are located on the
driver’s door trim panel. To adjust a mirror, turn
the control knob toward the left or right mirror
positions indicated. Tilt the control wand in the
direction you want the mirror to move. When
you are finished adjusting the mirror, turn the
control to the center position to prevent acci-
dentally moving a mirror.
Power Mirror Controls
Folding Mirrors
The exterior mirrors are hinged to allow the
mirror to pivot forward or rearward to help avoid
damage. The mirror has three detent positions:
full forward, normal and full rearward.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost
or ice. This feature will be activated
whenever you turn on the rear window
defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Climate
Controls” in this chapter for further information.
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
An illuminated vanity mirror is located on the
sun visor. To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor
downward and swing the mirror cover upward.
The light turns on automatically. Closing the
mirror cover turns off the light.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 24
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25
Sun Visor “Slide-On-Rod” Feature — If
Equipped
The sun visor “Slide-On-Rod” feature allows for
additional flexibility in positioning the visor to
block out the sun.
To use the “Slide-On-Rod” feature, rotate the
sun visor downward and unclip it. Pull the sun
visor along the “Slide-On-Rod” until the sun
visor is in the desired position.
“Slide-On-Rod” Feature
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
Headlights
The multifunction lever, located on the left side
of the steering wheel, controls the operation of
the headlights, headlight high beams, lane
change assist and turn signals.
NOTE:
The external lights can only be turned on with the
ignition in the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position.
Multifunction Lever
Rotate the end of the multifunction lever upward
to the first detent for headlight operation.
Headlight Operation
NOTE:
When the headlights are turned on, the Daytime
Running Lights (DRLs) will be deactivated.
Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) — If
Equipped
To activate the Daytime Running Lights (DRLs),
rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the
O symbol.
NOTE:
The low beams and side/tail lights will not be on
with DRLs.
The DRLs function can be turned on or off
through the touchscreen. Refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
2
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 25
26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
High Beams
With the low beams activated, push the multi-
function lever forward (toward the front of the
vehicle) to turn on the high beams. The lever will
remain forward in a fixed position and the tell-
tale will illuminate in the instrument cluster
display. Pull the multifunction lever rearward
(toward the rear of the vehicle) to turn off the
high beams.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your head-
lights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever
toward you. This will cause the high beam head-
lights to turn on, and remain on, until the lever
is released.
Parking Lights
To turn on the parking lights, remove the key or
turn the ignition to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) posi-
tion and turn on the headlights.
NOTE:
If the parking lights are left on and the key is in
the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position with the door
open, an audible chime will sound and a
message will show in the instrument cluster
display. The chime will stop as soon as the door
is closed or the lights are switched off.
Follow Me Home/Headlight Delay
When this feature is selected, the driver can
choose to have the headlights remain on for a
preset period of time after the engine is
turned off.
Activation
Remove the key or turn the ignition to the STOP
(OFF/LOCK) position, and pull the multifunction
lever toward the steering wheel within two
minutes. Each time the lever is pulled, the acti-
vation of the lights will be extended by 30
seconds. The activation of the lights can be
extended to a maximum of 210 seconds.
Deactivation
Pull the multifunction lever toward the steering
wheel and hold it for more than two seconds.
Front Fog Lights — If Equipped
The fog light switch is located on the center
stack of the instrument panel, just below the
radio. Push the switch once to turn the front fog
lights on. Push the switch a second time to turn
the front fog lights off.
Courtesy Lights/Approaching Lights
This feature allows the driver to locate the
vehicle when parked in dark areas. It can be
enabled through the Uconnect system.
Through the Uconnect menu, under the
“Greeting Lights” setting, the driver can choose
between the following activation times: 0, 30,
60, or 90 seconds.
To switch off the feature, select 0 seconds.
When the vehicle is unlocked, the low beams
and parking lights will turn on for the time spec-
ified. Once the door is opened, the lights will
remain on for an additional three minutes, or
until all doors are closed. Once all doors are
closed, the lights will turn off after 10 seconds.
The lights can also be turned off by:
Locking the door
Placing the ignition in the AVV (START) or MAR
(ACC/ON/RUN) position
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia”
for further information.
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 26
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27
INTERIOR LIGHTS
Interior Lights Controls
The interior light switches are located in the
overhead console. The interior lights can be set
to three different positions (off/left position,
center position, on/right position).
Using the switch on the bottom of the overhead
console, push the switch to the on/right posi-
tion from its center position and the lights are
always on.
On/Right Position
Push the switch to the off/left position from its
center position and the lights are always off.
Off/Left Position
Leave the switch in the center position, and the
lights are turned on and off when the doors are
opened or closed.
Center Position
The switches on the left and right sides of the
overhead console controls the map or reading
function of the lights. Push the switch to the
right to turn on the right light and push the
switch to the left to turn on the left light.
Map/Reading Light Switches
CAUTION!
Before getting out of the vehicle be sure that
the switch is in the center position or that
the lights are off to avoid draining the
battery.
2
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 27
28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Interior Light Timing (Center Position)
There are four different modes of operation that
can be activated in this position:
When one door is opened, a three minute timer
is activated.
When the key is removed from the ignition
(within two minutes of the ignition being turned
off), a 10 second timer is activated.
When the doors are unlocked with the key fob,
a 10 second timer is activated.
When the doors are locked with the key fob, the
lights will turn off.
Interior Light Timing (On/Right Position)
When all doors are closed, a 15 minute timer is
activated.
NOTE:
The timer is deactivated when the key is moved
into the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position.
Rear Dome Lights — If Equipped
This vehicle may be equipped with a single rear
dome light.
Rear Dome Light Location — Closed Roof
For vehicles equipped with a sunroof, there are
two dome lights located below the grab handles
of the rear doors.
Rear Dome Light Locations — If Equipped With A Sunroof
The rear dome lights come on by opening any of
the doors. They will turn off when the doors are
closed.
WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer lever is located on
the right side of the steering column.
NOTE:
The windshield wipers/washers will only
operate with the ignition in the MAR (ACC/ON/
RUN) position.
Front Wiper Operation
There are five different modes of operation for
the front windshield wipers. The windshield
wiper lever can be raised or lowered to access
these modes.
Windshield Wiper Lever
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 28
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29
(Continued)
Windshield Wiper Off —
This is the normal position of the wiper lever.
Intermittent Wiper System
Intermittent Low Speed —
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the first
detent for low intermittent speed to operate the
wipers with a fixed pause of 10 seconds.
Intermittent High Speed —
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the
second detent for high intermittent speed to
operate the wipers with a delay that is depen-
dent on the speed of the vehicle.
Low Continuous Speed — LO
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the third
detent to operate the wipers at a low contin-
uous speed.
High Continuous Speed — HI
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the fourth
detent to operate the wipers at a high contin-
uous speed.
Front Windshield Washer Operation
Pull the windshield wiper/washer lever toward
the steering wheel to activate the washers. The
wipers will activate automatically for three
cycles after the lever is released.
Front Windshield Washer Operation
Manual High Speed/Mist
Push the lever upward from the off position. The
wipers will operate at high speed to clear off
road mist or spray from a passing vehicle. This
operation will continue until the lever is
released. When the lever is released, the wipers
will return to the off position and automatically
shut off.
CAUTION!
Turn the windshield wipers off when driving
through an automatic car wash. Damage to
the windshield wipers may result if the wiper
control is left in any position other than off.
In cold weather, always turn off the wiper
switch and allow the wipers to return to the
park position before turning off the engine. If
the wiper switch is left on and the wipers
freeze to the windshield, damage to the wiper
motor may occur when the vehicle is
restarted.
Always remove any buildup of snow that
prevents the windshield wiper blades from
returning to the off position. If the windshield
wiper control is turned off and the blades
cannot return to the off position, damage to
the wiper motor may occur.
CAUTION! (Continued)
2
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 29
30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Wiper/Washer Operation
Activation
Rotate the windshield wiper lever center ring
upward to operate the rear window wiper as
follows:
In intermittent mode, when the front wind-
shield wiper is not operating and the lever is in
the (intermittent) position.
In synchronous mode (at half the speed of the
front window wiper), when the front windshield
wiper is operating and the lever is in the
(intermittent) position, or when the REVERSE
gear is engaged, the front windshield wiper is
operating, and the lever is in the O (off) posi-
tion.
In continuous mode, when the lever is in the
(continuous) position.
Rear Window Wiper Operation
Pushing the windshield wiper lever forward acti-
vates the rear window washer. Keep the wind-
shield wiper lever pushed for more than half a
second to activate the rear window wiper as
well. Releasing the windshield wiper lever will
activate the smart washing function.
Rear Window Washer Operation
Deactivation
The function stops when the windshield wiper
lever is released.
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 30
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control system allows you to regu-
late the temperature, air flow, and direction of
air circulating throughout the vehicle. The
controls are located on the touchscreen (if
equipped) and on the instrument panel below
the radio.
Manual Climate Control Overview
Manual Climate Controls
2
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 31
32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Climate Control Descriptions
Icon Description
A/C Button
Push the A/C button to engage the Air Conditioning (A/C). A LED will illuminate when the A/C system is engaged.
Recirculation Button
Push and release this button to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air mode. Recirculation can
be used when outside air conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present. Recirculation can be
used in all modes except for Defrost. Recirculation may be unavailable if conditions exist that could create fogging on the
inside of the windshield. The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection. Continuous
use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode
is not recommended.
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if
equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after 20 minutes.
Temperature Control
Use this control to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger compartment. Rotating the knob
counterclockwise, from top center into the blue area of the scale, indicates cooler temperatures. Rotating the knob
clockwise, into the red area, indicates warmer temperatures.
Blower Control
There are seven blower speeds. Use this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the system in any mode you
select. The blower speed increases as you move the control clockwise from the off position.
NOTE:
Depending on the configuration, your vehicle may be equipped with four blower speeds.
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 32
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33
Panel Mode Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow
of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate
airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from
these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and
side window demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor
outlets.
Floor Mode Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
Mix Mode Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy
conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture
on the windshield.
Front Defrost Mode Front Defrost Mode
Turn the knob clockwise to change the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. Air comes from the windshield and side
window demist outlets. Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window
defrosting and defogging.
Icon Description
2
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 33
34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Climate Control Overview
Automatic Climate Controls
Automatic Climate Control Descriptions
Icon Description
A/C Button
Push and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when A/C is on. Performing this function again
will cause the A/C operation to switch into manual mode and the A/C indicator will turn off.
Recirculation Button
Push and release this button to change the system between Recirculation mode and outside air mode. Recirculation can
be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present. Recirculation can be used in
all modes. Recirculation may be unavailable if conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of the windshield.
The Air Conditioning (A/C) can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection. Continuous use of
the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not
recommended.
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 34
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35
AUTO Button
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Performing this
function will cause the system to switch between manual mode and automatic modes.
Refer to “Automatic Operation” within this section for further information.
Front Defrost Button
Push and release to change the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this feature is
on. Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the blower level
will increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and
defogging. Performing this function will cause the Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) to switch into manual mode. If
the front defrost mode is turned off the climate system will return the previous setting.
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if
equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after 20 minutes.
Passenger Temperature Knob
Provides the passenger with independent temperature control. Rotate the knob clockwise for warmer temperature
settings. Rotate the knob counterclockwise for cooler temperature settings. When the SYNC feature is active, the
passenger’s temperature will move with the driver’s temperature. Acting on the passenger's temperature will cause the
SYNC feature to turn off.
Blower Control Knob
Blower Control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system. There are eight blower speeds
available. The speeds can be selected using the blower control knob on the faceplate. The blower speed increases as
you turn the blower control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower speed decreases as you turn the
blower control knob counterclockwise.
Icon Description
2
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 35
36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Mode Control: Below are the modes of air distribution that can be selected individually, or in combination with each other to reach a desired
distribution mode.
Windshield Mode Windshield Mode
Air comes from the outlets directed at the windshield meant for defrosting, and side window demisting. This setting
works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield.
Panel Mode Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow
of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate
airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from
these outlets.
Floor Mode Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
Climate Control Power Button
Push and release this button to turn the Climate Control on/off.
Driver Temperature Knob
Provides the driver with independent temperature control. Rotate the knob clockwise for warmer temperature settings.
Rotate the knob counterclockwise for cooler temperature settings. When the SYNC feature is active, the driver’s
temperature will also manage the passenger’s temperature.
Icon Description
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 36
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37
Climate Control Functions
A/C (Air Conditioning)
The A/C (Air Conditioning) button allows the
operator to manually activate or deactivate the
A/C system. When the A/C system is turned on,
cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets
into the cabin. For improved fuel economy, push
the A/C button to turn off the A/C and manually
adjust the blower and airflow mode settings.
Also, make sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or
Floor modes.
NOTE:
For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is in
Mix, Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be
turned off, but the A/C system shall remain
active to prevent fogging of the windows.
If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side
glass, select Defrost mode, and increase
blower speed if needed.
If your A/C performance seems lower than
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser
(located in front of the radiator), for an accumu-
lation of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle
water spray from the front of the radiator and
through the condenser.
Recirculation
In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may
lead to excessive window fogging. The Recircu-
lation feature may be unavailable if conditions
exist that could create fogging on the inside of
the windshield.
On systems with Manual Climate Controls, if
equipped, the Recirculation mode is not
allowed in Defrost mode to improve window
clearing operation. Recirculation is disabled
automatically if this mode is selected.
Attempting to use Recirculation while in this
mode causes the LED in the control button to
blink and then turns off.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate.
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would
like the system to maintain by adjusting
the temperature control buttons. Once the
desired temperature is displayed, the
system achieves and automatically main-
tains that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort
level, it is not necessary to change the
settings. You experience the greatest effi-
ciency by simply allowing the system to
function automatically.
NOTE:
It is not necessary to move the temperature
settings for cold or hot vehicles. The system
automatically adjusts the temperature, mode,
and blower speed to provide comfort as quickly
as possible.
The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or
Metric units by selecting the U.S./Metric
customer-programmable feature.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the
automatic mode during cold start-ups, the
blower fan remains on low until the engine
warms up. The blower increases in speed and
transition into Auto mode.
2
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 37
38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of manual
override features. The AUTO symbol in the front
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) display
will be turned off when the system is being used
in the manual mode.
NOTE:
The system will not automatically sense the pres-
ence of fog, mist or ice on the windshield. Defrost
mode must be manually selected to clear the
windshield and side glass.
Operating Tips
NOTE:
Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather
conditions.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and
defroster performance, make sure the engine
cooling system is functioning properly and the
proper amount, type, and concentration of
coolant is used. Use of the Air Recirculation
mode during Winter months is not recom-
mended, because it may cause window fogging.
Vacation/Storage
Before you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more,
run the Air Conditioning (A/C) system at idle for
about five minutes, in fresh air with the blower
setting on high. This will ensure adequate
system lubrication to minimize the possibility of
compressor damage when the system is started
again. If you are leaving your vehicle dormant
for more than four weeks, disconnect the nega-
tive cable from the battery. Refer to “Jump
Starting Procedures” in “In Case Of Emergency”
for further information.
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in
mild, rainy, and/or humid weather. To clear
the windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and
increase the front blower speed. Do not use
the Recirculation mode without Air Condi-
tioning (A/C) for long periods, as fogging may
occur.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in
front of the windshield, is free of obstructions,
such as leaves. Leaves collected in the air
intake may reduce airflow, and if they enter the
plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
Winter months, make sure the air intake is clear
of ice, slush, and snow.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause
damage to the heating elements:
Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window
cleaners on the interior surface of the
window. Use a soft cloth and a mild washing
solution, wiping parallel to the heating
elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or
abrasive window cleaners on the interior
surface of the window.
Keep all objects a safe distance from the
window.
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 38
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39
Cabin Air Filter
The Climate Control system filters out dust and
pollen from the air. Contact an authorized
dealer to service your cabin air filter, and to
have it replaced when needed.
System Maintenance
In Winter, the Climate Control system must be
turned on at least once a month for about
10 minutes.
Have the system inspected at an authorized
dealership before the Summer.
NOTE:
The system uses R-1234yf coolant which does
not pollute the environment in the event of acci-
dental leakage. Under no circumstances is the
use of R-134a allowed.
Additional Electric Heater — If Equipped
The additional electric heater ensures more
rapid passenger compartment heating.
It activates in cold weather conditions, if the
following conditions are verified:
Outside temperature low
Engine coolant temperature low
Engine on
Fan speed set to 1st speed or greater
Temperature control knob turned completely
clockwise to red section
The heater is switched off when at least one of
the conditions above is no longer verified.
NOTE:
The power of the electric heater is modulated
according to the battery voltage.
Operating Tips Chart
WEATHER
CONTROL
SETTINGS
Hot Weather And
Vehicle Interior Is
Very Hot
Set the mode control
to , on, and
blower on high. Roll
down the windows
for a minute to flush
out the hot air. Adjust
the controls as
needed to achieve
comfort.
Warm Weather
Turn on and set
the mode control to
the position.
Cool Sunny
Operate in
position.
Cool & Humid
Conditions
Set the mode control
to and turn
on to keep
windows clear.
Cold Weather Set the mode control
to the position. If
windshield fogging
starts to occur, move
the control to the
position.
WEATHER
CONTROL
SETTINGS
2
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 39
40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WINDOWS
Power Windows
Power Window Controls
The power window controls are located on the
driver's door trim panel. There is a single switch
on the front passenger door, which operate the
front passenger window and a single switch on
each rear door that operates the rear passenger
door window. The window controls will operate
only when the ignition switch is in the MAR
(ACC/ON/RUN) position.
Power Window Switch Panel
NOTE:
The power window switches will remain active for
up to three minutes after the ignition switch is
placed in the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position. Opening
either front door will cancel this feature.
Auto-Down
The window switches have an Auto-Down
feature. Push the window switch for approxi-
mately one second, release, and the window will
go down automatically. To cancel the
Auto-Down movement, operate the switch in
either the up or down direction and release the
switch. To open the window part way, pull the
window switch briefly, and release the switch
when the window is in the desired position.
1 — Driver Side Front Window Switch
2 — Passenger Side Front Window Switch
3 — Passenger Side Rear Window Switch
4 — Driver Side Rear Window Switch
5 — Window Lockout Switch
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a
vehicle, and do not let children play with
power windows. Do not leave the key fob in
or near the vehicle, or in a location
accessible to children. Occupants,
particularly unattended children, can
become entrapped by the windows while
operating the power window switches. Such
entrapment may result in serious injury or
death.
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 40
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41
Auto-Up Feature With Auto-Reverse
Protection — If Equipped
Pull the window switch for approximately one
second, then release, and the window will go up
automatically.
To stop the window during an Auto-Up opera-
tion, push or pull the window switch again.
To close the window part way, pull the window
switch briefly and release it when you want the
window to stop.
NOTE:
If the window runs into any obstacle during
Auto-Closure, it will reverse direction and then
go back down. Remove the obstacle and use
the window switch again to close the window.
Any impact due to rough road conditions may
trigger the Auto-Reverse function unexpectedly
during Auto-Closure. If this happens, pull the
switch and hold to close the window manually.
Resetting The Auto-Up Feature
Should the Auto-Up feature stop working, the
window probably needs to be reset. To reset
Auto-Up:
1. Pull the window switch up to close the
window completely and continue to hold
the switch up for an additional two seconds
after the window is closed.
2. Push the window switch down to open the
window completely and continue to hold
the switch down for an additional two
seconds after the window is fully open.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the percep-
tion of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type
sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind
buffeting with the windows down, or the sunroof
(if equipped) in certain open or partially open
positions. This is a normal occurrence and can
be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the
rear windows open, open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If
the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open,
adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the
buffeting or open any window.
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The sunroof has two glass panels (the front one
is operational and the rear one fixed) and is
equipped with an electrically operated sun
blind.
The power sunroof and the power sun blind can
be operated only with the ignition key turned to
the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position.
The power sunroof and power sun blind
switches are located in the overhead console.
Power Sunroof Switches
WARNING!
There is no auto-reverse protection when the
window is almost closed. Be sure to clear all
objects from the window before closing.
1 — Power Sun Blind Switch
2 — Power Sunroof Switch
2
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 41
42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Opening
Push the power sunroof switch for approxi-
mately one second and the sunroof will stop at
the vented position. Push the power sunroof
switch a second time for approximately one
second and release, the sunroof will open fully,
then stop automatically. This is called “Express
Open”. To open the sunroof partway, push the
power sunroof switch briefly and release it when
you want the sunroof to stop.
NOTE:
During Express Open operation, any movement
of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
Closing
With the sunroof in the full open position, pull
and hold the power sunroof switch for approxi-
mately one second and release. The sunroof will
close completely, then stop automatically. This
is called “Express Close.” To close the sunroof
partway, pull the power sunroof switch briefly
and release it when you want the sunroof to
stop.
NOTE:
During Express Close operation, any movement
of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
Anti-Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the
closing of the sunroof during the Express Close
operation. If an obstruction in the path of the
sunroof is detected, the sunroof will automati-
cally retract. Remove the obstruction if this
occurs.
Sunroof Reinitialization
1. Place the ignition in the MAR (ACC/ON/
RUN) position.
2. Pull and hold the power sunroof close
switch until the sunroof is completely
closed and you hear an audible click.
3. Pull and hold the power sunroof close
switch again within five seconds. Do not
release the switch.
4. As the power sunroof close switch is held,
the sunroof panel will open completely and
then close again.
5. Once all sunroof motion has stopped,
release the power sunroof close switch.
NOTE:
If the switch is released prior to completion of this
procedure, the procedure must be repeated.
6. Confirm that express operation is func-
tional for open and close operations.
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never
leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in a
location accessible to children. Occupants,
particularly unattended children, can
become entrapped by the power sunroof
while operating the power sunroof switch.
Such entrapment may result in serious injury
or death.
In a collision, there is greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof.
You could also be seriously injured or killed.
Always fasten your seat belt properly and
make sure all passengers are properly
secured too.
Do not allow small children to operate the
sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other body
parts, or any object to project through the
sunroof opening. Injury may result.
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 42
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 43
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the percep-
tion of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type
sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind
buffeting with the windows down, or the sunroof
(if equipped) in certain open or partially open
positions. This is a normal occurrence and can
be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the
rear windows open, then open the front and
rear windows together to minimize the
buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the
sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
Power Sun Blind
Opening
Push the sun blind switch for approximately one
second and the sun blind will open completely,
then stop automatically. This is called “Express
Open.”
To open the sun blind partway, push the sun
blind switch briefly and release it when you want
the sun blind to stop.
With the blind fully open, pull the power sun
blind switch and the blind will move towards the
front part of the vehicle, until it is fully closed.
NOTE:
During the automatic opening and closing stages,
if the power sun blind switch is pulled again it will
stop the blind movement.
Closing
With the sun blind fully open, pull and hold the
power sun blind switch for approximately one
second and release. The sun blind will close
completely, then stop automatically. This is
called “Express Close.”
To close the sun blind partway, pull the sun
blind switch briefly and release it when you want
the sun blind to stop.
HOOD
Opening
To open the hood, two latches must be released
to open the hood.
1. Pull the hood release lever located under
the left side of the instrument panel.
Hood Release Lever
2. Move to the outside of the vehicle and
push the red safety catch lever to the left
and raise the hood. The safety catch lever
is located under the center front edge of
the hood.
Safety Catch Lever
2
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 43
44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Closing
LIFTGATE
Opening
To unlock the liftgate, use the key fob or acti-
vate the central locking button located on the
instrument panel below the radio.
To open the liftgate, push the liftgate electronic
release and pull the liftgate open with one fluid
motion.
Liftgate Electronic Release
Gas props support the liftgate in the open posi-
tion. However, because the gas pressure drops
with temperature, it may be necessary to assist
the props when opening the liftgate in cold
weather.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before
driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully
latched, it could open when the vehicle is in
motion and block your vision. Failure to
follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the
hood to close it. Lower hood to
approximately 12 inches (30 cm) and drop
the hood to close. Make sure hood is fully
closed for both latches. Never drive vehicle
unless hood is fully closed, with both latches
engaged.
WARNING!
Driving with the liftgate open can allow
poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle.
You and your passengers could be injured by
these fumes. Keep the liftgate closed when
you are operating the vehicle.
If you are required to drive with the liftgate
open, make sure that all windows are closed,
and the climate control blower switch is set at
high speed. Do not use the recirculation
mode.
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 44
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 45
Liftgate Emergency Release
As a security measure, a liftgate emergency
release is built into the liftgate latching mecha-
nism. To access the liftgate emergency release,
proceed as follows:
1. Remove the rear headrests and fold down
the seats completely.
2. Take the screwdriver from the tool box
supplied.
3. With the screwdriver, remove the yellow
tab.
Liftgate Emergency Release Yellow Tab Location
4. Press the screwdriver into the seat in order
to trigger the release trunk tab (follow the
direction arrow to open).
Cargo Area Features
Rear Cargo Storage Features
This vehicle features a load platform which can
be adjusted to three different heights, permit-
ting modular luggage compartment volume:
Position 1 (platform completely lowered)
permits maximum luggage compartment
capacity.
Position 2 (platform at threshold level) permits
a level load threshold to facilitate loading/
unloading of objects in the luggage compart-
ment. It also allows the space underneath to be
used as a additional compartment for stowing
objects which are more fragile or small.
Position 3 (platform completely raised) in
conjunction with the lowering of the rear seat
and front passenger side seatback, permits
long objects to be loaded. It is advisable to use
this position only for the actual period in which
the objects are transported, then return the
platform to position 1 or 2.
Tilt Of Cargo Floor
The cargo floor can also be arranged at an angle
(tilted toward the rear seatbacks), in order to
facilitate access to the area below the luggage
compartment as well as securing items within
this compartment in the event of sudden
braking of the vehicle.
Tilt Floor Feature
CAUTION!
The dimension of the cargo floor permit a
maximum capacity of a distributed weight of
154 lbs (70kg) (if positioned at threshold
level) or 88 lbs (40 kg) (if positioned at
raised level) do not add objects with a higher
weight.
2
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 45
46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Access To Double Load Compartment
To access the double load compartment,
proceed as follows:
1. Grip handle and raise platform, holding it
with one hand.
Load Platform
2. Place the desired objects in compartment.
Load Compartment
3. Then reposition the platform correctly in
the housings on the side panels and rear
crossmember.
Platform Housings
NOTE:
Movements of the load platform must take place
in a central position relative to the luggage
compartment.
Moving The Load Platform
To move the load platform from lower to upper
position, proceed as follows:
1. Grip handle and raise the platform, holding
it with one hand.
Load Platform
1 — Handle
2 — Platform
1 — Front Locations
2 — Rear Locations
1 — Handle
2 — Platform
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 46
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 47
2. Position the platform correctly on housing
on the side panels.
Raised Position
Cargo Area Tie Downs — If Equipped
There are two tie downs inside the luggage
compartment for attaching cables which can
secure the load carried.
Two additional tie downs are located on the rear
crossmember.
Cargo Tie Down Locations
Cargo hooks are also available on the side
panels to fix loads which are not excessively
heavy (e.g. bags).
Cargo Side Panel Hook Location
Storage Compartments
There are two storage compartments located on
the rear side panels.
Storage Compartment
1 — Housing Locations
2 — Front Housing Locations
CAUTION!
The maximum load admitted per each bag
hook is 22 lbs (10 kg).
2
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 47
48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink® replaces up to three remote
controls (hand-held transmitters) that operate
devices such as garage door openers, motor-
ized gates, lighting or home security systems.
The HomeLink® unit operates off your vehicles
battery.
The HomeLink® buttons that are located in the
sunvisor designate the three different Home-
Link® channels. The HomeLink® indicator is
located above the center button.
HomeLink® Buttons/Sunvisor
NOTE:
HomeLink® is disabled when the vehicle security
alarm is active.
Before You Begin Programming
HomeLink®
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of
the garage before you begin programming.
For more efficient programming and accurate
transmission of the radio-frequency signal, it is
recommended that a new battery be placed in
the hand-held transmitter of the device that is
being programmed to the HomeLink® system.
To erase the channels, place the ignition in the
MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position and push and
hold the two outside HomeLink® buttons (I and
III) for up 20 seconds or until the red indicator
flashes.
NOTE:
Erasing all channels should only be performed
when programming HomeLink® for the first
time. Do not erase channels when program-
ming additional buttons.
If you have any problems, or require assis-
tance, please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or,
on the Internet at HomeLink.com for informa-
tion or assistance.
Programming A Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers that
were manufactured after 1995:
These garage door openers can be identified by
the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located where
the hanging antenna is attached to the garage
door opener. It is NOT the button that is
normally used to open and close the door. The
name and color of the button may vary by manu-
facturer.
Training The Garage Door Opener
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 48
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 49
1. Place the ignition in the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN)
position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to
3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the Home-
Link® button you wish to program while
keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in
view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button you
want to program while you push and hold
the hand-held transmitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe
the indicator light. The HomeLink® indi-
cator will flash slowly and then rapidly after
HomeLink® has received the frequency
signal from the hand-held transmitter.
Release both buttons after the indicator
light changes from slow to rapid.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the
garage), locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING”
button. This can usually be found where
the hanging antenna wire is attached to
the garage door opener/device motor.
Firmly push and release the “LEARN” or
“TRAINING” button. On some garage door
openers/devices there may be a light that
blinks when the garage door opener/
device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.
NOTE:
You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
step after the LEARN button has been pushed.
6. Return to the vehicle and push the
programmed HomeLink® button twice
(holding the button for two seconds each
time). If the garage door opener/device
activates, programming is complete.
NOTE:
If the garage door opener/device does not acti-
vate, push the button a third time (for two
seconds) to complete the training.
To program the remaining two HomeLink®
buttons, repeat each step for each remaining
button. DO NOT erase the channels.
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers manu-
factured before 1995:
1. Place the ignition in the MAR (ACC/ON/
RUN) position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to
3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the Home-
Link® button you wish to program while
keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in
view.
3. Push and hold the Homelink® button you
want to program while you push and hold
the hand-held transmitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe
the indicator light. The HomeLink® indi-
cator will flash slowly and then rapidly after
HomeLink® has received the frequency
signal from the hand-held transmitter.
Release both buttons after the indicator
light changes from slow to rapid.
2
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 49
50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
5. Push and hold the programmed
HomeLink® button and observe the
indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete and the
garage door/device should activate
when the HomeLink® button is pushed.
To program the two remaining Home-
Link® buttons, repeat each step for
each remaining button. DO NOT erase
the channels.
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
For programming transmitters in Canada/
United States that require the transmitter
signals to “time-out” after several seconds of
transmission:
Canadian radio frequency laws require trans-
mitter signals to time-out (or quit) after several
seconds of transmission, which may not be long
enough for HomeLink® to pick up the signal
during programming. Similar to this Canadian
law, some US gate operators are designed to
time-out in the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the
cycling process to prevent possible overheating
of the garage door or gate motor.
1. Place the ignition in the MAR (ACC/ON/
RUN) position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to
3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the Home-
Link® button you wish to program while
keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in
view.
3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink®
button while you push and release (cycle)
your hand-held transmitter every two
seconds until HomeLink® has successfully
accepted the frequency signal. The indi-
cator light will flash slowly and then rapidly
when fully trained.
4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to
change flash rates. When it changes, it is
programmed. It may take up to 30 seconds
or longer in rare cases. The garage door
may open and close while you are program-
ming.
5. Push and hold the programmed
HomeLink® button and observe the
indicator light.
NOTE:
If the indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete and the
garage door/device should activate
when the HomeLink® button is pushed.
To program the two remaining
HomeLink® buttons, repeat each
st
ep for each remaining button. DO
NOT erase the channels.
If
you unplugged the garage door opener/device
for programming, plug it back in at this time.
Using HomeLink®
To operate, switch the ignition to the MAR
(ACC/ON/RUN) position and the press and
release the programmed HomeLink® button.
Activation will now occur for the programmed
device (i.e., garage door opener, gate oper-
ator, security system, entry door lock, home/
office lighting, etc.,). The hand-held trans-
mitter of the device may also be used at any
time. If the ignition is placed in the STOP
(OFF/LOCK) position, HomeLink® will remain
active for three minutes. During this time, if
the vehicle is locked, HomeLink® is disabled.
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 50
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 51
Security
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell
or turn in your vehicle.
To do this, push and hold the two outside
buttons for 20 seconds until the red indicator
flashes.
NOTE:
All channels will be erased. Individual channels
cannot be erased.
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is
disabled when the vehicle security alarm is
active.
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming Home-
Link®, here are some of the most common solu-
tions:
Replace the battery in the garage door opener
hand-held transmitter.
Push the LEARN button on the garage door
opener to complete the training for a Rolling
Code.
Did you unplug the device for programming and
remember to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance,
please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the
Internet at HomeLink.com for information or
assistance.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic Develop-
ment applicables aux appareils radio exempts
de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouil-
lage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en comprom-
ettre le fonctionnement.
WARNING!
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a
dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the
garage while programming the transceiver.
Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or
death.
Your motorized door or gate will open and
close while you are programming the
universal transceiver. Do not program the
transceiver if people, pets or other objects
are in the path of the door or gate. Only use
this transceiver with a garage door opener
that has a “stop and reverse” feature as
required by Federal safety standards. This
includes most garage door opener models
manufactured after 1982. Do not use a
garage door opener without these safety
features. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on
the Internet at HomeLink.com for safety infor-
mation or assistance.
2
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 51
52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equip-
ment.
INTERNAL EQUIPMENT
Storage
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the
passenger side of the instrument panel and
features both an upper and lower storage area.
Glove Compartment Storage
To open the upper glove compartment, push
upward on the handle release. The glove
compartment door will automatically open.
To open the lower glove compartment, pull the
release handle.
Front Center Armrest Storage — If Equipped
The front center armrest contains a storage
compartment. To open the storage compart-
ment, push in the release latch on the front of
the armrest.
Front Center Armrest
Lift upward on the armrest to gain access to the
storage area.
The front center armrest can also be lifted up
and adjusted in three positions. To adjust the
armrest down, pull up on the armrest, then
push the latch down.
Armrest Storage Release Latch
1 — Upper Glove Compartment
2 — Lower Glove Compartment
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 52
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 53
Cupholders
For the driver and front passenger, cupholders
are located on the floor console between the
front seats.
Front Cupholders
For the rear seat passengers, there is one
cupholder located in the center armrest
(if equipped).
Rear Cupholder
Power Outlets
Passenger Compartment Power Outlet
The power outlet is located on the instrument
panel, below the climate controls. It only oper-
ates with the ignition key at MAR (ACC/ON/
RUN).
On models with optional "smoker’s kit," the
cigar lighter takes the place of the power
socket. Refer to “Cigar Lighter” in this section
for further information.
Passenger Compartment Power Outlet
NOTE:
Do not connect devices with power higher than
180 W to the socket. Do not damage the socket
by using unsuitable adaptors.
Cigar Lighter — If Equipped
This is located on the instrument panel,
below the climate controls. To activate the
cigar lighter, push and release the knob.
After a few seconds the knob automatically
returns to its initial position, and the cigar
lighter is ready for use.
2
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 53
54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
Always check that the cigar lighter is switched
off.
Do not connect devices with power higher than
180 W to the socket. Do not damage the
socket by using unsuitable adaptors.
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
The crossbars and siderails are designed to
carry the weight on vehicles equipped with a
luggage rack. The load must not exceed 110 lbs
(50 kg), and should be uniformly distributed
over the luggage rack crossbars.
There are two attachment points inside the door
jambs that the roof rack crossbars attach to.
Roof Rack Attachment Points
Distribute cargo weight evenly on the roof rack
crossbars. The roof rack does not increase the
total load carrying capacity of the vehicle. Be
sure the total load of cargo inside the vehicle
plus that on the external rack does not exceed
the maximum vehicle load capacity.
WARNING!
When the cigar lighter is in use it becomes
very hot. To avoid serious injury, handle the
cigar lighter with care. Always check that the
cigar lighter has turned off.
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied down before
driving your vehicle. Improperly secured
loads can fly off the vehicle, particularly
at high speeds, resulting in personal
injury or property damage. Follow the roof
rack cautions when carrying cargo on
your roof rack.
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 54
55
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Instrument Cluster
3
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 55
56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Instrument Cluster Descriptions
1. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
2. Instrument Cluster Display
The instrument cluster display shows
messages when the appropriate condi-
tions exist. Refer to “Instrument Cluster
Display” in this chapter for further infor-
mation.
3. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolu-
tions per minute (RPM x 1000).
4. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine
coolant temperature. Any reading within
the normal range indicates that the
engine cooling system is operating satis-
factorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a
higher temperature when driving in hot
weather or up mountain grades. It
should not be allowed to exceed the
upper limits of the normal operating
range.
5. Fu
el Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the
fuel tank when the ignition switch is in
the ON/RUN position.
The fuel pump symbol points to the
side of the vehicle where the fuel door is
located.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous.
You or others could be badly burned by
steam or boiling coolant. You may want to
call an authorized dealer for service if your
vehicle overheats. If you decide to look
under the hood yourself, refer to the warning
under “Cooling System Pressure Cap” in
“Servicing And Maintenance” for further
information.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system
could damage your vehicle. If the
temperature gauge reads “H,” pull over and
stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H,” turn the engine off
immediately and call an authorized dealer
for service.
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 56
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 57
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Your vehicle may be equipped with an instru-
ment cluster display, which offers useful infor-
mation to the driver. With the ignition in the OFF
position, opening/closing of a door will activate
the display for viewing, and display the total
miles (kilometers) in the odometer. Your instru-
ment cluster display is designed to display
important information about your vehicle’s
systems and features. Using a driver interactive
display located on the instrument panel, your
instrument cluster display can show you how
systems are working and give you warnings
when they aren’t. The steering wheel mounted
controls allow you to scroll through and enter
the main menus and submenus. You can
access the specific information you want and
make selections and adjustments.
Instrument Cluster Display
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons
The system allows the driver to select informa-
tion by pushing the following buttons mounted
on the steering wheel:
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons
1 — Arrow Up/Down Scroll Through Menus And
Submenus
2 — Arrow Right/Lef t Acce ss Information/
Submenu Scr eens
3 — OK Button For Se lecting And Resetting
Informatio n
3
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 57
58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Up Arrow Button
Push and release the up arrow
button to scroll upward through
the main menu and submenus.
Down Arrow Button
Push and release the down arrow
button to scroll downward through
the main menu and submenus.
Right Arrow Button
Push and release the right arrow
button to access the information
screens or submenu screens of a
main menu item.
Left Arrow Button
Push and release the left arrow
button to access the information
screens or submenu screens of a
main menu item.
OK Button
The OK button may be used for the
following:
Select
Reset (hold)
Change Engine Oil Indicator System
Your vehicle is equipped with an Engine Oil
Change Indicator system. The “Oil Change
Required” message will flash in the instrument
cluster display for approximately 10 seconds
after a single chime has sounded to indicate
the next scheduled oil change interval. The
Engine Oil Change Indicator system is duty
cycle based, which means the engine oil
change interval may fluctuate, dependent
upon your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to
display each time the ignition is cycled to the ON
or RUN position. To reset the Oil Change Indi-
cator system (after performing the scheduled
maintenance), refer to the following procedure.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position
(do not start the engine).
2. Fully push the accelerator pedal slowly,
three times within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK
position.
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when the
vehicle is started, the Oil Change Indicator
system did not reset. If necessary, repeat this
procedure.
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 58
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 59
Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items
The menu comprises a series of functions
arranged in a cycle. The menu includes the
following functions:
Speedometer
Trip
Instantaneous Info (If Equipped)
Trip A
Trip B
Vehicle Info
Tire Pressure
Service
Audio
Phone — If Equipped
Navigation — If Equipped
Messages
Settings
Display
Safety & Assistance
Security
Speedometer
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Speedometer Menu item is displayed in
the instrument cluster display. Push and release
the OK button to change the speedometer scale
from MPH to km/h. Push and hold the OK button
to return the speedometer from km/h to MPH.
Trip
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Trip menu item is displayed in the
instrument cluster display.
The Trip menu provides the following
submenus:
Instantaneous Info (If Equipped)
Trip A
Trip B
Instantaneous Info (If Equipped)
The Instantaneous Info submenu contains the
following information.
Distance To Empty (Range)
Instantaneous Fuel Consumption
3
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 59
60 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Trip A
Trip A submenu is divided into two pages that contain the following information.
Trip B
Trip B submenu is divided into two pages that contain the following information.
Page Menu item Description
Trip A First Page Distance Shows the distance traveled during Trip A.
Travel Time Shows the total travel time for Trip A.
Push the OK button on the Steering Wheel to reset the values on this page.
Trip A Second Page Average Consumption Shows the average fuel usage during Trip A.
Average Speed Shows the average speed during Trip A.
Push the OK button on the Steering Wheel to reset the values on this page.
Page Menu item Description
Trip B First Page Distance Shows the distance traveled during Trip B.
Travel Time Shows the total travel time for Trip B.
Push the OK button on the Steering Wheel to reset the values on this page.
Trip B Second Page Average Consumption Shows the average fuel usage during Trip B.
Average Speed Shows the average speed during Trip B.
Push the OK button on the Steering Wheel to reset the values on this page.
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 60
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 61
Vehicle Info
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Vehicle Info menu item is displayed in
the instrument cluster display.
The Vehicle Info menu will display the following
submenus:
Tire Pressure
Service
Tire Pressure
The Tire Pressure submenu will indicate an
under inflated tire. When a tire goes below the
recommended inflation pressure, the Tire Pres-
sure Monitoring System (TPMS) telltale will illu-
minate in the cluster, and the Tire Pressure
submenu will appear in the Instrument Cluster
Display, indicating all underinflated tires. A “Tire
Low” message will be present, and the under
inflated tire or tires will be highlighted.
Refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)” under “Safety” for further information.
Service
The Service submenu will display information
about scheduled maintenance. A pop-up will
appear in the display if service is required.
The following information will display in the
pop-up:
Distance to next service visit
Days until next service visit
Audio
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Audio menu title is displayed in the
instrument cluster display.
The Audio menu item will display information
based on the audio source being listened to.
Phone
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Phone menu item is displayed in the
instrument cluster display. The Phone menu will
provide pop-ups during phone calls.
The Phone menu has the following submenus:
Phone: Displays information on phone connec-
tivity. Pushing the OK button on the Steering
Wheel will enter the phone submenus.
Recent Calls: Displays information on the last
ten calls made. The information provided
includes the phone number / phone book
name and type of call (incoming, outgoing, or
lost).
Message Reader: Displays text messages
received. Push the OK button on the Steering
Wheel to select a message to read. The system
will also display if a message has been read or
not.
Favorite Numbers: Displays up to ten favorite
numbers. Push the OK button on the Steering
Wheel to call a favorite number.
3
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 61
62 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Navigation — If Equipped
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Navigation menu item is displayed in
the instrument cluster display. The Navigation
menu provides “turn by turn” instructions when
using the vehicle’s navigation function.
The following information is displayed:
Distance to the next turn
The name of the street
An icon representing the next turn
Stored Messages
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Messages Menu item is highlighted.
This feature shows the number of stored
warning messages. Pushing the left or right
arrow button will allow you to scroll through the
stored messages.
Settings
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Settings menu item is displayed in the
instrument cluster display. The Settings menu
provides a list of settings that affect the display
and functionality of the instrument cluster
display.
The settings are as follows:
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 62
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 63
Setting Menu Item Setting Name Description
Display Backlight Increase or decrease the brightness of the display.
Screen Setup Configure display with the following options:
Zone 1:
Temperature (Default)
Time
Date
Compass
None
Zone 2:
Time (Default)
Title
Date
Compass
Temperature
Audio Info
None
Phone Repetition Turn on or off the display of phone related pop-ups.
Nav. repetition Turn on or off the display of navigation related pop-ups.
Auto Reset Trip B Reset Trip B.
3
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 63
64 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Setting Menu Item Setting Name Description
Hill Start Assist — If Equipped Assists when starting a vehicle from a stop on
a hill. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control
System” in “Safety” for further information.
Park Assist Volume Increase or decrease Park Assist volume.
Speed Warning Gives notification of when a set speed is
exceeded.
Rear Seat Alert — If Equipped Alerts the driver to check the back seat of the
vehicle before they get out.
Reset Engine Oil Resets “CHANGE ENGINE OIL” notification after
an oil change has been performed.
Pass. Airbag — If Equipped Allows Passenger Airbag deactivation.
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 64
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 65
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in
the instrument panel together with a dedicated
message and/or acoustic signal when appli-
cable. These indications are indicative and
precautionary and must not be considered as
exhaustive and/or alternative to the informa-
tion contained in the Owner’s Manual, which
you are advised to read carefully in all cases.
Always refer to the information in this chapter in
the event of a failure indication. All active tell-
tales will display first if applicable. The system
check menu may appear different based upon
equipment options and current vehicle status.
Some telltales are optional and may not appear.
Red Warning Lights
Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight
seconds as a bulb check when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
MAR/ON/RUN position. If the light is
either not on during startup, stays on, or turns
on while driving, have the system inspected at
an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This
light will illuminate with a single chime when a
fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has been
detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared.
If the light comes on intermittently or remains
on while driving, have an authorized dealer
service the vehicle immediately.
Brake Warning Light
This warning light monitors various
brake functions, including brake
fluid level and parking brake appli-
cation. If the brake light turns on it
may indicate that the parking brake is
applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or
that there is a problem with the anti-lock
brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake
has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at
the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it
indicates a possible brake hydraulic system
malfunction or that a problem with the Brake
Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will
remain on until the condition has been
corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying
the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may be
felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve
braking capacity in the event of a failure to a
portion of the hydraulic system. A leak in either
half of the dual brake system is indicated by the
Brake Warning Light, which will turn on when
the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is
corrected.
NOTE:
The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level
conditions. The vehicle should have service
performed, and the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is
necessary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on
is dangerous. Part of the brake system may
have failed. It will take longer to stop the
vehicle. You could have a collision. Have the
vehicle checked immediately.
3
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 65
66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) are also equipped with Electronic
Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of
an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn
on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to
the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be
checked by turning the ignition switch from the
OFF position to the ON/RUN position. The light
should illuminate for approximately two
seconds. The light should then turn off unless
the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have
the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking
brake is applied with the ignition switch in the
ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake
application.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning
Light
This warning light will illuminate to
inform of a problem with the Elec-
tronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If
a problem is detected while the
vehicle is running, the light will either stay on or
flash depending on the nature of the problem.
Cycle the ignition when the vehicle is safely and
completely stopped and the transmission is
placed in the PARK (P) position. The light should
turn off. If the light remains on with the vehicle
running, your vehicle will usually be drivable;
however, see an authorized dealer for service
as soon as possible.
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is
running, immediate service is required and you
may experience reduced performance, an
elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your
vehicle may require towing. The light will come
on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
MAR/ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as
a bulb check. If the light does not come on
during starting, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light
This warning light warns of an over-
heated engine condition. If the engine
coolant temperature is too high, this
indicator will illuminate and a single
chime will sound. If the temperature reaches
the upper limit, a continuous chime will sound
for four minutes or until the engine is able to
cool, whichever comes first.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over
and stop the vehicle. If the Air Conditioning (A/C)
system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmis-
sion into NEUTRAL (N) and idle the vehicle. If the
temperature reading does not return to normal,
turn the engine off immediately and call for
service.
Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “In Case
Of Emergency” for further information.
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 66
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 67
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
When the ignition is first placed in the
ON/RUN or MAR/ON/RUN position, if
the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a
chime will sound and the light will turn
on. When driving, if the driver or front passenger
seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will flash or remain on continu-
ously and a chime will sound. Refer to “Occu-
pant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for further
information.
Electric Power Steering Fault Warning Light
This warning light will turn on when
there's a fault with the Electric Power
Steering (EPS) system. Refer to
“Power Steering” in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for
approximately 15 seconds when the
vehicle security alarm is arming, and
then will flash slowly until the vehicle
is disarmed.
Battery Charge Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when
the battery is not charging properly. If
it stays on while the engine is running,
there may be a malfunction with the
charging system. Contact an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
This indicates a possible problem with the elec-
trical system or a related component.
Transmission Fault Warning Light
This light will illuminate (together
with a message in the instrument
cluster display and a buzzer) to indi-
cate a transmission fault. Contact an
authorized dealer if the message remains after
restarting the engine.
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate low engine oil pressure. If the
light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle, shut off the engine as soon as
possible, and contact an authorized dealer. A
chime will sound when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is
corrected. This light does not indicate how
much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level
must be checked under the hood.
Oil Pressure Sensor Failure Warning Light
This light will illuminate if there is a
failure of the oil pressure sensor. If this
light illuminates, take it to an autho-
rized dealer and have them inspect it.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist
could pose a safety risk to yourself and
others. Service should be obtained as soon
as possible.
3
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 67
68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when one
or more door(s) are not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving and a door is opened,
there will also be a single chime.
Liftgate Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when the
liftgate is open/ajar/not fully closed.
Yellow Warning Lights
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Warning Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS). The light will turn
on when the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN or MAR/ON/RUN position
and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while
driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake
system is not functioning and service is
required. However, the conventional brake
system will continue to operate normally if the
brake warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should
be serviced as soon as possible to restore the
benefits of Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS light
does not turn on when the ignition is placed in
the ON/RUN or MAR/ON/RUN position, have
the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Warning
Light — If Equipped
“The Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
Indicator Light” in the instrument
cluster will come on when the ignition
is placed in the ON/RUN or MAR/ON/
RUN position, and when ESC is activated, it
should go out with the engine running. If the
ESC Indicator Light comes on continuously with
the engine running, a malfunction has been
detected in the ESC system. If this light remains
on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle
has been driven several miles (kilometers) at
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an
authorized dealer as soon as possible to have
the problem diagnosed and corrected.
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” and the “ESC
Indicator Light” come on momentarily each
time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
MAR/ON/RUN position.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN or
MAR/ON/RUN, the ESC system will be on, even
if it was turned off previously.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive.
This light will come on when the vehicle is in an
ESC event.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light indicates the Elec-
tronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/
RUN or MAR/ON/RUN, the ESC system will be
on, even if it was turned off previously.
Low Fuel Indicator Light
When the fuel level reaches approxi-
mately 3 gal (11 L) this light will turn
on, and remain on until fuel is added.
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 68
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 69
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator
Warning Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indi-
cator Light (MIL) is a part of an
Onboard Diagnostic System called
OBD II that monitors engine and auto-
matic transmission control systems. This
warning light will illuminate when the ignition is
in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If
the bulb does not come on when turning the
ignition switch from OFF to ON/RUN, have the
condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing
gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate
the light after engine start. The vehicle should
be serviced if the light stays on through several
typical driving styles. In most situations, the
vehicle will drive normally and will not require
towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash
to alert serious conditions that could lead to
immediate loss of power or severe catalytic
converter damage. The vehicle should be
serviced by an authorized dealer as soon as
possible if this occurs.
Passenger Air Bag Indicator Light
This light should come and remain on
for four to eight seconds as a bulb
check when the ignition is first turned
to the AVV/START or MAR/ON/RUN
position. If the light stays on, or comes on while
driving it may indicate a problem with a
passenger air bag system, if the light flickers it
may indicate an air bag warning light failure.
Have an authorized dealer service the air bag
system immediately.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a
message is displayed to indicate that
the tire pressure is lower than the
recommended value and/or that slow
pressure loss is occurring. In these cases,
optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may
not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition
mentioned above, the display will show the indi-
cations corresponding to each tire.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as
referenced above, can reach higher
temperatures than in normal operating
conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive
slowly or park over flammable substances
such as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc.
This could result in death or serious injury to
the driver, occupants or others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) on could cause damage
to the vehicle control system. It also could
affect fuel economy and driveability. If the
MIL is flashing, severe catalytic converter
damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
3
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 69
70 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres-
sure telltale when one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when
the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pres-
sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated
tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if under-inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pres-
sure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
the system is not operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined with the low
tire pressure telltale. When the system detects
a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi-
mately one minute and then remain continu-
ously illuminated. This sequence will continue
upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as
the malfunction exists. When the malfunction
indicator is illuminated, the system may not be
able to detect or signal low tire pressure as
intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a
variety of reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning
properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow
the TPMS to continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat
tires as handling may be compromised. Stop
the vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and
steering. If a tire puncture occurs, repair
immediately using the dedicated tire repair
kit and contact an authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the
original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS
pressures and warning have been
established for the tire size equipped on
your vehicle. Undesirable system operation
or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the
same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket
wheels can cause sensor damage. Using
aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor
to become inoperable. After using an
aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended
that you take your vehicle to an authorized
dealer to have your sensor function checked.
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 70
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 71
Yellow Indicator Lights
External Light Failure Indicator Light — If
Equipped
The External Light Failure Indicator
will come on when a failure to one of
the following lights is detected:
Direction Indicators
Backup Lights
Parking Lights
Daytime Running Lights
License Plate Lights
The failure relating to these lights could be:
One or more blown bulbs
A blown protection fuse
A break in the electrical connection
Fuel Cutoff Indicator Light — If Equipped
This telltale will illuminate after an
accident has occurred, and the
system has shut the fuel off.
Fuel Cutoff Failure Light — If Equipped
This light will illuminate if there is a
fuel cutoff failure. If this light illumi-
nates, take it to an authorized dealer
and have them inspect it.
Fuel Level Sensor Failure
This light illuminates when there is a
fuel level sensor failure. If this light
illuminates, take it to an authorized
dealer and have them inspect it.
Icy Road Condition Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This light will illuminate during an icy
road condition.
Rear Defrost Light
This indicator will illuminate when the
rear window defroster is on. The rear
window defroster automatically turns
off after 20 minutes.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause
damage to the heating elements:
Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window
cleaners on the interior surface of the
window. Use a soft cloth and a mild washing
solution, wiping parallel to the heating
elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or
abrasive window cleaners on the interior
surface of the window.
Keep all objects a safe distance from the
window.
3
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 71
72 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
This light indicates that the transmis-
sion fluid temperature is running hot.
This may occur with severe usage,
such as trailer towing. If this light
turns on, safely pull over and stop the vehicle.
Then, shift the transmission into PARK and run
the engine at idle or slightly higher until the light
turns off.
Immobilizer Fail / VPS Electrical Alarm
Indicator Light
This telltale will illuminate when the
vehicle security alarm system has
detected an attempt to break into the
vehicle.
Green Indicator Lights
Cruise Control Set Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate
when the cruise control is set to the
desired speed. Refer to “Speed
Control” in “Starting And Operating”
for further information.
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate
when the front fog lights are on.
Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate
when the park lights or headlights are
turned on.
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
When the left or right turn signal is
activated, the turn signal indicator will
flash independently and the corre-
sponding exterior turn signal lamps
will flash. Turn signals can be activated when
the multifunction lever is moved down (left) or
up (right).
NOTE:
A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is
driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either
turn signal on.
Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if
either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
White Indicator Lights
Cruise Control On Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when the cruise
control has been turned on, but a
speed is not selected. Refer to
“Speed Control” in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when
the Transmission Temperature Warning Light
is illuminated you could cause the fluid to
boil over, come in contact with hot engine or
exhaust components and cause a fire.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission
Temperature Warning Light illuminated will
eventually cause severe transmission
damage or transmission failure.
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 72
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 73
(Continued)
Cruise Control Canceled Light — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when a
set cruise control value has been
canceled by the driver, but cruise
control is still enabled. Refer to
“Speed Control” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information.
Blue Indicator Lights
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to
indicate that the high beam head-
lights are on. With the low beams acti-
vated, push the multifunction lever
forward (toward the front of the vehicle) to turn
on the high beams. Pull the multifunction lever
rearward (toward the rear of the vehicle) to turn
off the high beams. If the high beams are off,
pull the lever toward you for a temporary high
beam on, "flash to pass" scenario.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated
Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II. This
system monitors the performance of the emis-
sions, engine, and transmission control
systems. When these systems are operating
properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as
engine emissions well within current govern-
ment regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD
II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL). It will also store diagnostic codes
and other information to assist your service
technician in making repairs. Although your
vehicle will usually be drivable and not need
towing, see an authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity
Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard
Diagnostic system (OBD II) and a connection
port to allow access to information related to
the performance of your emissions controls.
Authorized service technicians may need to
access this information to assist with the diag-
nosis and service of your vehicle and emissions
system.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could
cause further damage to the emission control
system. It could also affect fuel economy and
driveability. The vehicle must be serviced
before any emissions tests can be
performed.
If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is
running, severe catalytic converter damage
and power loss will soon occur. Immediate
service is required.
WARNING!
ONLY an authorized service technician
should connect equipment to the OBD II
connection port in order to read the VIN, diag-
nose, or service your vehicle.
If unauthorized equipment is connected to
the OBD II connection port, such as a
driver-behavior tracking device, it may:
Be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could
be impaired or a loss of vehicle control
could occur that may result in an acci-
dent involving serious injury or death.
3
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 73
74 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
For further information, refer to “Cybersecurity”
in the “Multimedia” section.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement
to pass an inspection of your vehicle's emis-
sions control system. Failure to pass could
prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection
and Maintenance (I/M), this check
verifies the “Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not
on when the engine is running, and that the
OBD II system is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The
OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle
was recently serviced, recently had a depleted
battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II
system should be determined not ready for the
I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test
station. To check if your vehicle's OBD II system
is ready, you must do the following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position,
but do not crank or start the engine.
NOTE:
If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to
the ON position, you will see the “Malfunc-
tion Indicator Light (MIL)” symbol come on
as part of a normal bulb check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two
things will happen:
The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and
then return to being fully illuminated until you
turn OFF the ignition or start the engine. This
means that your vehicle's OBD II system is not
ready and you should not proceed to the I/M
station.
The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you place the ignition in the off
position or start the engine. This means that
your vehicle's OBD II system is ready and you
can proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should
see an authorized dealer or repair facility. If your
vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery
failure or replacement, you may need to do
nothing more than drive your vehicle as you
normally would in order for your OBD II system
to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II
system is ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated
during normal vehicle operation you should
have your vehicle serviced before going to the I/
M station. The I/M station can fail your vehicle
because the MIL is on with the engine running.
Access, or allow others to access, infor-
mation stored in your vehicle systems,
including personal information.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 74
75
(Continued)
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides
increased vehicle stability and brake perfor-
mance under most braking conditions. The
system automatically prevents wheel lock, and
enhances vehicle control during braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure
that the ABS is working properly each time the
vehicle is started and driven. During this
self-check, you may hear a slight clicking sound
as well as some related motor noises.
ABS is activated during braking when the
system detects one or more wheels begin to
lock. Road conditions such as ice, snow,
gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris,
or panic stops may increase the likelihood of
ABS activation(s).
You also may experience the following when
ABS activates:
The ABS motor noise (it may continue to run for
a short time after the stop)
The clicking sound of solenoid valves
Brake pedal pulsations
A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of
the stop
NOTE:
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
WARNING!
The ABS contains sophisticated electronic
equipment that may be susceptible to inter-
ference caused by improperly installed or
high output radio transmitting equipment.
This interference can cause possible loss of
anti-lock braking capability. Installation of
such equipment should be performed by
qualified professionals.
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to a colli-
sion. Pumping makes the stopping distance
longer. Just press firmly on your brake pedal
when you need to slow down or stop.
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it
increase braking or steering efficiency
beyond that afforded by the condition of the
vehicle brakes and tires or the traction
afforded.
The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including
those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, following another vehicle too closely, or
hydroplaning.
The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or
dangerous manner that could jeopardize the
user’s safety or the safety of others.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 75
76 SAFETY
NOTE:
ABS is designed to function with the Original
Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) tires. Modifica-
tion may result in degraded ABS performance.
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
The yellow “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” will
turn on when the ignition is placed in the ON/
RUN mode and may stay on for as long as four
seconds.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains
on or comes on while driving, it indicates that
the anti-lock portion of the brake system is not
functioning and that service is required.
However, the conventional brake system will
continue to operate normally if the “Anti-Lock
Brake Warning Light” is on.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the
brake system should be serviced as soon as
possible to restore the benefits of anti-lock
brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light”
does not come on when the ignition is placed in
the ON/RUN mode, have the light repaired as
soon as possible.
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System
Your vehicle is equipped with a advanced Elec-
tronic Brake Control (EBC) system that includes
the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Brake Assist
System (BAS), Traction Control System (TCS),
Hill Start Assist (HSA), Dynamic Steering Torque
(DST), and Electronic Stability Control (ESC). All
systems work together to enhance vehicle
stability and control in various driving condi-
tions and are commonly referred to as ESC.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The Brake Assist System (BAS) is designed to
optimize the vehicle’s braking capability during
emergency braking maneuvers. The system
detects an emergency braking situation by
sensing the rate and amount of brake applica-
tion and then applies optimum pressure to the
brakes. This can help reduce braking distances.
The BAS complements the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly
results in the best BAS assistance. To receive
the benefit of the system, continuous braking
pressure must be applied during the stopping
sequence (do not “pump” the brakes). Do not
reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is
no longer desired. Once the brake pedal is
released, the BAS is deactivated.
Dynamic Steering Torque (DST)
The Dynamic Steering Torque (DST) function
uses the integration of the Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) system with the electric power
steering to increase the safety level of the whole
vehicle.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road condi-
tions.
BAS cannot prevent collisions, including
those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
hydroplaning.
The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or
dangerous manner, which could jeopardize
the user's safety or the safety of others.
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 76
SAFETY 77
In critical situations (braking with different grip
conditions), through the DST function the ESC
system controls the steering to implement an
additional torque contribution on the steering
wheel, to suggest the most correct maneuver to
the driver.
The coordinated action of brakes and steering
increases the safety and vehicle control feeling.
NOTE:
DST is a driving aid system and does not replace
the driver's actions while driving the vehicle.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) anticipates the
potential for wheel lift by monitoring the driver’s
steering wheel input and the speed of the
vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate of
change of the steering wheel angle and
vehicle's speed are sufficient to potentially
cause wheel lift, it then applies the appropriate
brake and may also reduce engine power to
lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur. ERM
will only intervene during very severe or evasive
driving maneuvers.
ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift
occurring during severe or evasive driving
maneuvers. It cannot prevent wheel lift due to
other factors, such as road conditions, leaving
the roadway, or striking objects or other vehi-
cles.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system
enhances directional control and stability of the
vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC
corrects for oversteering or understeering of the
vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate
wheel to assist in counteracting the over-
steering or understeering condition. Engine
power may also be reduced to help the vehicle
maintain the desired path. ESC uses sensors in
the vehicle to determine the vehicle path
intended by the driver and compares it to the
actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path
does not match the intended path, ESC applies
the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in
counteracting the oversteer or understeer
condition.
Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more
than appropriate for the steering wheel
position.
Understeer - when the vehicle is turning
less than appropriate for the steering
wheel position.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road
conditions, and driving conditions, influence
the chance that wheel lift or rollover may
occur. ERM cannot prevent all wheel lift or
rollovers, especially those that involve
leaving the roadway or striking objects or
other vehicles. The capabilities of an
ERM-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner,
which could jeopardize the user's safety or
the safety of others.
4
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 77
78 SAFETY
(Continued)
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
And ESC OFF Indicator Light
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indi-
cator Light in the instrument cluster
will come on when the ignition switch
is placed in the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN)
position for four seconds. If the ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light comes on continu-
ously with the engine running, a malfunction
has been detected in the ESC system. If this
light remains on after several ignition cycles,
and the vehicle has been driven several miles
(kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph
(48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as soon as
possible to have the problem diagnosed and
corrected.
WARNING!
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road condi-
tions. ESC cannot prevent all accidents,
including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery
surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot
prevent collisions resulting from loss of
vehicle control due to inappropriate driver
input for the conditions. Only a safe, atten-
tive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.
The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or
dangerous manner which could jeopardize
the user’s safety or the safety of others.
Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly
maintain your vehicle, may change the
handling characteristics of your vehicle, and
may negatively affect the performance of the
ESC system. Changes to the steering system,
suspension, braking system, tire type and
size or wheel size may adversely affect ESC
performance. Improperly inflated and
unevenly worn tires may also degrade ESC
performance. Any vehicle modification or
poor vehicle maintenance that reduces the
effectiveness of the ESC system can increase
the risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle roll-
over, personal injury and death.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 78
SAFETY 79
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
(located in the instrument cluster) starts to
flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the
ESC system becomes active. The ESC Activa-
tion/Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes
when the Traction Control System (TCS) is
active. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indi-
cator Light begins to flash during acceleration,
ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your
speed and driving to the prevailing road condi-
tions.
NOTE:
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
and the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on
momentarily each time the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position.
Each time the ignition is placed in the ON posi-
tion, the ESC system will be ON even if it was
turned off previously.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates
the Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
is partially off or full off.
ESC Operating Modes
The ESC system has two available operating
modes.
Full On
This is the normal operating mode for ESC.
Whenever the vehicle is started, the system will
be in this mode. This mode should be used for
most driving situations. ESC should only be
turned to “Partial Off” for specific reasons as
noted. Refer to “Partial Off” for additional infor-
mation.
Partial Off
The “ESC OFF” button is located in the switch
bank above the climate control. To enter the
“Partial Off” mode, momentarily push the “ESC
OFF” button and the “ESC Activation/Malfunc-
tion Indicator Light” will illuminate. To turn the
ESC on again, momentarily push the “ESC OFF”
button and the “ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light” will turn off. This will restore the
normal “ESC On” mode of operation.
ESC Off Switch
NOTE:
To improve the vehicle's traction when driving
with snow chains, or when starting off in deep
snow, sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to
switch to the “Partial Off” mode by momentarily
pushing the “ESC OFF” button. Once the situation
requiring “Partial Off” mode is overcome, turn
ESC back on by momentarily pushing the “ESC
OFF” button. This may be done while the vehicle
is in motion.
4
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 79
80 SAFETY
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The Hill Start Assist (HSA) system is designed to
assist the driver when starting a vehicle from a
stop on a hill. HSA will maintain the level of
brake pressure the driver applied for a short
period of time after the driver takes his foot off
the brake pedal. If the driver does not apply the
throttle during this short period of time, the
system will release brake pressure and the
vehicle will roll down the hill. The system will
release brake pressure in proportion to the
amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts
to move in the intended direction of travel.
HSA Activation Criteria
The following criteria must be met in order for
HSA to activate:
The vehicle must be stopped.
The vehicle must be on a 5% grade or greater
hill.
The gear selection matches vehicle uphill direc-
tion (i.e., vehicle in NEUTRAL (N) (manual trans-
mission), vehicle facing uphill is in forward
gear; vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE (R)
gear).
Disabling/Enabling HSA
If you wish to turn the HSA system on or off, this
can be done through the instrument cluster
display menu. Refer to “Instrument Cluster
Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
Traction Control System (TCS)
The Traction Control System (TCS) monitors the
amount of wheel spin of each of the driven
wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake pres-
sure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and
engine power is reduced to provide enhanced
acceleration and stability. A feature of the TCS
system, Brake Limited Differential (BLD), func-
tions similar to a limited slip differential and
controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If
one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster
than the other, the system will apply the brake
of the spinning wheel. This will allow more
engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is
not spinning. This feature remains active even if
TCS and ESC are in the Partial Off mode or Full
Off mode. Refer to “Electronic Stability Control
(ESC)” in this section for further information.
WARNING!
When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS
functionality of ESC (except for the limited
slip feature described in the TCS section)
has been disabled and the “ESC Off
Indicator Light” will be illuminated. When in
“Partial Off” mode, the engine power
reduction of TCS is disabled, and the
enhanced vehicle stability offered by the
ESC system is reduced.
WARNING!
There may be situations on minor hills with a
loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer,
when the system will not activate and slight
rolling may occur. This could cause a
collision with another vehicle or object.
Always remember the driver is responsible
for braking the vehicle.
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 80
SAFETY 81
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based
on the vehicle recommended cold tire pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by
about 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This
means that when the outside temperature
decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire
pressure should always be set based on cold
inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven
for at least three hours, or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The
cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the
tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – General Informa-
tion” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for infor-
mation on how to properly inflate the vehicle’s
tires. The tire pressure will also increase as the
vehicle is driven, this is normal and there should
be no adjustment for this increased pressure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pres-
sure if the tire pressure falls below the low pres-
sure warning limit for any reason, including low
temperature effects, or natural pressure loss
through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low
tire pressure as long as the condition exists,
and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at
or above the recommended cold tire pressure
on the placard. Once the low tire pressure
warning (TPMS Warning Light) illuminates, you
must increase the tire pressure to the recom-
mended cold tire pressure in order for the TPMS
Warning Light to turn off. The system will auto-
matically update and the TPMS Warning Light
will turn off once the system receives the
updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to
be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
information.
For example, your vehicle may have a recom-
mended cold (parked for more than three
hours) tire pressure of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the
ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the
measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa), a
temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease
the tire pressure to approximately 23 psi (159
kPa). This tire pressure is sufficiently low
enough to turn on the TPMS Warning Light.
Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure
to rise to approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but
the TPMS Warning Light will still be on. In this
situation, the TPMS Warning Light will turn off
only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle’s
recommended cold tire pressure value.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures
and warnings have been established for the
tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesir-
able system operation or sensor damage may
result when using replacement equipment
that is not of the same size, type, and/or
style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor
damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After
using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recom-
mended that you take your vehicle to an
authorized dealership to have your sensor
function checked.
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pres-
sure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This
will prevent moisture and dirt from entering
the valve stem, which could damage the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Sensor.
4
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 81
82 SAFETY
NOTE:
The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire
care and maintenance, or to provide warning of
a tire failure or condition.
The TPMS should not be used as a tire pres-
sure gauge while adjusting the tire pressure.
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire
failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel effi-
ciency and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsi-
bility to maintain correct tire pressure using an
accurate tire gauge, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of
the TPMS Warning Light.
Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire
pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual
tire pressure in the tire.
Base System
This is the TPMS warning indicator
located in the instrument cluster.
The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel
rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire
pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire
pressure readings to the Receiver Module.
NOTE:
It is particularly important for you to check the tire
pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle regu-
larly and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following compo-
nents:
Receiver Module
Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning
Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster, an
acoustic signal will be activated, and the “Check
left or right front/rear tire” text message will
display when one or more of the four active road
tire pressures are low. Should this occur, you
should stop as soon as possible, check the
inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle,
and inflate each tire to the vehicle’s recom-
mended cold placard pressure value. The
system will automatically update and the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Light will extinguish once
the updated tire pressures have been received.
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive
this information.
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 82
SAFETY 83
Check TPMS Warnings
The TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off for
75 seconds and remain on solid when a system
fault is detected, an audible chime will be acti-
vated and the “Service Tire Pressure Monitoring
System” text message will display. If the ignition
is cycled, this sequence will repeat providing the
system fault still exists. The TPMS Warning Light
will turn off when the fault condition no longer
exists. A system fault can occur with any of the
following scenarios:
Jamming due to electronic devices or driving
next to facilities emitting the same radio
frequencies as the TPM sensors.
Installing some form of aftermarket window
tinting that affects radio wave signals.
Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
housings.
Using tire chains on the vehicle.
Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM
sensors.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be equipped with a compact
spare wheel and tire assembly.
The compact spare tire does not have a tire
pressure monitoring sensor. Therefore, the
TPMS will not monitor the tire pressure in the
compact spare tire.
If you install the compact spare tire in place
of a road tire that has a pressure below the
low-pressure warning limit, upon the next
ignition cycle, a chime will sound and the
TPMS Warning Light will still turn on due to
the low tire.
However, after driving the vehicle for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the
TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off for 75
seconds and then remain on solid.
This occurs for each subsequent ignition cycle,
a chime will sound and the TPMS Warning Light
will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
remain on solid.
Once you repair or replace the original road tire
and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the
compact spare tire, the TPMS will update auto-
matically and the TPMS Warning Light will turn
off, as long as no tire pressure is below the
low-pressure warning limit in any of the four
active road tires. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
information.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
4
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 83
84 SAFETY
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic Develop-
ment applicables aux appareils radio exempts
de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouil-
lage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en comprom-
ettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in
your vehicle are the restraint systems:
Occupant Restraint Systems Features
Seat Belt Systems
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air
Bags
Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on
others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized
dealer.
Important Safety Precautions
Please pay close attention to the information in
this section. It tells you how to use your restraint
system properly, to keep you and your passen-
gers as safe as possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to
minimize the risk of harm from a deploying
air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should
always ride buckled up in the rear seat of a
vehicle with a rear seat.
2. A child who is not big enough to wear the
vehicle seat belt properly (Refer to “Child
Restraints” in this section for further infor-
mation) must be secured in the appro-
priate child restraint or belt-positioning
booster seat in a rear seating position.
3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a
rear-facing child restraint) must ride in the
front passenger seat, move the seat as far
back as possible and use the proper child
restraint (Refer to “Child Restraints” in this
section for further information).
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder
belt behind them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided
with your child restraint to make sure that
you are using it properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap
and shoulder belts properly.
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 84
SAFETY 85
(Continued)
7. The driver and front passenger seats
should be moved back as far as practical to
allow the front air bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If
your vehicle has side air bags, and deploy-
ment occurs, the side air bags will inflate
forcefully into the space between occu-
pants and the door and occupants could
be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs
to be modified to accommodate a
disabled person, refer to the “Customer
Assistance” section for customer service
contact information.
Seat Belt Systems
Buckle up even though you are an excellent
driver, even on short trips. Someone on the road
may be a poor driver and could cause a collision
that includes you. This can happen far away
from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives,
and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries
in a collision. Some of the worst injuries happen
when people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat
belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the
risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the
vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be
belted at all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert)
Driver and Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the
driver and outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The Belt
Alert feature is active whenever the ignition
switch is in the AVV/START or MAR/RUN posi-
tion.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition
switch is first in the AVV/START or MAR/RUN
position, a chime will signal for a few seconds. If
the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition switch
is first in the AVV/START or MAR/RUN position
the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and
remain on until both outboard front seat belts
are buckled. The outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front
passenger seat is unoccupied.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do not
transport a rear-facing child restraint in that
vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 85
86 SAFETY
(Continued)
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated
when the vehicle is moving above a specified
vehicle speed range and the driver or outboard
front seat passenger is unbuckled (if equipped
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)
(the outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when the outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning
sequence starts by blinking the Seat Belt
Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent
chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence
has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light
will remain on until the seat belts are buckled.
The BeltAlert warning sequence may repeat
based on vehicle speed until the driver and
occupied outboard front seat passenger seat
belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all
occupants to buckle their seat belts.
Change of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while the
vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert warning
sequence will begin until the seat belts are
buckled again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when the outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered
when an animal or other items are placed on
the outboard front passenger seat or when the
seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recom-
mended that pets be restrained in the rear seat
(if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers
that are secured by seat belts, and cargo is
properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an
authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recom-
mend deactivating BeltAlert.
NOTE:
If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is
unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn
on and remain on until the driver and outboard
front seat passenger seat belts are buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are
equipped with lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only
during very sudden stops or collisions. This
feature allows the shoulder part of the seat belt
to move freely with you under normal condi-
tions. However, in a collision the seat belt will
lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside
of the vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, the air bags
won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt
even though you have air bags.
In a collision, you and your passengers can
suffer much greater injuries if you are not
properly buckled up. You can strike the inte-
rior of your vehicle or other passengers, or
you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always
be sure you and others in your vehicle are
buckled up properly.
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside
or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be
seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
seat belts.
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 86
SAFETY 87
(Continued)
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly. Occupants,
including the driver, should always wear their
seat belts whether or not an air bag is also
provided at their seating position to minimize
the risk of severe injury or death in the event
of a crash.
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You
might suffer internal injuries, or you could
even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these
instructions to wear your seat belt safely and
to keep your passengers safe, too.
Two people should never be belted into a
single seat belt. People belted together can
crash into one another in a collision, hurting
one another badly. Never use a lap/shoulder
belt or a lap belt for more than one person, no
matter what their size.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk
of injury in a collision. The seat belt forces
won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones,
but across your abdomen. Always wear the
lap part of your seat belt as low as possible
and keep it snug.
A twisted seat belt may not protect you prop-
erly. In a collision, it could even cut into you.
Be sure the seat belt is flat against your body,
without twists. If you can’t straighten a seat
belt in your vehicle, take it to an authorized
dealer immediately and have it fixed.
A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong
buckle will not protect you properly. The lap
portion could ride too high on your body,
possibly causing internal injuries. Always
buckle your seat belt into the buckle nearest
you.
A seat belt that is too loose will not protect
you properly. In a sudden stop, you could
move too far forward, increasing the possi-
bility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly.
A seat belt that is worn under your arm is
dangerous. Your body could strike the inside
surfaces of the vehicle in a collision,
increasing head and neck injury. A seat belt
worn under the arm can cause internal inju-
ries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones.
Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a
collision.
A shoulder belt placed behind you will not
protect you from injury during a collision. You
are more likely to hit your head in a collision
if you do not wear your shoulder belt. The lap
and shoulder belt are meant to be used
together.
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection.
Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immedi-
ately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat
belt system. Seat belt assemblies must be
replaced after a collision.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 87
88 SAFETY
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit
back and adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back
of the front seat, and next to your arm in
the rear seat (for vehicles equipped with a
rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and pull
out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up
the webbing as far as necessary to allow
the seat belt to go around your lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit,
insert the latch plate into the buckle until
you hear a “click.”
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and
lies low across your hips, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt
portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To
loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the
latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug
seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under
the seat belt in a collision.
Positioning The Lap Belt
5. Position the shoulder belt across the
shoulder and chest with minimal, if any
slack so that it is comfortable and not
resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red
button on the buckle. The seat belt will
automatically retract to its stowed posi-
tion. If necessary, slide the latch plate
down the webbing to allow the seat belt
to retract fully.
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 88
SAFETY 89
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted
lap/shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible
to the anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm)
above the latch plate, grasp and twist the
seat belt webbing 180 degrees to create a
fold that begins immediately above the
latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the
folded webbing. The folded webbing must
enter the slot at the top of the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it
clears the folded webbing and the seat belt
is no longer twisted.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants
including pregnant women: the risk of injury in
the event of an accident is reduced for the
mother and the unborn child if they are wearing
a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the
abdomen and across the strong bones of the
hips. Place the shoulder belt across the chest
and away from the neck. Never place the
shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped
with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of
a collision. These devices may improve the
performance of the seat belt by removing slack
from the seat belt early in a collision. Preten-
sioners work for all size occupants, including
those in child restraints.
NOTE:
These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still
must be worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occu-
pant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air
bags, the pretensioners are single use items. A
deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag
must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped
with an Energy Management feature that may
help further reduce the risk of injury in the event
of a collision. The seat belt system has a
retractor assembly that is designed to release
webbing in a controlled manner.
4
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 89
90 SAFETY
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating posi-
tions are equipped with a Switchable Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) which is used to secure
a child restraint system. For additional informa-
tion, refer to “Installing Child Restraints Using
The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child
Restraints” section of this manual. The figure
below illustrates the locking feature for each
seating position.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
Locations
If the passenger seating position is equipped
with an ALR and is being used for normal usage,
only pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to
comfortably wrap around the occupant’s
mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the
ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound
as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to
retract completely in this case and then care-
fully pull out only the amount of webbing neces-
sary to comfortably wrap around the occupant’s
mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle
until you hear a "click."
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is
automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still
retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt.
Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a
child restraint is installed in a seating position
that has a seat belt with this feature. Children
12 years old and under should always be prop-
erly restrained in the rear seat of a vehicle with
a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder
belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull down-
ward until the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat
belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound.
This indicates the seat belt is now in the
Automatic Locking Mode.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do not
transport a rear-facing child restraint in that
vehicle.
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 90
SAFETY 91
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt
and allow it to retract completely to disengage
the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the
vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on
others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized
dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect you
in a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) monitors the internal circuits and inter-
connecting wiring associated with the electrical
Air Bag System Components. Your vehicle may
be equipped with the following Air Bag System
Components:
Air Bag System Components
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Knee Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Seat Track Position Sensors
Air Bag Warning Light
The Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) monitors the readiness of the
electronic parts of the air bag system
whenever the ignition switch is in the
AVV/START or MAR/ACC/ON/RUN position. If
the ignition switch is in the STOP/OFF/LOCK
position the air bag system is not on and the air
bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply
system that may deploy the air bag system even
if the battery loses power or it becomes discon-
nected prior to deployment.
WARNING!
The seat belt assembly must be replaced if
the switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat
belt function is not working properly when
checked according to the procedures in the
Service Manual.
Failure to replace the seat belt assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to
restrain occupants who are wearing the seat
belt or children who are using booster seats.
The locked mode is only used to install
rear-facing or forward-facing child restraints
that have a harness for restraining the child.
4
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 91
92 SAFETY
(Continued)
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in
the instrument panel for approximately four to
eight seconds for a self-check when the ignition
switch is in the MAR/ACC/ON/RUN position.
After the self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light
will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in
any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag
Warning Light, either momentarily or continu-
ously. A single chime will sound to alert you if
the light comes on again after initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illu-
minate the instrument panel Air Bag Warning
Light if a malfunction is detected that could
affect the air bag system. The diagnostics also
record the nature of the malfunction. While the
air bag system is designed to be maintenance
free, if any of the following occurs, have an
authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on
during the four to eight seconds when the igni-
tion switch is first in the MAR/ACC/ON/RUN
position.
The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the
four to eight-second interval.
The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermit-
tently or remains on while driving.
NOTE:
If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be disabled.
In this condition the air bags may not be ready to
inflate for your protection. Have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system immediately.
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder
belts for both the driver and front passenger.
The front air bags are a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver front air bag is
mounted in the center of the steering wheel.
The passenger front air bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compart-
ment. The words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are
embossed on the air bag covers.
Front Air Bag/Knee Bolster Locations
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your
instrument panel could mean you won’t have
the air bag system to protect you in a
collision. If the light does not come on as a
bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it
comes on as you drive, have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster
3 — Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag/Driver Knee
Impact Bolster
WARNING!
Being too close to the steering wheel or
instrument panel during front air bag deploy-
ment could cause serious injury, including
death. Air bags need room to inflate. Sit back,
comfortably extending your arms to reach the
steering wheel or instrument panel.
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 92
SAFETY 93
(Continued)
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multi-
stage driver and front passenger air bags. This
system provides output appropriate to the
severity and type of collision as determined by
the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which
may receive information from the front impact
sensors (if equipped) or other system compo-
nents.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately
during an impact that requires air bag deploy-
ment. A low energy output is used in less severe
collisions. A higher energy output is used for
more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/
or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that
detects whether the driver or front passenger
seat belt is buckled. The seat belt buckle switch
may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced
Front Air Bags.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or
front passenger seat track position sensors that
may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced
Front Air Bags based upon seat position.
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide addi-
tional protection by supplementing the seat
belts. Front air bags are not expected to reduce
the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover colli-
sions. The front air bags will not deploy in all
frontal collisions, including some that may
produce substantial vehicle damage — for
example, some pole collisions, truck under-
rides, and angle offset collisions.
Never place a rear-facing child restraint
in front of an air bag. A deploying
passenger front air bag can cause death
or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing
child restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint
in the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat.
If the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint
in that vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
No objects should be placed over or near the
air bag on the instrument panel or steering
wheel because any such objects could cause
harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe
enough to cause the air bag to inflate.
Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually.
You may damage the air bags and you could
be injured because the air bags may no
longer be functional. The protective covers
for the air bag cushions are designed to open
only when the air bags are inflating.
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, air bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts
even though you have air bags.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 93
94 SAFETY
On the other hand, depending on the type and
location of impact, front air bags may deploy in
crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but
that produce a severe initial deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle
deceleration over time, vehicle speed and
damage by themselves are not good indicators
of whether or not an air bag should have
deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in
all collisions, and also are needed to help keep
you in position, away from an inflating air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the
front air bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate
the front air bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the
upper passenger side of the instrument panel
separate and fold out of the way as the air bags
inflate to their full size. The front air bags fully
inflate in less time than it takes to blink your
eyes. The front air bags then quickly deflate
while helping to restrain the driver and front
passenger.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the
knees of the driver and front passenger, and
position the front occupants for improved inter-
action with the front air bags.
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental
Driver Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument
panel below the steering column. The Supple-
mental Driver Knee Air Bag provides enhanced
protection during a frontal impact by working
together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and
front air bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags
(SABs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental
Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs).
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags
(SABs) are located in the outboard side of the
front seats. The SABs are marked with “SRS
AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” on a label or on the seat
trim on the outboard side of the seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occu-
pant injury during certain side impacts, in addi-
tion to the injury reduction potential provided by
the seat belts and body structure.
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
WARNING!
Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee
impact bolsters in any way.
Do not mount any accessories to the knee
impact bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos,
citizen band radios, etc.
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 94
SAFETY 95
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on
the outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover.
The inflating SAB deploys through the seat
seam into the space between the occupant and
the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed
and with such a high force that it could injure
occupants if they are not seated properly, or if
items are positioned in the area where the SAB
inflates. Children are at an even greater risk of
injury from a deploying air bag.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental
Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs) are located above the side windows.
The trim covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS
AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.”
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and
other injuries to front and rear seat outboard
occupants in certain side impacts, in addition to
the injury reduction potential provided by the
seat belts and body structure.
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side
windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside
edge of the headliner out of the way and covers
the window. The SABICs inflate with enough
force to injure occupants if they are not belted
and seated properly, or if items are positioned
in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children
are at an even greater risk of injury from a
deploying air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial
or complete ejection of vehicle occupants
through side windows in certain side impact
events.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place
objects between you and the Side Air Bags;
the performance could be adversely affected
and/or objects could be pushed into you,
causing serious injury.
WARNING!
Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage or
other cargo up high enough to block the
deployment of the SABICs. The trim covering
above the side windows where the SABIC and
its deployment path are located should
remain free from any obstructions.
In order for the SABICs to work as intended,
do not install any accessory items in your
vehicle which could alter the roof. Do not add
an aftermarket sunroof to your vehicle. Do
not add roof racks that require permanent
attachments (bolts or screws) for installation
on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of
the vehicle for any reason.
4
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 95
96 SAFETY
Side Impacts
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in
certain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) determines whether the
deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular
impact event is appropriate, based on the
severity and type of collision. The side impact
sensors aid the ORC in determining the appro-
priate response to impact events. The system is
calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on the
impact side of the vehicle during impacts that
require Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side
impacts, the Side Air Bags deploy inde-
pendently; a left side impact deploys the left
Side Air Bags only and a right-side impact
deploys the right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of
whether or not Side Air Bags should have
deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side colli-
sions, including some collisions at certain
angles, or some side collisions that do not
impact the area of the passenger compartment.
The Side Air Bags may deploy during angled or
offset frontal collisions where the front air bags
deploy.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less
time than it takes to blink your eyes.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners are
designed to activate in certain rollover events.
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) deter-
mines whether deployment in a particular rollover
event is appropriate, based on the severity and
type of collision. Vehicle damage by itself is not a
good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags and
seat belt pretensioners should have deployed.
WARNING!
Occupants, including children, who are up
against or very close to Side Air Bags can be
seriously injured or killed. Occupants,
including children, should never lean on or
sleep against the door, side windows, or area
where the side air bags inflate, even if they
are in an infant or child restraint.
Seat belts (and child restraints where appro-
priate) are necessary for your protection in all
collisions. They also help keep you in posi-
tion, away from an inflating Side Air Bag. To
get the best protection from the Side Air
Bags, occupants must wear their seat belts
properly and sit upright with their backs
against the seats. Children must be properly
restrained in a child restraint or booster seat
that is appropriate for the size of the child.
WARNING!
Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not
lean against the door or window. Sit upright in
the center of the seat.
Being too close to the Side Air Bags during
deployment could cause you to be severely
injured or killed.
Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead
to more severe injuries in a collision. The Side
Air Bags work with your seat belt to restrain
you properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags
won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt
even though you have Side Air Bags.
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 96
SAFETY 97
The Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners
will not deploy in all rollover events. The rollover
sensing system determines if a rollover event
may be in progress and whether deployment is
appropriate. In the event the vehicle experi-
ences a rollover or near rollover event, and
deployment is appropriate, the rollover sensing
system will deploy the side air bags and seat
belt pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial
or complete ejection of vehicle occupants
through side windows in certain rollover or side
impact events.
Air Bag System Components
NOTE:
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) moni-
tors the internal circuits and interconnecting
wiring associated with electrical Air Bag System
Components listed below:
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Knee Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Seat Track Position Sensors
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate imme-
diately after deployment.
NOTE:
Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is
wrong with the air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air
bags, any or all of the following may occur:
The air bag material may sometimes cause
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the occu-
pants as the air bags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or
those you might get sliding along a carpet or
gymnasium floor. They are not caused by
contact with chemicals. They are not perma-
nent and normally heal quickly. However, if you
haven’t healed significantly within a few days,
or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately.
As the air bags deflate, you may see some
smoke-like particles. The particles are a normal
by-product of the process that generates the
non-toxic gas used for air bag inflation. These
airborne particles may irritate the skin, eyes,
nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,
rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irrita-
tion continues, see your doctor. If these parti-
cles settle on your clothing, follow the garment
manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
4
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 97
98 SAFETY
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags
have deployed. If you are involved in another
collision, the air bags will not be in place to
protect you.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the inte-
rior trim, but they will open during air bag
deployment.
After any collision, the vehicle should be taken
to an authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication
network remains intact, and the power remains
intact, depending on the nature of the event,
the ORC will determine whether to have the
Enhanced Accident Response System perform
the following functions:
Cut off fuel to the engine (If Equipped)
Cut off battery power to the electric motor (If
Equipped)
Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has
power
Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as
long as the battery has power or for 15 minutes
from the intervention of the Enhanced Accident
Response System
Unlock the power door locks.
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform
any of these other functions in response to the
Enhanced Accident Response System:
Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the
HVAC Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circulation
Door
Cut off battery power to the:
Engine
Electric Motor (if equipped)
Electric power steering
Brake booster
Electric park brake
Automatic transmission gear selector
Horn
Front wiper
Headlamp washer pump
NOTE:
After an accident, remember to cycle the ignition
to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position and remove the
key from the ignition switch to avoid draining the
battery. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks
in the engine compartment and on the ground
near the engine compartment and fuel tank
before resetting the system and starting the
engine. If there are no fuel leaks or damage to
the vehicle electrical devices (e.g. headlights)
after an accident, reset the system by following
the procedure described below. If you have any
doubt, contact an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt
pretensioners cannot protect you in another
collision. Have the air bags, seat belt
pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor
assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer
immediately. Also, have the Occupant
Restraint Controller System serviced as well.
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 98
SAFETY 99
Enhanced Accident Response System Reset Procedure
After the event occurs, when the system is active, a message regarding fuel cutoff is displayed. Turn the ignition switch from ignition AVV/START or
MAR/ACC/ON/RUN to ignition STOP/OFF/LOCK. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on the ground near the engine
compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system and starting the engine.
Depending on the nature of the event the left and right turn signal lights, located in the instrument panel, may both be blinking and will continue to
blink. In order to move your vehicle to the side of the road, you must follow the system reset procedure.
Customer Action
Customer Will See
NOTE:
Each step MUST BE held for at least two seconds
1. Turn ignition STOP/OFF/LOCK. (Turn Signal Switch Must be placed in Neutral State).
2. Turn ignition MAR/ACC/ON/RUN. Right turn light BLINKS.
Left turn light is OFF.
3. Turn right turn signal switch ON. Right turn light is ON SOLID.
Left turn light BLINKS.
4. Place turn signal in neutral state. Right turn light is OFF.
Left turn light BLINKS.
5. Turn left turn signal switch ON. Right turn light BLINKS.
Left turn light is ON SOLID.
6. Place turn signal in neutral state. Right turn light BLINKS.
Left turn light is OFF.
7. Turn right turn signal switch ON. Right turn light is ON SOLID.
Left turn light BLINKS.
4
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 99
100 SAFETY
If a reset procedure step is not completed within 60 seconds, then the turn signal lights will blink and the reset procedure must be performed again in
order to be successful.
8. Place turn signal in neutral state. Right turn light is OFF.
Left turn light BLINKS.
9. Turn left turn signal switch ON. Right turn light is ON SOLID.
Left turn light is ON SOLID.
10. Turn left turn signal switch OFF. (Turn Signal Switch Must be placed in Neutral State). Right turn light is OFF.
Left turn light is OFF.
11. Turn ignition STOP/OFF/LOCK.
12. Turn ignition MAR/ACC/ON/RUN. (Entire sequence needs to be completed within one
minute or sequence will need to be repeated).
System is now reset and the engine may be
started.
Turn hazard flashers OFF (Manually).
Customer Action
Customer Will See
NOTE:
Each step MUST BE held for at least two seconds
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 100
SAFETY 101
(Continued)
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data
Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is
to record, in certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an air bag deployment or
hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in
understanding how a vehicle’s systems
performed. The EDR is designed to record data
related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems
for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds
or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to
record such data as:
How various systems in your vehicle were oper-
ating;
Whether or not the driver and passenger safety
belts were buckled/fastened;
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better under-
standing of the circumstances in which crashes
and injuries occur.
NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are
recorded by the EDR under normal driving condi-
tions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender,
age, and crash location) are recorded. However,
other parties, such as law enforcement, could
combine the EDR data with the type of personally
identifying data routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.
WARNING!
Modifications to any part of the air bag
system could cause it to fail when you need it.
You could be injured if the air bag system is
not there to protect you. Do not modify the
components or wiring, including adding any
kind of badges or stickers to the steering
wheel hub trim cover or the upper passenger
side of the instrument panel. Do not modify
the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or
add aftermarket side steps or running
boards.
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the
air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell
anyone who works on your vehicle that it has
an air bag system.
Do not attempt to modify any part of your air
bag system. The air bag may inflate acciden-
tally or may not function properly if modifica-
tions are made. Take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer for any air bag system
service. If your seat, including your trim cover
and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way
(including removal or loosening/tightening of
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. Only manufacturer
approved seat accessories may be used. If it
is necessary to modify the air bag system for
persons with disabilities, contact an autho-
rized dealer.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 101
102 SAFETY
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equip-
ment is required, and access to the vehicle or
the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle
manufacturer, other parties, such as law
enforcement, that have the special equipment,
can read the information if they have access to
the vehicle or the EDR.
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up
at all times, including babies and children. Every
state in the United States, and every Canadian
province, requires that small children ride in
proper restraint systems. This is the law, and
you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride prop-
erly buckled up in a rear seat, if available.
According to crash statistics, children are safer
when properly restrained in the rear seats
rather than in the front.
There are different sizes and types of restraints
for children from newborn size to the child
almost large enough for an adult safety belt.
Always check the child seat Owner’s Manual to
make sure you have the correct seat for your
child. Carefully read and follow all the instruc-
tions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s
Manual and on all the labels attached to the
child restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure
that it has a label certifying that it meets all
applicable Safety Standards. You should also
make sure that you can install it in the vehicle
where you will use it.
NOTE:
For additional information, refer to http://
www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers or call:
1–888–327–4236
Canadian residents should refer to Transport
Canada’s website for additional information:
http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/
safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can
become a projectile inside the vehicle. The
force required to hold even an infant on
your lap could become so great that you
could not hold the child, no matter how
strong you are. The child and others could
be badly injured or killed. Any child riding
in your vehicle should be in a proper
restraint for the child’s size.
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 102
SAFETY 103
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride
rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two years
old or until they reach either the height or
weight limit of their rear-facing child restraint.
Two types of child restraints can be used
rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child
seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children from
birth until they reach the weight or height limit of
the infant carrier. Convertible child seats can be
used either rear-facing or forward-facing in the
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a
higher weight limit in the rear-facing direction
than infant carriers do, so they can be used
rear-facing by children who have outgrown their
infant carrier but are still less than at least two
years old. Children should remain rear-facing
until they reach the highest weight or height
allowed by their convertible child seat.
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Infants and Toddlers Children who are two years old or younger and
who have not reached the height or weight
limits of their child restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child
Restraint, facing rearward in a rear seat of the
vehicle
Small Children Children who are at least two years old or who
have outgrown the height or weight limit of
their rear-facing child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point
Harness, facing forward in a rear seat of the
vehicle
Larger Children Children who have outgrown their
forward-facing child restraint, but are too small
to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle
seat belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large for Child Restraints Children 12 years old or younger, who have
outgrown the height or weight limit of their
booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the
vehicle
4
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 103
104 SAFETY
(Continued)
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have
outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat
can ride forward-facing in the vehicle.
Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
seats used in the forward-facing direction are
for children who are over two years old or who
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height
limit of their rear-facing convertible child seat.
Children should remain in a forward-facing child
seat with a harness for as long as possible, up
to the highest weight or height allowed by the
child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use
a belt-positioning booster seat until the
vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If the child
cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s
seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning
booster seat. The child and belt-positioning
booster seat are held in the vehicle by the seat
belt.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the
shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are
long enough to bend over the front of the seat
when their back is against the seatback, should
use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple
5-step test to decide whether the child can use
the vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against
the back of the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over
the front of the vehicle seat – while the
child is still sitting all the way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s
shoulder between the neck and arm?
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do not
transport a rear-facing child restraint in that
vehicle.
WARNING!
Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in
a collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufac-
turer’s directions exactly when installing an
infant or child restraint.
After a child restraint is installed in the
vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat forward
or rearward because it can loosen the child
restraint attachments. Remove the child
restraint before adjusting the vehicle seat
position. When the vehicle seat has been
adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
When your child restraint is not in use, secure
it in the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH
anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do
not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden
stop or accident, it could strike the occupants
or seatbacks and cause serious personal
injury.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 104
SAFETY 105
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as
possible, touching the child’s thighs and
not the stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the
whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,”
then the child still needs to use a booster seat in
this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/shoulder
belt, check seat belt fit periodically and make
sure the seat belt buckle is latched. A child’s
squirming or slouching can move the belt out of
position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or
neck, move the child closer to the center of the
vehicle, or use a booster seat to position the seat
belt on the child correctly.
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt
under an arm or behind their back. In a
crash, the shoulder belt will not protect a
child properly, which may result in serious
injury or death. A child must always wear
both the lap and shoulder portions of the
seat belt correctly.
Restraint Type
Combined Weight of
the Child + Child
Restraint
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower
Anchors Only
Seat Belt Only
LATCH – Lower
Anchors + Top
Tether Anchor
Seat Belt + Top
Tether Anchor
Rear-Facing Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) X X
Rear-Facing Child
Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) X X
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
4
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 105
106 SAFETY
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System
LATCH Label
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint
anchorage system called LATCH, which stands
for Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The
LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points
for installing LATCH-equipped child seats. There
are two lower anchorages located at the back of
the seat cushion where it meets the seatback
and one top tether anchorage located behind
the seating position. These anchorages are
used to install LATCH-equipped child seats
without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some
seating positions may have a top tether
anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these
seating positions, the seat belt must be used
with the top tether anchorage to install the child
restraint. Please see the following table for
more information.
LATCH Positions For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
LATCH Positions
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per
Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 106
SAFETY 107
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight
of the child restraint) for using the LATCH
anchorage system to attach the child restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg) Use the LATCH anchorage system until the
combined weight of the child and the child
restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt
and tether anchor instead of the LATCH system
once the combined weight is more than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt
be used together to attach a rear-facing or
forward-facing child restraint?
No Do not use the seat belt when you use the
LATCH anchorage system to attach a
rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint.
Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH
anchorages if allowed by the booster seat
manufacturer. See your booster seat owner’s
manual for more information.
Can a child seat be installed in the center
position using the inner LATCH lower
anchorages from the outboard seating
positions?
No Use the seat belt and tether anchor to install a
child seat in the center seating position.
Can two child restraints be attached using a
common lower LATCH anchorage?
No Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or
more child restraints. If the center position
does not have dedicated LATCH lower
anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child
seat in the center position next to a child seat
using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard
position.
4
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 107
108 SAFETY
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that
are found at the rear of the seat cushion where
it meets the seatback. They are just visible
when you lean into the rear seat to install the
child restraint. You will easily feel them if you
run your finger along the gap between the seat-
back and seat cushion.
LATCH Lower Anchorages
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages behind
each rear seating position located on the back
of the seat, near the floor.
Upper Tether Anchorages
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the
back of the front passenger seat?
Yes The child seat may touch the back of the front
passenger seat if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact. See your
child restraint owner’s manual for more
information.
Can the rear head restraints be removed?
Yes
The rear head restraints can be removed in
every seating position if they interfere with the
installation of the child restraint.
Refer to “Head Restraints” in “Getting To Know
Your Vehicle” for further information.
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 108
SAFETY 109
Tether Anchorage Routing Position
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will
be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap
on each side. Each will have a hook or
connector to attach to the lower anchorage and
a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and
some rear-facing child restraints will also be
equipped with a tether strap. The tether strap
will have a hook at the end to attach to the top
tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap
after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
Always follow the directions of the child
restraint manufacturer when installing your
child restraint. Not all child restraint systems
will be installed as described here.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child
Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switch-
able Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat
belt, stow the seat belt, following the instruc-
tions below. See the section “Installing Child
Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt” to check
what type of seat belt each seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps
and on the tether strap of the child seat so
that you can more easily attach the hooks
or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower
anchorages for that seating position. For
some second row seats, you may need to
recline the seat and / or raise the head
restraint (if adjustable) to get a better fit. If
the rear seat can be moved forward and
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
move it to its rear-most position to make
room for the child seat. You may also move
the front seat forward to allow more room
for the child seat.
WARNING!
Do not install a child restraint in the center
position using the LATCH system. This posi-
tion is not approved for installing child seats
using the LATCH attachments. You must use
the seat belt and tether anchor to install a
child seat in the center seating position.
Never use the same lower anchorage to
attach more than one child restraint. Please
refer to “To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child
Restraint” for typical installation instructions.
4
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 109
110 SAFETY
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of
the child restraint to the lower anchorages
in the selected seating position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap,
connect it to the top tether anchorage. See
the section “Installing Child Restraints
Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direc-
tions to attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the
child restraint rearward and downward into
the seat. Remove slack in the straps
according to the child restraint manufac-
turer’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed
tightly by pulling back and forth on the
child seat at the belt path. It should not
move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR
(ALR) Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to
install a child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts
that are not being used by other occupants or
being used to secure child restraints. An unused
belt could injure a child if they play with it and
accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before
installing a child restraint using the LATCH
system, buckle the seat belt behind the child
restraint and out of the child’s reach. If the
buckled seat belt interferes with the child
restraint installation, instead of buckling it
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt
through the child restraint belt path and then
buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all
children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not
toys and that they should not play with them.
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to
the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of
the restraint. The child could be badly injured
or killed. Follow the child restraint manufac-
turer’s directions exactly when installing an
infant or child restraint.
Child restraint anchorages are designed to
withstand only those loads imposed by
correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no
circumstances are they to be used for adult
seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other
items or equipment to the vehicle.
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 110
SAFETY 111
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle
Seat Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be
secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap
belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
The seat belts in the passenger seating posi-
tions are equipped with a Switchable Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) that is designed to keep
the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the
child restraint so that it is not necessary to use
a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of
the webbing out of the retractor and then letting
the webbing retract back into the retractor. If it
is locked, the ALR will make a clicking noise
while the webbing is pulled back into the
retractor.
Refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” descrip-
tion in “Switchable Automatic Locking Retrac-
tors (ALR)” under “Occupant Restraint Systems”
for additional information on ALR.
Please see the table below and the following
sections for more information.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing
Child Restraints In This Vehicle
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure of
the restraint. The child could be badly injured
or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
4
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 111
112 SAFETY
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s
weight + weight of the child
restraint) for using the Tether
Anchor with the seat belt to attach
a forward facing child restraint?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint Always use the tether anchor when
using the seat belt to install a
forward facing child restraint, up to
the recommended weight limit of
the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint
touch the back of the front
passenger seat?
Yes Contact between the front
passenger seat and the child
restraint is allowed, if the child
restraint manufacturer also allows
contact.
Can the rear head restraints be
removed?
Yes The rear head restraints can be
removed in every seating position
if they interfere with the
installation of the child restraint.
Refer to “Head Restraints” in
“Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for
further information.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to
tighten the seat belt against the
belt path of the child restraint?
No Do not twist the buckle stalk in a
seating position with an ALR
retractor.
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 112
SAFETY 113
Installing A Child Restraint With A
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be
secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap
belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the
seating position. For some second row
seats, you may need to recline the seat
and/or raise the head restraint (if adjust-
able) to get a better fit. If the rear seat can
be moved forward and rearward in the
vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
rear-most position to make room for the
child seat. You may also move the front
seat forward to allow more room for the
child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from
the retractor to pass it through the belt
path of the child restraint. Do not twist the
belt webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until
you hear a “click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion
tight against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the
shoulder part of the belt until you have
pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the
retractor. Then, allow the webbing to
retract back into the retractor. As the
webbing retracts, you will hear a clicking
sound. This means the seat belt is now in
the Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor.
If it is locked, you should not be able to pull
out any webbing. If the retractor is not
locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to
tighten the lap portion around the child
restraint while you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the vehicle
seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap
and the seating position has a top tether
anchorage, connect the tether strap to the
anchorage and tighten the tether strap.
See the section “Installing Child Restraints
Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direc-
tions to attach a tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed
tightly by pulling back and forth on the child
seat at the belt path. It should not move
more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direc-
tion.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so
check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if
necessary.
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure of
the restraint. The child could be badly injured
or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
4
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 113
114 SAFETY
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top
Tether Anchorage:
1. Look behind the seating position where
you plan to install the child restraint to find
the tether anchorage. You may need to
move the seat forward to provide better
access to the tether anchorage. If there is
no top tether anchorage for that seating
position, move the child restraint to
another position in the vehicle if one is
available.
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most
direct path for the strap between the
anchor and the child seat. If your vehicle is
equipped with adjustable rear head
restraints, raise the head restraint, and
where possible, route the tether strap
under the head restraint and between the
two posts. If not possible, lower the head
restraint and pass the tether strap around
the outboard side of the head restraint.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child
restraint to the top tether anchorage as
shown in the diagram.
Rear Seat Tether Strap Mounting
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according
to the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions.
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing
car seat to any location in front of the car
seat, including the seat frame or a tether
anchorage. Only attach the tether strap of a
rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage
that is approved for that seating position,
located behind the top of the vehicle seat.
See the section “Lower Anchors and Tethers
for CHildren (LATCH) Restraint System” for
the location of approved tether anchorages
in your vehicle.
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could
lead to increased head motion and possible
injury to the child. Use only the anchorage
position directly behind the child seat to
secure a child restraint top tether strap.
If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear
seat, make sure the tether strap does not slip
into the opening between the seatbacks as
you remove slack in the strap.
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 114
SAFETY 115
(Continued)
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm
your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown
about and possibly injured, or injure a
passenger during panic braking or in a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if
equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that
are secured by seat belts.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE
CARGO AREA.
Exhaust Gas
The best protection against carbon monoxide
entry into the vehicle body is a properly main-
tained engine exhaust system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of
the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can
be detected inside the vehicle, or when the
underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged,
have a competent mechanic inspect the
complete exhaust system and adjacent body
areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or
mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose
connections could permit exhaust fumes to
seep into the passenger compartment. In addi-
tion, inspect the exhaust system each time the
vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change.
Replace as required.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, and loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
Do not disassemble or modify the system.
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat
build-up may cause serious injury or death.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a colli-
sion, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless
and odorless. Breathing it can make you
unconscious and can eventually poison you.
To avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety
tips:
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to
move your vehicle in or out of the area.
If you are required to drive with the trunk/lift-
gate/rear doors open, make sure that all
windows are closed and the climate control
BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT
use the recirculation mode.
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with
the engine running, adjust your heating or
cooling controls to force outside air into the
vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 115
116 SAFETY
(Continued)
(Continued)
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced
after a collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must
be replaced after a collision if they have been
damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.). If there is any question regarding seat belt
or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag warning light will turn on for four
to eight seconds as a bulb check when the igni-
tion switch is first turned to ON/RUN. If the light
is either not on during starting, stays on, or
turns on while driving, have the system
inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as
possible. After the bulb check, this light will illu-
minate with a single chime when a fault with the
Air Bag System has been detected. It will stay on
until the fault is removed. If the light comes on
intermittently or remains on while driving, have
an authorized dealer service the vehicle imme-
diately.
Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in
“Safety” for further information.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode
and place the blower control on high speed. You
should be able to feel the air directed against
the windshield. See an authorized dealer for
service if your defroster is inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your
vehicle. Only use a floor mat that does not inter-
fere with the operation of the accelerator, brake
or clutch pedals. Only use a floor mat that is
securely attached using the floor mat fasteners
so it cannot slip out of position and interfere
with the accelerator, brake or clutch pedals or
impair safe operation of your vehicle in other
ways.
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or
stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat
fasteners may cause your floor mat to
interfere with the accelerator, brake, or
clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle
control. To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or
DEATH:
ALWAYS securely attach your floor mat
using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT install
your floor mat upside down or turn your floor
mat over. Lightly pull to confirm mat is
secured using the floor mat fasteners on a
regular basis.
ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR MAT
FROM THE VEHICLE before installing any
other floor mat. NEVER install or stack an
additional floor mat on top of an existing floor
mat.
ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your
vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat that cannot
be properly attached and secured to your
vehicle. If a floor mat needs to be replaced,
only use a FCA approved floor mat for the
specific make, model, and year of your
vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 116
SAFETY 117
(Continued)
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and
uneven wear patterns. Check for stones, nails,
glass, or other objects lodged in the tread or
sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks.
Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the
tires (including spare) for proper cold inflation
pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake
lights and exterior lights while you work the
controls. Check turn signal and high beam indi-
cator lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check the area under the vehicle after over-
night parking for fuel, coolant, oil, or other
fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline fumes are
detected or if fuel or brake fluid leaks are
suspected, the cause should be located and
corrected immediately.
ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the
driver’s side floor area. To check for interfer-
ence, with the vehicle properly parked with
the engine off, fully depress the accelerator,
the brake, and the clutch pedal (if present) to
check for interference. If your floor mat inter-
feres with the operation of any pedal, or is not
secure to the floor, remove the floor mat from
the vehicle and place the floor mat in your
trunk.
ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on
the passenger’s side floor area.
ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or
slide into the driver’s side floor area when the
vehicle is moving. Objects can become
trapped under accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals and could cause a loss of vehicle
control.
WARNING! (Continued)
NEVER place any objects under the floor mat
(e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects could
change the position of the floor mat and may
cause interference with the accelerator,
brake, or clutch pedals.
If the vehicle carpet has been removed and
re-installed, always properly attach carpet to
the floor and check the floor mat fasteners
are secure to the vehicle carpet. Fully
depress each pedal to check for interference
with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals
then re-install the floor mats.
It is recommended to only use mild soap
and water to clean your floor mats. After
cleaning, always check your floor mat has
been properly installed and is secured to
your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners
by lightly pulling mat.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 117
118
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat,
adjust both inside and outside mirrors, and
fasten your seat belts.
Normal Starting
NOTE:
Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine
is obtained without pumping or pressing the
accelerator pedal.
Turn the ignition switch to the AVV (START) posi-
tion and release it when the engine starts. If the
engine fails to start within 10 seconds, turn the
ignition switch to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) posi-
tion, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the
“Normal Starting” procedure.
Automatic Transmission
The gear selector must be in the PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N) position before you can start the
engine. Depress the brake pedal before shifting
to any driving gear.
NOTE:
You must press the brake pedal before shifting
out of PARK.
Cold Weather Operation
To prevent possible engine damage while
starting at low temperatures, this vehicle will
inhibit engine cranking when the ambient
temperature is less than –22°F (–30°C) and
the oil temperature sensor reading indicates an
engine block heater has not been used. An
externally powered electric engine block heater
is available as a factory installed option.
At the time the engine is shut off, the message
“Engine Heater Recommended” will be
displayed in the instrument cluster when the
ambient temperature is below 5°F (–15°C).
This acts as a reminder to avoid possible crank
delays at the next cold start.
WARNING!
When exiting the vehicle, always remove the
key fob from the ignition and lock your
vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be warned
not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
dren. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat
build-up may cause serious injury or death.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 118
STARTING AND OPERATING 119
Extended Park Starting
NOTE:
Extended Park condition occurs when the
vehicle has not been started or driven for at
least 30 days.
1. Install a battery charger or jumper cables
to the battery to ensure a full battery
charge during the crank cycle.
2. Cycle the ignition to the START mode and
release it when the engine starts.
3. If the engine fails to start within 10 to 15
seconds, cycle the ignition to the OFF
mode, wait five seconds to allow the starter
to cool, then repeat the Extended Park
Starting procedure.
4. If the engine fails to start after eight
attempts, allow the starter to cool for at
least 10 minutes, then repeat the
procedure.
If Engine Fails To Start
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically, and
it will decrease as the engine warms up.
Turbo Charger “Cool Down”
This vehicle is equipped with an after-run pump
to cool the turbocharger after the engine is shut
off. Depending on the type of driving and the
amount of cargo, the pump will run for up to
10 minutes after the engine has been shut off
to circulate coolant through the turbocharger.
Although the pump is rubber-mounted for quiet
operation, it is normal to hear it running during
this time.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the
engine and drivetrain (transmission and axle) in
your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles
(500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km),
speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are
desirable.
CAUTION!
Use of the recommended SAE 5W-40
Synthetic oil and adhering to the prescribed
oil change intervals is important to prevent
engine damage and ensure satisfactory
starting in cold conditions.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank
continuously for more than 10 seconds at a
time. Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying
again.
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid
into the throttle body air inlet opening in an
attempt to start the vehicle. This could result
in flash fire causing serious personal injury.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not
continuously crank the engine for more than
15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to 15 seconds
before trying again.
5
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 119
120 STARTING AND OPERATING
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration
within the limits of local traffic laws contributes
to a good break-in. Wide-open throttle accelera-
tion in low gear can be detrimental and should
be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the
factory is a high-quality energy conserving type
lubricant. Oil changes should be consistent with
anticipated climate conditions under which
vehicle operations will occur. For the recom-
mended viscosity and quality grades, refer to
“Dealer Service” in “Servicing And Mainte-
nance” for further information.
NOTE:
A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of opera-
tion. This should be considered a normal part of
the break-in and not interpreted as a problem.
MODE SELECTOR – IF EQUIPPED
This system allows for three selectable modes,
according to driving style and road conditions.
Normal Mode
Traction+ Mode
Gravity Control Function
The mode selector always remains in the center
position. The selected driving mode is indicated
by the corresponding LED light on the selector,
and an indication in the display.
Operating Modes
Mode Selector
Normal Mode
This mode is aimed at comfort and safety in
normal traction and driving conditions.
Traction+ Mode
This mode is intend to be used on low traction
road surfaces (e.g. snow, ice, mud, etc.).
Activation:
Rotate the selector and hold in this position for
approximately half of a second, the corre-
sponding LED will light up and the “Traction+”
mode indicator appears on the display with a
dedicated message.
Deactivation:
To return to "Normal" mode, rotate the mode
selector counterclockwise and hold in this posi-
tion for half a second. The LED corresponding to
“Normal” mode will light up and the “Traction+”
mode deactivation indication will appear in the
display.
NOTE:
If “Traction+” or “Normal” mode was active
when the engine was stopped, the next time it
is started the mode that was selected will be
reactivated.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight
Mineral Oil in the engine or damage
may result.
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 120
STARTING AND OPERATING 121
Gravity Control Function
This function allows for a constant vehicle
speed to be maintained while traveling down-
hill. Noise and vibrations coming from the
brakes when the system is activated are
normal. The system can only be activated at
speeds less than 15 mph (25 km/h). After
reaching the desired speed, release the accel-
erator and brake pedals completely. If you want
to increase/decrease the speed, press the
accelerator/brake pedals again.
NOTE:
System intervention set-up can only be engaged
with "Traction+" mode activated.
Activation:
With "Traction+" mode on, rotate the selector
clockwise and hold in this position for half a
second, until the corresponding LED lights up
and Gravity Control functionality appears on the
display with a dedicated message.
Deactivation:
To deactivate the Gravity Control functionality
rotate the selector counterclockwise and hold in
this position for half a second. The LED corre-
sponding to Gravity Control functionality will
shut off and the Gravity Control functionality
deactivation indication will appear on the
display.
NOTE:
To prevent engine stalling do not use the
system if the transmission is in NEUTRAL.
The system is available when the speed is
between 4 mph (7 km/h) and 15 mph
(25 km/h).
The Gravity Control system must be used with
a gear that is suitable for the set speed, in
order to prevent possible engine stalling. While
the Gravity Control system is operating it is also
possible to take control of the vehicle again by
pressing the brake or accelerator pedals. If the
Gravity Control is not available when system
intervention set-up is engaged, this could be
due to brake overheating. If this happens, wait
for a few minutes.
If the braking system overheats the system will
deactivate through a gradual release of the
braking pressure, leaving vehicle control to the
driver. Deactivation of the Gravity Control
system is accompanied by flashing of the
warning light, by a dedicated message in the
display and an acoustic warning. To reactivate
the system intervention set-up, wait for the
system to cool down and turn the selector
again.
If the speed exceeds 15 mph (25 km/h) and is
below 31 mph (50 km/h), the Gravity Control
system intervention set-up is deactivated but is
ready for being reactivated when the speed
drops back below 15 mph (25 km/h). The indi-
cator in the instrument panel turns off and the
LED on the mode selector stays on. If vehicle
speed exceeds 31 mph (50 km/h), the Gravity
Control system completely deactivates. To
reactivate it, turn the selector when the speed
is again below 15 mph (25 km/h).
On level ground in urban areas it is advised to
deactivate the Gravity Control system interven-
tion, since for speeds below 15 mph (25 km/h)
in certain conditions, such as when, shifting
gears or driving over bumps without using the
accelerator pedal, the system might activate.
5
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 121
122 STARTING AND OPERATING
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the
parking brake is fully applied.
The parking brake lever is located in the center
console. To apply the parking brake, pull the
lever up as firmly as possible. To release the
parking brake, pull the lever up slightly, push
the front button with your thumb, then lower the
lever completely.
Parking Brake Lever
When the parking brake is applied with the igni-
tion switch in the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position,
the Brake Warning Light in the instrument
cluster will illuminate.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the
front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill
grade. The parking brake should always be
applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
NOTE:
You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be warned
not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle
or in a location accessible to children. A child
could operate power windows, other controls,
or move the vehicle.
Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to
brake failure and a collision.
Always fully apply the parking brake when
leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause
damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the Brake Warning Light remains on with
the parking brake released, a brake system
malfunction is indicated. Have the brake
system serviced by an authorized dealer
immediately.
CAUTION!
Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only
after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above
idle speed.
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 122
STARTING AND OPERATING 123
(Continued)
Key Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park
Interlock system which requires the transmis-
sion to be in PARK before the ignition can be
turned to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position. The
key can only be removed from the ignition when
the ignition is in the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position,
and once removed, the transmission is locked
in PARK.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmis-
sion Shift Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the
transmission gear selector in PARK unless the
brakes are applied. To shift the transmission
out of PARK, the ignition must be in the MAR
(ACC/ON/RUN) mode (engine running or not),
and the brake pedal (and the lock button on the
gear selector) must be pressed.
Six-Speed Automatic Transmission
The transmission gear range (PRND) is
displayed both beside the gear selector and in
the instrument cluster. To select a gear range,
press the lock button on the gear selector and
move the selector rearward or forward. You
must also press the brake pedal to shift the
transmission out of PARK. Select the DRIVE
range for normal driving.
WARNING!
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate
quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose
control of the vehicle and hit someone or
something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all
vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while
the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle
always come to a complete stop, then apply
the parking brake, shift the transmission into
PARK, turn the engine OFF, and remove the
ignition key. Once the key is removed, the
transmission is locked in PARK, securing the
vehicle against unwanted movement.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
ignition key from the vehicle and lock the
vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing
children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the transmis-
sion gear selector.
Do not leave the ignition key in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil-
dren). A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
5
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 123
124 STARTING AND OPERATING
The electronically-controlled transmission
adapts its shift schedule based on driver
inputs, along with environmental and road
conditions. The transmission electronics
are self-calibrating; therefore, the first few
shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat
abrupt. This is a normal condition, and
precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
Transmission Gear Selector
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE
when the accelerator pedal is released and the
vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on
the brake pedal when shifting between these
gears.
The transmission gear selector provides PARK,
REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and AutoStick (+/-)
shift positions. Manual shifts can be made
using the AutoStick shift control. Moving the
gear selector into the AutoStick (+/-) position
(beside the DRIVE position) activates AutoStick
mode, providing manual shift control and
displaying the current gear in the instrument
cluster (as 1, 2, 3, etc). Toggling the gear
selector forward (-) or rearward (+) while in the
Autostick position will manually select the trans-
mission gear. Refer to "AutoStick" in this
chapter for further information.
NOTE:
If the gear selector cannot be moved to the PARK,
REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed
forward) it is probably in the AutoStick (+/-) posi-
tion (beside the DRIVE position). In AutoStick
mode, the transmission gear (1, 2, 3, etc.) is
displayed in the instrument cluster. Move the
gear selector to the right (into the DRIVE [D] posi-
tion) for access to PARK, REVERSE, and
NEUTRAL.
Gear Ranges
Do not depress the accelerator pedal when
shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another
gear range.
NOTE:
After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before acceler-
ating. This is especially important when the
engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by
locking the transmission. The engine can be
started in this range. Never attempt to use
PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the
parking brake when exiting the vehicle in this
range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift
the transmission into PARK first, and then apply
the parking brake.
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 124
STARTING AND OPERATING 125
(Continued)
(Continued)
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake
before shifting the transmission to PARK, other-
wise the load on the transmission locking mech-
anism may make it difficult to move the gear
selector out of PARK. As an added precaution,
turn the front wheels toward the curb on a
downhill grade and away from the curb on an
uphill grade.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
Apply the parking brake.
Shift the transmission into PARK.
Turn the engine off.
Remove the ignition key.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substitute
for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle to
guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and
others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
move the gear selector out of PARK with the
brake pedal released. Make sure the trans-
mission is in PARK before exiting the vehicle.
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate
quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose
control of the vehicle and hit someone or
something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all
vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while
the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle
always come to a complete stop, then apply
the parking brake, shift the transmission into
PARK, turn the engine OFF, and remove the
ignition key. Once the key is removed, the
transmission is locked in PARK, securing the
vehicle against unwanted movement.
When exiting the vehicle, always remove the
ignition key from the vehicle and lock the
vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing
children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the transmis-
sion gear selector.
Do not leave the ignition key in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil-
dren). A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Before moving the transmission gear selector
out of PARK, you must turn the ignition to the
ON/RUN mode, and also press the brake
pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear
selector could result.
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range,
as this can damage the drivetrain.
WARNING! (Continued)
5
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 125
126 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
If the transmission in not correctly shifted into
PARK (P) a message on the instrument cluster
will be displayed, repeat the procedure as neces-
sary.
The following indicators should be used to
ensure that you have properly engaged the
transmission into the PARK position:
When shifting into PARK, push the lock button
on the gear selector and firmly move the gear
selector all the way forward until it stops and is
fully seated.
Look at the transmission gear position display
and verify that it indicates the PARK position
(P).
With brake pedal released, verify that the gear
selector will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward.
Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has
come to a complete stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for
prolonged periods with the engine running. The
engine may be started in this range. Apply the
parking brake and shift the transmission into
PARK if you must exit the vehicle.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and
highway driving. It provides the smoothest
upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel
economy. The transmission automatically
upshifts through all forward gears. The DRIVE
position provides optimum driving characteris-
tics under all normal operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs
(such as when operating the vehicle under
heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, or trav-
eling into strong head winds), use the AutoStick
shift control refer to AutoStick in this chapter for
further information to select a lower gear. Under
these conditions, using a lower gear will
improve performance and extend transmission
life by reducing excessive shifting and heat
buildup.
If the transmission temperature exceeds
normal operating limits, the transmission
controller will expand the range of torque
converter clutch engagement. This is done to
prevent transmission damage due to over-
heating.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off
the ignition to coast down a hill. These are
unsafe practices that limit your response to
changing traffic or road conditions. You
might lose control of the vehicle and have a
collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for
any other reason with the transmission in
NEUTRAL can cause severe transmission
damage. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in
“Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “In Case Of Emergency”
for further information.
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 126
STARTING AND OPERATING 127
During cold temperatures, transmission opera-
tion may be modified depending on engine
coolant temperature. Normal operation will
resume once the engine temperature has risen
to a suitable level.
Instrument Cluster Messages
Dedicated messages will be displayed in the
instrument cluster to alert the driver when
certain unusual conditions occur.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function are monitored electroni-
cally for abnormal conditions. If a condition is
detected that could result in transmission
damage, Transmission Limp Home Mode is acti-
vated. In this mode, the transmission remains
in a fixed gear regardless of which forward gear
is selected. PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will
continue to operate. The Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) may be illuminated. Limp Home
Mode allows the vehicle to be driven to an
authorized dealer for service without damaging
the transmission.
In the event of a momentary problem, the trans-
mission can be reset to regain all forward gears
by performing the following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Turn the ignition off.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the
problem is no longer detected, the trans-
mission will return to normal operation.
NOTE:
Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom-
mend that you visit an authorized dealer at your
earliest possible convenience. An authorized
dealer has diagnostic equipment to assess the
condition of your transmission. If the transmis-
sion cannot be reset, authorized dealer service is
required.
AUTOSTICK
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission
feature providing manual shift control, giving
you more control of the vehicle. AutoStick
allows you to maximize engine braking, elimi-
nate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, and
improve overall vehicle performance. This
system can also provide you with more control
during passing, city driving, cold slippery condi-
tions, mountain driving, and many other situa-
tions.
Operation
When the gear selector is in the AutoStick posi-
tion (beside the Drive position), it can be moved
forward and rearward. This allows the driver to
manually select the transmission gear being
used. Moving the gear selector forward (-) trig-
gers a downshift, and rearward (+) an upshift.
The current gear is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
5
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 127
128 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
In AutoStick mode, the transmission will only shift
up or down when the driver moves the gear
selector rearward (+) or forward (-), except as
described below.
The transmission will automatically upshift
when necessary to prevent engine over-speed.
The transmission will automatically downshift
as the vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging)
and will display the current gear.
The transmission will automatically downshift
to first gear when coming to a stop. After a stop,
the driver should manually upshift (+) the
transmission as the vehicle is accelerated.
You can start out (from a stop) in first, second,
or third gear. Starting out in second or third
gear can be helpful in snow or icy conditions. To
select second or third gear after the vehicle is
brought to a stop, tap the gear selector rear-
ward (+) once or twice.
If a requested downshift would cause the
engine to over-speed, that shift will not occur.
The system will ignore attempts to upshift at
too low of a vehicle speed.
Avoid using Speed Control when AutoStick is
engaged because the transmission will not
shift automatically.
Transmission shifting will be more noticeable
when AutoStick is enabled.
The system may revert to automatic shift mode
if a fault or overheat condition is detected.
To disengage AutoStick mode, return the gear
selector to the DRIVE position. You can shift in
or out of the AutoStick position at any time
without taking your foot off the accelerator
pedal.
ELECTRIC POWER STEERING
This only operates with the key turned to MAR/
ON and the engine started. The steering allows
the force required at the steering wheel to be
adjusted to suit driving conditions.
NOTE:
When turning the ignition key quickly, full power
steering functionality can be achieved after a few
seconds.
SPEED CONTROL
When engaged, the Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than
25 mph (40 km/h).
The Speed Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
Speed Control Buttons
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine
braking on a slippery surface. The drive
wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle
could skid, causing a collision or personal
injury.
1 — SET (+)/Accel
2 — RES/Resume
3 — On/Off
4 — SET (-)/Decel
5 — CANC/Cancel
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 128
STARTING AND OPERATING 129
NOTE:
In order to ensure proper operation, the Speed
Control system has been designed to shut down
if multiple Speed Control functions are operated
at the same time. If this occurs, the Speed
Control system can be reactivated by pushing the
Speed Control on/off button and resetting the
desired vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Push the on/off button to activate the Speed
Control. The cruise indicator light in the instru-
ment cluster display will illuminate. To turn the
system off, push the on/off button a second
time. The cruise indicator light will turn off. The
system should be turned off when not in use.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Speed Control on. When the vehicle
has reached the desired speed, push the SET
(+) or SET (-) button and release. Release the
accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the
selected speed.
NOTE:
The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed
and on level ground before setting the speed.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can increase
speed by pushing the SET (+) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected
through the Uconnect settings (if equipped).
Refer to ”Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia”
for more information. The speed increment is
dependent on the selected speed unit of U.S.
(mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a
1 mph increase in set speed. Each subsequent
tap of the button results in an increase of
1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to increase until the button
is released, then the new set speed will be
established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a
1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in an increase of
1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to increase until the button
is released, then the new set speed will be
established.
To Decrease Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can
decrease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
WARNING!
Leaving the Speed Control system on when
not in use is dangerous. You could
accidentally set the system or cause it to go
faster than you want. You could lose control
and have an accident. Always leave the
system off when you are not using it.
5
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 129
130 STARTING AND OPERATING
The driver’s preferred units can be selected
through the Uconnect settings (if equipped).
Refer to "Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information. The speed decrement is
dependent on the selected speed unit of U.S.
(mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a
1 mph decrease in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in a decrease of
1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to decrease until the
button is released, then the new set speed will
be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a
1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in a decrease of
1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to decrease until the
button is released, then the new set speed will
be established.
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally.
When the pedal is released, the vehicle will
return to the set speed.
Using Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to
maintain the vehicle set speed.
NOTE:
The Speed Control system maintains speed up
and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may
occur so it may be preferable to drive without
Speed Control.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES
button and release. Resume can be used at any
speed above 25 mph (40 km/h).
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing
the vehicle will deactivate the Speed Control
without erasing the set speed from memory.
Pushing the on/off button or placing the ignition
in the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position erases the set
speed from memory.
REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
The Rear Park Assist system provides an
audible indication of the distance between the
rear fascia/bumper and a detected obstacle
when backing up (e.g. during a parking
maneuver), as well as visual indications in the
instrument cluster display.
WARNING!
Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed.
Your vehicle could go too fast for the
conditions, and you could lose control and
have an accident. Do not use Speed Control
in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding,
icy, snow-covered or slippery.
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 130
STARTING AND OPERATING 131
Rear Park Assist is automatically activated
when the transmission is placed into REVERSE.
As the distance from an obstacle behind the
vehicle decreases, the audible alert becomes
more frequent.
For the limitations of this system and recom-
mendations, refer to the “Park Assist System
Usage Precautions” in this section.
Interaction With Trailer Towing
The Rear Park Assist system is automatically
deactivated when a trailer is hitched to the
vehicle. The system will be automatically acti-
vated as soon as the trailer is removed.
Rear Park Assist Sensors
The four Rear Park Assist sensors, located in
the rear fascia/bumper, monitor the area
behind the vehicle that is within the sensors’
field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles,
in the horizontal direction, from approximately
12 inches (30 cm) up to 55 inches (140 cm)
from the center of the rear fascia/bumper and
up to 24 inches (60 cm) from the corners of the
rear fascia/bumper, depending on the location,
type and orientation of the obstacle.
If several obstacles are detected, the Rear Park
Assist system indicates the nearest obstacle.
The minimum height of a detectable obstacle
corresponds to the maximum height of an
obstacle that would clear the underside of the
vehicle during the parking maneuver.
Rear Park Assist Audible Alerts
If an obstacle is behind the vehicle when the
transmission is placed into REVERSE, an
audible alert is activated.
The tones emitted by the loudspeaker inform
the driver that the vehicle is approaching an
obstacle. The pauses between the tones are
directly proportional to the distance from the
obstacle. Pulses emitted in quick succession
indicate the presence of a very close obstacle. A
continuous tone indicates that the obstacle is
less than 12 inches (30 cm) away.
5
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 131
132 STARTING AND OPERATING
While audible signals are emitted, the audio
system is not muted.
The audible signal is turned off immediately if
the distance increases. The tone cycle remains
constant if the distance measured by the inner
sensors is constant. If this condition occurs for
the external sensors, the signal is turned off
after three seconds (stopping warnings during
maneuvers parallel to walls).
Indications On Display — If Equipped
When the sensors are activated, the parking
sensor display screen appears in the instru-
ment cluster.
Obstacle presence and distance information is
therefore provided both by the audible signal
and the instrument cluster display.
The system indicates a detected obstacle by
displaying an arc in one or more positions
according to the distance of the obstacle and its
position in relation to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the rear central
area, the instrument cluster display shows all
the arcs in the rear central area, up to the one
that corresponds to the position of the obstacle
itself.
The signal is similar for obstacles in the rear left
or right area.
The arc that corresponds to the position of the
obstacle will flash.
The color on the instrument cluster display
depends on the distance from and position of
the obstacle.
Audible And Visual Signals Supplied By The Rear Park Assist System
SIGNAL MEANING INDICATION
Obstacle Distance An obstacle is present within the sensors' field
of view
Audible Signal (dashboard loudspeaker)
• Sound pulses emitted at a rate that
increases as the distance decreases.
• Emits continuous tone at 12 inches (30 cm).
• Adjustable volume level. (Refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information).
Failure Sensor or System failures Visual Signal (instrument panel)
• Icon appears on display.
• Message is displayed on the instrument
cluster display (if equipped).
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 132
STARTING AND OPERATING 133
(Continued)
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the
instrument cluster display shows a single
constant arc and emits a continuous sound.
If there are several obstacles, the closest one is
indicated.
Failure Indications
A malfunction of the Rear Park Assist sensors or
system is indicated, during REVERSE gear
engagement, by the instrument panel warning
icon and message appearing on the instrument
cluster display.
The warning icon is illuminated and a
message appears on the instrument
cluster display. Refer to "Instrument
Cluster Display" in “Getting To Know
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
The sensors and wiring are tested continuously
when the ignition is in the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN)
position. Failures are indicated immediately if
they occur when the system is on.
Even if the system is able to identify that a
specific sensor is in failure condition, the instru-
ment cluster display shall indicate that the Rear
Park Assist system is unavailable, without refer-
ence to the sensor in failure condition. If even a
single sensor fails, the entire system must be
disabled. The system is turned off automati-
cally.
Cleaning The Rear Park Assist System
Clean the Rear Park Assist sensors with water,
car wash soap and a soft cloth. Do not use
rough or hard cloths. In washing stations, clean
sensors quickly keeping the vapor jet/high pres-
sure washing nozzles at least 4 inches (10 cm)
from the sensors. Do not scratch or poke the
sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the
sensors.
Park Assist System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
Ensure that the outer surface and the under-
side of the rear bumper is clean and clear of
snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction to
keep the Rear Park Assist system operating
properly.
Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibra-
tions could affect the performance of Rear
Park Assist.
Clean the Rear Park Assist sensors regularly,
taking care not to scratch or damage them. The
sensors must not be covered with ice, snow,
slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do so can
result in the system not working properly. The
Rear Park Assist system might not detect an
obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could
provide a false indication that an obstacle is
behind the fascia/bumper.
Objects such as bicycle carriers, etc., must not
be placed within 12 inches (30 cm) from the
rear fascia/bumper while driving the vehicle.
Failure to do so can result in the system misin-
terpreting a close object as a sensor problem,
causing a failure indication to be displayed in
the instrument cluster.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up
even when using Rear Park Assist. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, look
behind you, and be sure to check for pedes-
trians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
and blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for safety and must continue to
pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to
do so can result in serious injury or death.
5
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 133
134 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
If it’s necessary to keep the ball mount and
hitch ball assembly mounted for a long period,
it is possible to filter out the ball mount and
hitch ball assembly presence in sensor field of
view. The filtering operation must be performed
only by an authorized dealer.
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA
Your vehicle is equipped with the ParkView Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an
on-screen image of the rear surroundings of
your vehicle whenever the gear selector is put
into REVERSE. The image will be displayed in
the touchscreen display along with a caution
note to “check entire surroundings” across the
top of the screen. After five seconds, this note
will disappear. The ParkView camera is located
on the rear of the vehicle above the rear license
plate.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE, the
rear camera mode is exited and the last
selected touchscreen appears again.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Camera Delay
feature and it is turned on, the rear camera
image will be displayed for up to 10 seconds
when the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE
unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph
(13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK
or the vehicle's ignition is placed in the STOP
(OFF/LOCK) position.
When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid
on the image to illustrate the width of the
vehicle and its projected backup path based on
the steering wheel position. A dashed center
line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to
assist with parking.
When enabled, fixed guide lines are overlaid on
the image to illustrate the width of the vehicle.
NOTE:
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has
programmable modes of operation that may be
selected through the Uconnect System. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
Before using Rear Park Assist, it is strongly
recommended that the ball mount and hitch
ball assembly is disconnected from the
vehicle when the vehicle is not used for
towing. Failure to do so can result in injury or
damage to vehicles or obstacles because the
hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle
than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker
sounds the continuous tone. Also, the
sensors could detect the ball mount and
hitch ball assembly, depending on its size
and shape, giving a false indication that an
obstacle is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Rear Park Assist is only a parking aid and it is
unable to recognize every obstacle, including
small obstacles. Parking curbs might be
temporarily detected or not detected at all.
Obstacles located above or below the
sensors will not be detected when they are in
close proximity.
WARNING! (Continued)
The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
Rear Park Assist in order to be able to stop in
time when an obstacle is detected. It is
recommended that the driver looks over his/
her shoulder when using Rear Park Assist.
CAUTION! (Continued)
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 134
STARTING AND OPERATING 135
Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of the vehicle.
The following table shows the approximate distances for each zone:
NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance
builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens,
rinse with water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do
not cover the lens.
Zone Distance To The Rear Of The Vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m)
Green 3 ft or greater (1 m or greater)
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up
even when using the ParkView Rear Back Up
Camera. Always check carefully behind your
vehicle, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, or blind spots before backing
up. You are responsible for the safety of your
surroundings and must continue to pay
attention while backing up. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should
only be used as a parking aid. The ParkView
camera is unable to view every obstacle or
object in your drive path.
To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView to be able
to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is
recommended that the driver look frequently
over his/her shoulder when using ParkView.
5
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 135
136 STARTING AND OPERATING
ADDING FUEL
1. Open the fuel filler door.
2. There is no fuel filler cap. A flapper door
inside the pipe seals the system.
3. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler
pipe – the nozzle opens and holds the
flapper door while refueling.
NOTE:
Only the correct size nozzle opens the latches
allowing the flapper door to open.
4. Fill the vehicle with fuel – when the fuel
nozzle “clicks” or shuts off the fuel tank is
full.
5. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel
door.
NOTE:
A funnel is provided (located in the tool bag or
cargo floor area in the rear cargo area) to open
the flapper door to allow for emergency refueling
with a gas can.
Funnel Location For Vehicle With Optional Spare Tire
Emergency Fuel Filling
WARNING!
Never have any smoking materials lit in or
near the vehicle when the fuel door is open or
the tank is being filled.
Never add fuel when the engine is running.
This is in violation of most state and federal
fire regulations and may cause the “Malfunc-
tion Indicator Light” to turn on.
A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle.
You could be burned. Always place fuel
containers on the ground while filling.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not
“top off” the fuel tank after filling.
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 136
STARTING AND OPERATING 137
VEHICLE LOADING
Certification Label
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration regulations, your vehicle has a
certification label affixed to the driver's side
door or pillar.
This label contains the month and year of manu-
facture, Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front and rear,
and Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). A
Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is included on
this label and indicates the Month, Day and
Hour of manufacture. The bar code that
appears on the bottom of the label is your VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your
vehicle including driver, passengers, vehicle,
options and cargo. The label also specifies
maximum capacities of front and rear axle
systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so
GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not
exceeded.
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allow-
able load weight a truck can carry, including the
weight of the driver, all passengers, options and
cargo.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on
the front and rear axles. The load must be
distributed in the cargo area so that the GAWR
of each axle is not exceeded.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the compo-
nents in the system with the lowest load
carrying capacity (axle, springs, tires or wheels).
Heavier axles or suspension components some-
times specified by purchasers for increased
durability does not necessarily increase the
vehicle's GVWR.
Tire Size
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label
represents the actual tire size on your vehicle.
Replacement tires must be equal to the load
capacity of this tire size.
5
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 137
138 STARTING AND OPERATING
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire
size listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your
vehicle for all loading conditions up to full
GAWR.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the
total weight of the vehicle with all fluids,
including vehicle fuel, at full capacity condi-
tions, and with no occupants or cargo loaded
into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight
values are determined by weighing your vehicle
on a commercial scale before any occupants or
cargo are added.
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the
front and rear of your vehicle at the ground can
best be determined by weighing it when it is
loaded and ready for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a
commercial scale to insure that the GVWR has
not been exceeded. The weight on the front and
rear of the vehicle should then be determined
separately to be sure that the load is properly
distributed over the front and rear axle.
Weighing the vehicle may show that the GAWR
of either the front or rear axles has been
exceeded but the total load is within the speci-
fied GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted from
front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until
the specified weight limitations are met. Store
the heavier items down low and be sure that the
weight is distributed equally. Stow all loose
items securely before driving.
Improper weight distributions can have an
adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers
and handles and the way the brakes operate.
TRAILER TOWING
Trailer towing with this vehicle is not recom-
mended.
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR.
If you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or
it can change the way your vehicle handles.
This could cause you to lose control. Also
overloading can shorten the life of your
vehicle.
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 138
STARTING AND OPERATING 139
(Continued)
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
NOTE:
When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional details.
This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or vehicle trailer provided all four wheels are OFF the ground.
This vehicle may also be towed using a tow dolly (with the front wheels OFF the ground).
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground Automatic Transmission
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow Front OK
Rear NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK
CAUTION!
DO NOT flat tow any vehicle equipped with an
automatic transmission. Damage to the
drivetrain will result. If these vehicles require
towing, make sure all drive wheels are OFF
the ground.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmission
damage. Damage from improper towing is
not covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
CAUTION! (Continued)
5
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 139
140 STARTING AND OPERATING
DRIVING TIPS
Driving On Slippery Surfaces
Information in this section will aid in safe
controlled launches in adverse conditions.
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or
other slippery surfaces may cause the driving
wheels to pull erratically to the right or left. This
phenomenon occurs when there is a difference
in the surface traction under the front (driving)
wheels.
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is
possible for a wedge of water to build up
between the tire and road surface. This is hydro-
planing and may cause partial or complete loss
of vehicle control and stopping ability. To
reduce this possibility, the following precau-
tions should be observed:
Slow down during rainstorms or when the
roads are slushy.
Slow down if the road has standing water or
puddles.
Replace the tires when tread wear indicators
first become visible.
Keep tires properly inflated.
Maintain sufficient distance between your
vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid
a collision in a sudden stop.
Driving Through Water
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to
ensure safety and prevent damage to your
vehicle.
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is
dangerous. Unequal traction can cause
sudden pulling of the front wheels. You could
lose control of the vehicle and possibly have
a collision. Accelerate slowly and carefully
whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path
where water is flowing and/or rising (as in
storm run-off). Flowing water can wear away
the road or path's surface and cause your
vehicle to sink into deeper water.
Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can
carry your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to
follow this warning may result in injuries that
are serious or fatal to you, your passengers,
and others around you.
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 140
STARTING AND OPERATING 141
(Continued)
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving
through shallow standing water, consider
the following “Warnings and Cautions”
before doing so.
WARNING!
Driving through standing water limits your
vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed
5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through
standing water.
Driving through standing water limits your
vehicle’s braking capabilities, which
increases stopping distances. Therefore,
after driving through standing water, drive
slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal
several times to dry the brakes.
Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
CAUTION!
Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the
bottom of the tire rims mounted on the
vehicle.
Determine the condition of the road or the
path that is under water and if there are any
obstacles in the way before driving through
the standing water.
Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize
wave effects.
Driving through standing water may cause
damage to your vehicle’s drivetrain compo-
nents. Always inspect your vehicle’s fluids
(i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for
signs of contamination (i.e., fluid that is milky
or foamy in appearance) after driving through
standing water. Do not continue to operate
the vehicle if any fluid appears contami-
nated, as this may result in further damage.
Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine
can cause it to lock up and stall out, and
cause serious internal damage to the engine.
Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION! (Continued)
5
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 141
142
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning flashers switch is located
on the instrument panel, below the radio.
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard
Warning flashers. When the switch is
activated, all directional turn signals
will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of
an emergency. Push the switch a second time to
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it
should not be used when the vehicle is in
motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and
it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assis-
tance, the Hazard Warning flashers will
continue to operate even though the ignition is
placed in the OFF position.
NOTE:
With extended use, the Hazard Warning flashers
may wear down your battery.
BULB REPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Overhead Lamp C5W
Sun Visors C5W
Courtesy Lamp W5W
Glove Compartment C5W
Rear Courtesy Lamp C5W
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 142
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 143
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Front Low and High Beam Headlamp HIR2LL
Front Turn Signal Lamps WY21W
Front Parking LED (See Authorized Dealer)
Daytime Running Lamps W21W
Front Side Marker Lamps LED (See Authorized Dealer)
Rear Tail/Stop Lamps P21/5W
Rear Tail Lamp LED (See Authorized Dealer)
Rear Turn Signal Lamps P21W
Rear Backup Lamps W16W
Rear Side Marker Lamps LED (See Authorized Dealer)
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp LED (See Authorized Dealer)
Front Fog Lamps H11
Rear Fog Lamps - If Equipped W16W
License Plate Lamps W5W
NOTE:
Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be purchased from an authorized dealer. If a bulb needs to be replaced, visit an authorized dealer or
refer to the applicable Service Manual.
6
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 143
144 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Replacing Exterior Bulbs
Headlamps Low Beam And High Beam
1. Remove the plastic sealing cap from the
back of the headlamp housing by turning it
counterclockwise.
Headlamp Sealing Cap Removal
2. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise.
Bulb Removal Procedure
3. Remove the bulb when all the tabs are
aligned with the openings in the metal
holder.
4. Disconnect the electrical connector from
the bulb.
Electrical Connector Removal
5. Install the new bulb and rotate clockwise to
lock in place.
New Bulb Installation
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 144
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 145
6. Reinstall the plastic cap.
Headlamp Sealing Cap Installation
Front Turn Signal And Daytime Running
Lamps
1. Turn front wheels inboard to access upper
cover in wheel liner.
2. Open the upper cover on the front of the
wheel liner.
3. Remove the cap from the back of the lower
headlamp housing.
4. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise and
remove.
5. Install the bulb into socket, and rotate
bulb/socket clockwise into lamp locking it
in place.
6. Reinstall the plastic cap and close the
cover on the wheel liner.
Front Fog Lamps
To replace the front fog lights, see an autho-
rized dealer.
Front/Rear Side Marker Lamps
The front/rear side marker lamps are LED and
not serviced separately. See an authorized
dealer for replacement of these lights.
Rear Tail, Stop, Backup And Turn Signal
Lamps
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Remove the tail lamp access panel.
3. Remove the two screws that secure the tail
lamp to the body of the vehicle.
4. Remove the tail lamp assembly.
5. Remove the two screws that secure the
backplate to the tail lamp housing.
6. Separate the backplate from the tail lamp
housing.
7. Remove the tail, stop, or turn signal bulbs
by pushing them slightly and turning coun-
terclockwise.
8. Remove the backup lamp bulb by pulling
straight out.
9. Replace lamps as required and reinstall
lamp.
6
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 145
146 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
This light is an LED assembly. See an authorized
dealer for replacement.
FUSES
General Information
The fuses protect electrical systems against
excessive current.
When a device does not work, you must check
the fuse element inside the blade fuse for a
break/melt.
Also, please be aware that when using power
outlets for extended periods of time with the
engine off may result in vehicle battery
discharge.
Blade Fuses
Underhood Fuses
The Front Distribution Unit is located on the
right side of the engine compartment, next to
the battery. To access the fuses, push the
release tabs and remove the cover.
Front Distribution Unit
The ID number of the electrical component
corresponding to each fuse can be found on the
back of the cover.
WARNING!
When replacing a blown fuse, always use an
appropriate replacement fuse with the same
amp rating as the original fuse. Never
replace a fuse with another fuse of higher
amp rating. Never replace a blown fuse with
metal wires or any other material. Do not
place a fuse inside a circuit breaker cavity or
vice versa. Failure to use proper fuses may
result in serious personal injury, fire and/or
property damage.
Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the
ignition is off and that all the other services
are switched off and/or disengaged.
If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an
authorized dealer.
If a general protection fuse for safety systems
(air bag system, braking system), power unit
systems (engine system, transmission
system) or steering system blows, contact an
authorized dealer.
1 — Fuse Element
2 — Blade Fuse with a good/functional fuse element.
3 — Blade fuse with a bad/not functional fuse
element (blown fuse).
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 146
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 147
Cavity Maxi Fuse Mini Fuse Description
F01 70 Amp Tan – Body Controller
F02 60 Amp Blue – Body Controller Rear Distribution Unit
F03 20 Amp Yellow – Ignition Switch
F04 40 Amp Orange – Anti-Lock Brake Pump
F05 70 Amp Tan – Electric Power Steering
F06 30 Amp Green – Radiator Fan - Low Speed
F07 50 Amp Red – Radiator Fan - High Speed
F08 40 Amp Orange – Blower Motor
F09 – 7.5 Amp Brown Transmission (Aisin)
F10 – 15 Amp Blue Horn
F11 – 10 Amp Red Powertrain
F15 – 10 Amp Red Transmission (Aisin)
F16 – 7.5 Amp Brown Transmission Powertrain
F17 – 10 Amp Red Powertrain
F18 – 5 Amp Tan Powertrain (Multiair – If Equipped)
F19 – 7.5 Amp Brown Air Conditioning
F20 – 30 Amp Green Rear Defroster
F21 – 15 Amp Blue Fuel Pump
F22 – 20 Amp Yellow Powertrain
F23 – 20 Amp Yellow Anti-Lock Brake Valves
6
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 147
148 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Interior Fuses
The interior fuse panel is part of the Body
Control Module (BCM) and is located on the
driver's side under the instrument panel. To
access the fuses, pull on the cover.
Interior Fuse Panel
F30 – 5 Amp Tan After Run Pump
F81 70 Amp Tan – PTC (Secondary)
F83 40 Amp Orange – PTC (Primary)
F85 – 15 Amp Blue Front Power Outlet 12 Volts
F86 – 7.5 Amp Brown USB Charger Sockets
F88 – 7.5 Amp Brown Heated Mirrors
Cavity Maxi Fuse Mini Fuse Description
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 148
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 149
Fuse Panel Cavity Locations
6
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 149
150 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Cavity Vehicle Fuse Number Mini Fuse Description
1 F12 7.5 Amp Brown Right Low Beam
2 F32 7.5 Amp Brown Front and Rear Ceiling Lights Trunk and Door Courtesy
Lights
3 F53 7.5 Amp Brown Instrument Panel Node
4 F38 20 Amp Yellow Central Door Locking
5 F36 15 Amp Blue Diagnostic Socket, Vehicle Radio, Climate Control
System, TPMS, Sunroof
6 F90 7.5 Amp Brown Left High Beam
7 F91 7.5 Amp Brown Right High Beam
8 F92 7.5 Amp Brown Left Fog Light
9 F93 7.5 Amp Brown Right Fog Light
10 F42 5 Amp Tan BSM, ESP
11 F33 20 Amp Yellow Rear Left Passenger Window
12 F34 20 Amp Yellow Rear Right Passenger Window
13 F43 20 Amp Yellow Bi-Directional Washer
14 F48 20 Amp Yellow Passenger Power Window
15 F13 7.5 Amp Brown Left Low Beam, Headlamp Leveling
16 F50 7.5 Amp Brown Airbag
17 F51 5 Amp Tan Vehicle Radio Switch, Climate Control System, Stop Light,
Reverse Gear, Sunroof, Parking Sensor, Rear Camera
18 F37 7.5 Amp Brown Stop Light Switch, Instrument Panel Node
19 F49 5 Amp Tan Exterior Mirror, GPS, Electric Mirror, Parking Sensor
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 150
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 151
Rear Interior Fuses
The rear interior fuse panel is located on the
driver's side in the rear compartment.To access
the fuses, pull on the cover.
Rear Fuse Panel
20 F31 5 Amp Tan Climate Control, Seat Regulation
21 F47 20 Amp Yellow Driver Power Window
Cavity Vehicle Fuse Number Mini Fuse Description
6
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 151
152 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING — IF
EQUIPPED
Jack Location
The spare tire jack is located in the rear cargo
area underneath the cargo floor.
Removal Of Jack And Tools
To access the jack and jack tools, you must
remove the cargo floor cover located in the
cargo area.To remove the cover, place your
hand in cargo floor handle and lift up and
towards the rear of the vehicle.
Cargo Floor Handle
Cavity Vehicle Fuse Number Mini Fuse Description
1 F61 15 Amp Blue Lumbar Regulation Seats
2 F62 15 Amp Blue Heated Seats
3 F64 20 Amp Yellow Hi Fi System
4 F65 20 Amp Yellow Sun Blind
5 F66 20 Amp Yellow Sunroof
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of
the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far
enough off the road to avoid the danger of
being hit when operating the jack or changing
the wheel.
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is
dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the jack
and fall on you. You could be crushed. Never
put any part of your body under a vehicle that
is on a jack. If you need to get under a raised
vehicle, take it to a service center where it
can be raised on a lift.
Never start or run the engine while the
vehicle is on a jack.
The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be
used to lift the vehicle for service purposes.
The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level
surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 152
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 153
To remove pull up on the cover.
Jack And Tools Cover
Jack And Jack Tools
Jack and Jack Handle/Lug Wrench
Spare Tire Removal
Remove the spare tire before attempting to jack
up the vehicle. The spare tire is stowed in under-
neath the rear cargo area on the outside of the
vehicle.
1. Remove the cargo floor to access the
winch.
2. Remove the jack handle and insert the lug
wrench end into the winch mechanism.
Winch Location
3. Rotate the lug wrench handle until the
spare tire is on the ground with enough
cable slack to allow you to pull it out from
under the vehicle.
Wrench Rotation
1 — Emergency Fuel Fill Funnel
2 — Emergency Screw Driver
3 — Jack
4 — Jack Handle/Lug Wrench
1 — Jack Handle/Lug Wrench
2 — Jack
6
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 153
154 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
4. Pull the spare tire out from the under
vehicle to gain access to the spare tire
retainer.
Pulling The Spare Tire Out
5. Loosen the spare tire retainer nut to
remove the retainer.
Spare Tire Retainer Nut
6. Lift the spare tire with one hand to give
clearance to tilt the retainer at the end of
the cable.
Gaining Access To The Retainer
7. Pull the retainer through the center of the
wheel.
Pulling The Retainer Through The Center Of the Wheel
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Place the gear selector into PARK (P).
5. Place the ignition in OFF mode.
CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed for use
with the jack wrench extension tool only. Use
of air wrench or power tool may damage the
winch.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side
of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far
enough off the road to avoid being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 154
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 155
(Continued)
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel
diagonally opposite the jacking position.
For example, if the driver’s front wheel is
being changed, block the passenger’s rear
wheel.
Wheel Blocked
NOTE:
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being jacked.
Jacking Instructions
Jack Warning Label
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings
to help prevent personal injury or damage to
your vehicle:
Always park on a firm, level surface as far
from the edge of the roadway as possible
before raising the vehicle.
Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers.
Apply the parking brake firmly and set the
transmission in PARK.
Block the wheel diagonally opposite the
wheel to be raised.
Never start or run the engine with the vehicle
on a jack.
Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is
on a jack.
Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a
jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle,
take it to a service center where it can be
raised on a lift.
Only use the jack in the positions indicated
and for lifting this vehicle during a tire
change.
If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with
the valve stem facing the ground.
WARNING! (Continued)
6
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 155
156 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
1. Remove the spare tire, jack and wheel bolt
wrench.
2. If equipped with aluminum wheels where
the center cap covers the wheel bolts, use
the wheel bolt wrench to pry the center cap
off carefully before raising the vehicle.
Center Cap Removal
3. Before raising the vehicle, use the wheel
bolt wrench to loosen, but not remove, the
wheel bolts on the wheel with the flat tire.
Turn the wheel bolts counterclockwise one
turn while the wheel is still on the ground.
Jack Placement
Front Lifting Point
Front Jacking Location
Rear Lifting Point
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking
on locations other than those indicated in
the Jacking Instructions for this vehicle.
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 156
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 157
Rear Jacking Location
NOTE:
There are front and rear jacking locations on
each side of the body (as indicated by the trian-
gular lift point symbols on the sill molding.)
4. Place the jack underneath the lift area that
is closest to the flat tire. Turn the jack
screw clockwise to firmly engage the jack
saddle with the lift area of the sill flange,
centering the jack saddle between the
locating notches on the sill flange.
5. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove
the flat tire and install the spare tire.
6. Remove the wheel bolts and tire.
7. Mount the spare tire.
NOTE:
For vehicles so equipped, do not
attempt to install a center cap or wheel
cover on the compact spare.
Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And Main-
tenance” for additional warnings,
cautions, and information about the
spare tire, its use, and operation.
8. Install the wheel bolts with the threaded
end of the wheel bolt toward the wheel.
Lightly tighten the wheel bolts.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary
can make the vehicle less stable. It could
slip off the jack and hurt someone near it.
Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the
tire.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the
valve stem facing outward. The vehicle could
be damaged if the spare tire is mounted
incorrectly.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the wheel bolts fully until
the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to
follow this warning may result in personal
injury.
To avoid possible personal injury, handle the
wheel covers with care to avoid contact with
any sharp edges.
6
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 157
158 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
9. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning
the jack handle counterclockwise.
10. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push
down on the wrench while at the end of the
handle for increased leverage. Tighten the
wheel bolts in a star pattern until each
wheel bolt has been tightened twice. Refer
to “Wheel And Tire Torque Specifications”
in “Technical Specifications” for proper lug
nut torque. If in doubt about the correct
tightness, have them checked with a
torque wrench by an authorized dealer or
at a service station.
11. Stow the jack, tools and flat tire.
Reinstalling The Jack And Tools
1. Securely stow the jack and jack tools in the
cargo area.
Jack And Jack Tools
2. Place cover over jack and jack tools.
Jack And Tool Cover
3. Place hand in cargo floor cover handle and
install back into cargo area.
Cargo Floor Handle
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could endanger the
occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the
jack parts and the spare tire in the places
provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire
repaired or replaced immediately.
1 — Emergency Fuel Fill Funnel
2 — Emergency Screw Driver
3 — Jack
4 — Jack Handle/Lug Wrench
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 158
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 159
(Continued)
Spare Tire Storage
Rotate the jack wrench tool clockwise on the
winch drive nut (The flat tire must not be
connected to the winch) until effort becomes
heavy and an audible click is heard indicating
the winch is properly stowed.
Wrench Rotation
Cover the flat tire with the Emergency Spare Tire
Bag (If equipped) and stow the flat tire into the
cargo area.
NOTE:
The winch mechanism is designed for use with
the extension tube only. Use of an air wrench or
other power tools is not recommended and can
damage the winch.
TIRE SERVICE KIT
If a tire is punctured, you can make a first emer-
gency repair using the Tire Service Kit located in
the rear storage area under the cargo floor.
Tire Service Kit Components
Tire punctures of up to 1/4 of an inch (6mm)
can be repaired; the kit can be used in all
weather conditions. Do not remove the
foreign object from the punctured tire, i.e.,
screw or nail.
Remove the Tire Service Kit from the vehicle,
take it out from the bag and place it near the
punctured tire. Screw the clear flexible filling
tube to the tire valve.
1 — Power Button
2 — Pressure Gauge
3 — Sealant Bottle
4 — Sealant Hose (Clear)
5 — Power Plug (located on bottom side of Tire
Service Kit)
WARNING!
Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the
vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit
when using the Tire Service Kit.
Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle
under the following circumstances:
If the puncture in the tire tread is
approximately 1/4 inch (6 mm) or
larger.
If the tire has any sidewall damage.
If the tire has any damage from driving
with extremely low tire pressure.
If the tire has any damage from driving
on a flat tire.
6
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 159
160 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
Insert the power plug into the vehicle power
outlet socket and start the vehicle engine.
Push the Tire Service Kit power button to the “I”
position. The electric compressor will be turned
on, sealant and air will inflate the tire.
Minimum 26 psi (1.8 bar) of pressure should be
reached within 20 minutes. If the pressure has
not been reached, turn off and remove the Tire
Service Kit, drive the vehicle 30 feet
(10 meters) back and forth, to better distribute
the sealant inside the tire.
Attach the clear flexible sealant hose of the
compressor directly to the tire valve and repeat
the inflation process.
When the correct pressure has been reached,
start driving the vehicle to uniformly distribute
the sealant inside the tire. After 10 minutes,
stop and check the tire pressure. If the pressure
is below 19 psi (1.3 bar), do not drive the
vehicle, as the tire is too damaged, contact the
nearest authorized dealer.
If the pressure is at 19 psi (1.3 bar) or above,
repeat the inflation process to reach the correct
tire pressure and continue driving.
Peel off the warning label from the bottle and
place it on the dashboard as a reminder to the
driver that the tire has been treated with the
Tire Service Kit.
If the wheel has any damage.
If you are unsure of the condition of
the tire or the wheel.
Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames
or heat source.
A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could endanger the
occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the Tire
Service Kit in the place provided. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in injuries
that are serious or fatal to you, your passen-
gers, and others around you.
Take care not to allow the contents of Tire
Service Kit to come in contact with hair, eyes,
or clothing. Tire Service Kit sealant is harmful
if inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed through
the skin. It causes skin, eye, and respiratory
irritation. Flush immediately with plenty of
water if there is any contact with eyes or skin.
Change clothing as soon as possible, if there
is any contact with clothing.
WARNING! (Continued)
Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains
latex. In case of an allergic reaction or rash,
consult a physician immediately. Keep Tire
Service Kit out of reach of children. If swal-
lowed, rinse mouth immediately with plenty
of water and drink plenty of water. Do not
induce vomiting! Consult a physician immedi-
ately.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire
repair. Have the tire inspected and repaired
or replaced after using Tire Service Kit. Do
not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) until the tire
is repaired or replaced. Failure to follow this
warning can result in injuries that are
serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and
others around you. Have the tire checked as
soon as possible at an authorized dealer.
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 160
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 161
NOTE:
Replace the sealant canister prior to the expira-
tion date at an authorized dealer.
Tire Service Kit Expiration Date Location
JUMP STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can
be jump started using a set of jumper cables
and a battery in another vehicle or by using a
portable battery booster pack. Jump starting
can be dangerous if done improperly, so please
follow the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack,
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions
and precautions.
Preparations For Jump Start
The battery in your vehicle is located on the
driver’s side of the engine compartment.
Positive Battery Post
WARNING!
The metal end fitting from Power Plug may
get hot after use, so it should be handled
carefully.
WARNING!
Store the sealant canister in its special
compartment, away from sources of heat.
Failure to follow this WARNING may result in
sealant canister rupture and serious injury
or death.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is
frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause
personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack
or any other booster source with a system
voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to
the battery, starter motor, alternator or
electrical system may occur.
6
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 161
162 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
1. Apply the parking brake, place the trans-
mission in PARK (P) and turn the ignition
OFF.
2. Turn off the heater, radio and all unneces-
sary electrical accessories.
3. Remove the protective cover over the
remote positive (+) battery post. To remove
the cover, pull upward on the cover.
4. If using another vehicle to jump start the
battery, park the vehicle within the jumper
cables reach, set the parking brake and
make sure the ignition is OFF.
Jump Starting Procedure
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the
discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive
(+) jumper cable to the positive (+) post of
the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper
cable to the negative (-) post of the booster
battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative
(-) jumper cable to a good engine ground
(exposed metal part of the discharged
vehicle’s engine) away from the battery
and the fuel injection system.
WARNING!
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan
whenever the hood is raised. It can start
anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can be
injured by moving fan blades.
Remove any metal jewelry such as rings,
watch bands and bracelets that could make
an inadvertent electrical contact. You could
be seriously injured.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn
your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas
which is flammable and explosive. Keep open
flames or sparks away from the battery.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as
this could establish a ground connection
and personal injury could result.
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure
could result in personal injury or property
damage due to battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could
result in damage to the charging system of
the booster vehicle or the discharged
vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the discharged battery.
The resulting electrical spark could cause
the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury. Only use the specific
ground point, do not use any other
exposed metal parts.
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 162
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 163
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the
booster battery, let the engine idle a few
minutes, and then start the engine in the
vehicle with the discharged battery.
6. Once the engine is started, remove the
jumper cables in the reverse sequence.
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the
jumper cable from the engine ground of
the vehicle with the discharged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the nega-
tive (-) jumper cable from the negative (-)
post of the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) jumper cable
from the positive (+) post of the booster
battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the posi-
tive (+) jumper cable from the positive (+)
post of the discharged vehicle.
If frequent jump starting is required to start your
vehicle, the battery and charging system should
be inspected at an authorized dealer.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can
reduce the potential for overheating by taking
the appropriate action.
On the highways — slow down.
In city traffic — while stopped, place the trans-
mission in NEUTRAL (N), but do not increase
engine idle speed.
NOTE:
There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition:
If your Air Conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The
A/C system adds heat to the engine cooling
system and turning the A/C off can help
remove this heat.
You can also turn the temperature control to
maximum heat, the mode control to floor and
the blower control to high. This allows the
heater core to act as a supplement to the radi-
ator and aids in removing heat from the engine
cooling system.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power
outlets draw power from the vehicle’s
battery, even when not in use (i.e., cellular
devices, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long
enough without engine operation, the
vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to
degrade battery life and/or prevent the
engine from starting.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from
your radiator. If you see or hear steam
coming from under the hood, do not open
the hood until the radiator has had time to
cool. Never try to open a cooling system
pressure cap when the radiator or coolant
bottle is hot.
6
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 163
164 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
IGNITION KEY REMOVAL OVERRIDE
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park
Interlock which requires the transmission to be
in PARK (P) before the ignition switch can be
turned to the LOCK/OFF (key removal) position.
To remove the key manually, proceed as
follows:
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Remove the Allen Key located in the rear
cargo area, in the tool bag (if equipped) or
on the left side in the cargo box.
3. Unlock the steering column, pull the tilt/
telescoping control handle down.
4. Pull the steering wheel outward until it is in
the end of the travel position, then lock the
steering column in position, push the
control handle up until fully engaged.
5. Using the Allen key, undo the lower
steering column cover screws, and remove
the lower cover.
Lower Steering Column Screw Locations
6. Pull the release tab downwards using one
hand and with the other one remove the
key, sliding it outwards.
Release Tab Location
7. Once the key is removed, reinstall the
steering column cover.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the pointer rises to
the H (red) mark, the instrument cluster will
sound a chime. When safe, pull over and
stop the vehicle with the engine at idle. Turn
off the air conditioning and wait until the
pointer drops back into the normal range. If
the pointer remains on the H (red) mark for
more than a minute, turn the engine off
immediately and call for service.
CAUTION!
It is advisable to contact an authorized
dealer to have the reinstall procedure
carried out. If you would like to proceed in
performing the reinstall procedure special
attention must be paid to the correct
coupling of the clips. Otherwise damage to
the cover or noise might be heard due to
incorrect fastening of the lower cover.
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 164
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 165
GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE
If a malfunction occurs and the gear selector
cannot be moved out of the PARK (P) position,
you can use the following procedure to tempo-
rarily move the gear selector:
1. Turn the engine OFF.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. By pulling the gear selector boot, carefully
separate the gear selector bezel and boot
assembly from the center console, and
raise it up to access the gear selector
mechanism.
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the
brake pedal.
5. Insert the equipped screwdriver or similar
tool into the gear selector override access
hole (at the right front corner of the gear
selector assembly) and push and hold the
override release lever down.
NOTE:
When inserting the screwdriver, keep it as
vertical as possible during the override operation.
6. Move the gear selector to the NEUTRAL (N)
position.
7. The vehicle may then be started in
NEUTRAL (N).
8. Reinstall the gear selector boot.
Gear Selector Override
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or
snow, it can often be moved using a rocking
motion. Turn the steering wheel right and left to
clear the area around the front wheels. Push
and hold the lock button on the gear selector.
Then, shift back and forth between DRIVE (D)
and REVERSE (R), while gently pressing the
accelerator. Use the least amount of acceler-
ator pedal pressure that will maintain the
rocking motion, without spinning the wheels, or
racing the engine.
NOTE:
Push the "ESC OFF" switch, to place the Elec-
tronic Stability Control (ESC) system in "Partial
Off" mode, before rocking the vehicle. Refer to
“Electronic Brake Control System” in “Safety” for
further information. Once the vehicle has been
freed, push the "ESC OFF" switch again to restore
"ESC On" mode.
1 — Raised Gear Selector Boot
2 — Gear Selector Override Access Hole
6
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 165
166 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may
cause damage, or even failure, of the axle
and tires. A tire could explode and injure
someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels
faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer
than 30 seconds continuously without
stopping when you are stuck and do not let
anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter
what the speed.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels
may lead to transmission overheating and
failure. Allow the engine to idle with the trans-
mission in NEUTRAL for at least one minute
after every five rocking-motion cycles. This
will minimize overheating and reduce the risk
of transmission failure during prolonged
efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting
between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin
the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or
drivetrain damage may result.
Revving the engine or spinning the wheels
too fast may lead to transmission over-
heating and failure. It can also damage the
tires. Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph
(48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission
shifting occurring).
CAUTION! (Continued)
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 166
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 167
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
NOTE:
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service.
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to
prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow
bars and other equipment designed for this
purpose, following equipment manufacturer’s
instructions. Use of safety chains is mandatory.
Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main
structural members of the vehicle, not to
bumpers or associated brackets. State and
local laws regarding vehicles under tow must be
observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers,
defroster, etc.) while being towed, the key must
be in the ON/RUN position.
Vehicle can be towed with the front wheels
elevated.
Vehicle can be towed on a flatbed truck (all
wheels off the ground).
If the ignition key is unavailable, or the vehicle’s
battery is discharged, refer to “Gear Selector
Override” in this section for instructions on
shifting the transmission out of PARK in order to
move the vehicle.
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow Front OK
Rear NOT ALLOWED
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD
CAUTION!
Do not use sling type equipment when
towing. Vehicle damage may occur.
When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck,
do not attach to front or rear suspension
components. Damage to your vehicle may
result from improper towing.
6
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 167
168 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Acci-
dent Response System.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in
“Safety” for further information on the
Enhanced Accident Response System (EARS)
function.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data
Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is
to record data that will assist in understanding
how a vehicle’s systems performed under
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such
as an air bag deployment or hitting a road
obstacle.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in
“Safety” for further information on the Event
Data Recorder (EDR).
CAUTION!
DO NOT flat tow any vehicle equipped with an
automatic transmission. Damage to the
drivetrain will result. If these vehicles require
towing, make sure all drive wheels are OFF
the ground.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmission
damage. Damage from improper towing is
not covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 168
169
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil
change indicator system. The oil change indi-
cator system will remind you that it is time to
take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil
change indicator message will illuminate in the
instrument cluster. This means that service is
required for your vehicle. Operating conditions
such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow and
extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures will
influence when the “Change Oil” or “Oil Change
Required” message is displayed. Severe oper-
ating conditions can cause the change oil
message to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles
(5,600 km) since last reset. Have your vehicle
serviced as soon as possible, within the next
500 miles (805 km).
An authorized dealer will reset the oil change
indicator message after completing the sched-
uled oil change. If a scheduled oil change is
performed by someone other than an autho-
rized dealer, the message can be reset by refer-
ring to the steps described under “Instrument
Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km),
12 months, or 350 hours of engine run time,
whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine
run or idle time is generally only a concern for
fleet customers.
Severe Duty All Models
Change engine oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) or
350 hours of engine run time if the vehicle is
operated in a dusty and off-road environment,
or is operated predominately at idle or only very
low engine RPM. This type of vehicle use is
considered Severe Duty.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
Check engine oil level
Check windshield washer fluid level
Check the tire inflation pressures and look for
unusual wear or damage
Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir,
and brake master cylinder reservoir, and fill as
needed
Check function of all interior and exterior lights
7
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 169
170 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Maintenance Plan
Required Maintenance Intervals
Refer to the maintenance plan on the following
pages for the required maintenance intervals.
At Every Oil Change Interval As
Indicated By Oil Change Indicator
System:
Change oil and filter
Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil
indicator system turns on.
Inspect battery and clean and tighten termi-
nals as required
Inspect the CV/Universal joints
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums,
and hoses
Inspect engine cooling system protection and
hoses
Check and adjust hand brake
Inspect exhaust system
Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or
off-road conditions
At Every Oil Change Interval As
Indicated By Oil Change Indicator
System:
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 170
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 171
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first):
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod
ends and boot seals, and replace if
necessary.
X
X X X X X X
Inspect the brake linings, parking
brake function.
X X X X X X X
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air filter. X X X X X
Replace cabin air filter. X X X X X X X
Replace brake fluid every two years.
1
X X X X X X X
Clean and lube sunroof tracks — if
equipped.
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Replace spark plugs.
2
X X X X X
7
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 171
172 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
Heavy Duty Use Of The Vehicle
Change engine oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) or
350 hours of engine run time if the vehicle is
operated in a dusty and off road environment or
is operated predominately at idle or only very
low engine RPM. This type of vehicle use is
considered Severe Duty.
Flush and replace the engine
coolant at 10 years or 150,
000 miles (240,000 km), whichever
comes first.
X X
Inspect and replace PCV valve if
necessary.
X
Replace the timing belt. X
1. The brake fluid change interval is time based only, mileage intervals do not apply.
2. The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply.
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first):
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Do only service work
for which you have the knowledge and the
right equipment. If you have any doubt about
your ability to perform a service job, take your
vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Failure to properly inspect and maintain your
vehicle could result in a component malfunc-
tion and effect vehicle handling and perfor-
mance. This could cause an accident.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 172
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 173
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 1.4L TURBO
1 — Air Cleaner Filter 6 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
2 — Engine Oil Dipstick 7 — Coolant Pressure Cap
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 8 — Coolant Pressure Bottle
4 — Battery 9 — Oil Fill Cap
5 — Front Distribution Unit (Fuses)
7
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 173
174 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Checking Oil Level
To ensure proper engine lubrication, the engine
oil must be maintained at the correct level.
Check the oil level at regular intervals, such as
every fuel stop. The best time to check the
engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully
warmed up engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level
ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level
readings.
There are four possible dipstick types;
Crosshatched zone
Crosshatched zone marked SAFE
Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the low
end of the range and MAX at the high end of the
range
Crosshatched zone marked with dimples at the
MIN and the MAX ends of the range
NOTE:
Always maintain the oil level within the cross-
hatch markings on the dipstick.
Adding 1 quart (1.0 liters) of oil when the
reading is at the low end of the dipstick range
will raise the oil level to the high end of the
range marking.
Adding Washer Fluid
The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located
in the engine compartment, and the fluid level
should be checked at regular intervals. Fill the
reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not
engine coolant/antifreeze). Refer to “Engine
Compartment” in this section for further infor-
mation.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a mainte-
nance-free battery. You will never have to add
water, nor is periodic maintenance required.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will
cause aeration or loss of oil pressure. This
could damage your engine.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer
solvents are flammable. They could ignite
and burn you. Care must be exercised when
filling or working around the washer solution.
WARNING!
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and
can burn or even blind you. Do not allow
battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or
clothing. Do not lean over a battery when
attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes or
on skin, flush the area immediately with large
amounts of water. Refer to “Jump Starting
Procedure” in “In Case Of Emergency” for
further information.
Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not
use a booster battery or any other booster
source with an output greater than 12 Volts.
Do not allow cable clamps to touch each
other.
Battery posts, terminals, and related acces-
sories contain lead and lead compounds.
Wash hands after handling.
The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose
that should not be disconnected and should
only be replaced with a battery of the same
type (vented).
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 174
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 175
Pressure Washing
DEALER SERVICE
An authorized dealer has the qualified service
personnel, special tools, and equipment to
perform all service operations in an expert
manner. Service Manuals are available which
include detailed service information for your
vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result
in civil penalties being assessed against you.
Engine Oil
Change Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you
that it is time to take your vehicle in for sched-
uled maintenance. Refer to the “Maintenance
Plan” for further information.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km),
12 months or 350 hours of engine run time,
whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine
run or idle time is generally only a concern for
fleet customers.
Engine Oil Selection
For the best performance and maximum protec-
tion for turbocharged engines under all types of
operating conditions, the manufacturer recom-
mends synthetic engine oils that are API Certi-
fied and meet the requirements of FCA Material
Standard MS-12991.
CAUTION!
It is essential when replacing the cables on
the battery that the positive cable is attached
to the positive post and the negative cable is
attached to the negative post. Battery posts
are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and
are identified on the battery case. Cable
clamps should be tight on the terminal posts
and free of corrosion.
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is
in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle
battery cables before connecting the charger
to the battery. Do not use a “fast charger” to
provide starting voltage.
CAUTION!
Cleaning the engine compartment with a
high pressure washer is not recommended.
Precautions have been taken to safeguard
all parts and connections however, the
pressures generated by these machines is
such that complete protection against water
ingress cannot be guaranteed.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Only do service work
for which you have the knowledge and the
proper equipment. If you have any doubt
about your ability to perform a service job,
take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
7
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 175
176 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine
Oil Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American Petro-
leum Institute (API). The manufac-
turer only recommends API Certified
engine oils.
This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-20, 0W-30,
5W-30 and 10W-30 engine oils.
Engine Oil Viscosity — 1.4L Turbo Engine
(SAE Grade)
Mopar SAE 5W-40 full synthetic engine oil is
recommended for all operating temperatures.
This engine oil improves low temperature
starting and vehicle fuel economy.
Lubricants that do not have both the engine oil
certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity
grade number should not be used.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recom-
mended engine oil viscosity for your engine. For
information on engine oil filler cap location,
refer to “Engine Compartment” in “Servicing
And Maintenance” for further information.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils, provided the
recommended oil quality requirements are met,
and the recommended maintenance intervals
for oil and filter changes are followed.
Synthetic engine oils that do not have both the
engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE
viscosity grade number should not be used.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends
against the addition of any additives (other than
leak detection dyes) to the engine oil. Engine oil
is an engineered product and its performance
may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used
engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle. Used
oil and oil filters, indiscriminately discarded, can
present a problem to the environment. Contact
an authorized dealer, service station or govern-
mental agency for advice on how and where
used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a
new filter at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer's engines have a full-flow
type disposable oil filter. Use a filter of this type
for replacement. The quality of replacement
filters varies considerably. Only high quality
filters should be used to ensure most efficient
service. Mopar engine oil filters are high quality
oil filters and are recommended.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine
oil as the chemicals can damage your
engine. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 176
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 177
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section
for the proper maintenance intervals.
NOTE:
Be sure to follow the “Severe Duty Conditions”
maintenance interval if applicable.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner
filters varies considerably. Only high quality
filters should be used to ensure most efficient
service. Mopar engine air cleaner filters are a
high quality filter and are recommended.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air condi-
tioner should be checked and serviced by an
authorized dealer at the start of each warm
season. This service should include cleaning of
the condenser fins and a performance test.
Drive belt tension should also be checked at
this time.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling —
R–1234yf
R–1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a
hydrofluoroolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the
Environmental Protection Agency and is an
ozone-friendly substance with a low
global-warming potential. The manufacturer
recommends that air conditioning service be
performed by an authorized dealer using
recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE:
Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG
compressor oil, and refrigerants.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) can provide a measure of protection in
the case of engine backfire. Do not remove
the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) unless such removal is necessary for
repair or maintenance. Make sure that no
one is near the engine compartment before
starting the vehicle with the air induction
system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) removed.
Failure to do so can result in serious
personal injury.
WARNING!
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubri-
cants approved by the manufacturer for your
air conditioning system. Some unapproved
refrigerants are flammable and can explode,
injuring you. Other unapproved refrigerants
or lubricants can cause the system to fail,
requiring costly repairs. Refer to Warranty
Information Book, located in your owner’s
information kit, for further warranty informa-
tion.
The air conditioning system contains refrig-
erant under high pressure. To avoid risk of
personal injury or damage to the system,
adding refrigerant or any repair requiring
lines to be disconnected should be done by
an experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air
conditioning system as the chemicals can
damage your air conditioning components.
Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
7
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 177
178 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such
items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points
and rollers, liftgate, tailgate, decklid, sliding
doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated
periodically with a lithium based grease, such
as Mopar Spray White Lube, to ensure quiet
easy operation, and to protect against rust and
wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant,
the parts concerned should be wiped clean to
remove dust and grit; after lubricating, excess
oil and grease should be removed. Particular
attention should also be given to hood latching
components to ensure proper function. When
performing other underhood services, the hood
latch release mechanism and safety catch
should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated
twice a year, preferably in the Autumn and
Spring. Apply a small amount of a high quality
lubricant, such as Mopar Lock Cylinder Lubri-
cant, directly into the lock cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and
the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft
cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will
remove accumulations of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass, for long
periods, may cause deterioration of the wiper
blades. Always use washer fluid when using the
wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry wind-
shield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or
ice from the windshield. Keep the blade rubber
out of contact with petroleum products such as
engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE:
Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending
on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
performance of blades may be present with chat-
tering, marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of
these conditions are present, clean the wiper
blades or replace as necessary.
The wiper blades and wiper arms should be
inspected periodically, not just when wiper
performance problems are experienced. This
inspection should include the following points:
Wear or uneven edges
Foreign material
Hardening or cracking
Deformation or fatigue
If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged,
replace the affected wiper arm or blade with a
new unit. Do not attempt to repair a wiper arm
or blade that is damaged.
Service Position Strategy
The service position strategy allows the wiper
blades to be placed in a position that allows the
wiper blades to be easily changed.
To enable the Service Position Strategy, the
wipers must be in the Park position before
placing the ignition in the STOP/OFF position.
Service mode must be activated within two
minutes after the ignition is placed in the STOP/
OFF position.
To have a correct activation of strategy, the
Service Position command (antipanic) must be
active for at least half a second.
At every valid activation of Service Position
command, the wiper blades are activated for
250 ms.
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 178
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 179
The Service Position command can be repeated
several times to bring the blades into the
desired position, up to a maximum of three
times.
After three subsequent activations the strategy
is disabled.
Function Deactivation:
The functionality is reset if:
The ignition is turned to the MAR/RUN position
Number of subsequent activations is three
Two minute timer has expired after turning the
ignition STOP (OFF/LOCK).
NOTE:
When turning the ignition MAR (ACC/ON/RUN),
the blades will go into the parking position.
Front Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the front wiper arm upward to raise the
wiper blade off of the windshield.
2. Push the release button on the arm of the
wiper blade.
3. Push the wiper blade up and remove it.
Front Wiper
4. Install the wiper blade and firmly push the
wiper blade until it snaps into place.
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the rear wiper arm upward to raise the
wiper blade off of the liftgate glass.
2. Grab the bottom of the wiper blade and
rotate it forward to unsnap the blade pivot
pin from the wiper blade holder.
Rear Wiper
3. Install the wiper blade pivot pin into the
wiper blade holder at the end of the wiper
arm, and firmly push the wiper blade until
it snaps into place.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide
entry into the vehicle body is a properly main-
tained engine exhaust system.
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Release Button
3 — Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Blade Pivot Pin
3 — Wiper Arm
4 — Wiper Blade Holder
7
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 179
180 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
If you notice a change in the sound of the
exhaust system; or if the exhaust fumes can be
detected inside the vehicle; or when the under-
side or rear of the vehicle is damaged; have an
authorized technician inspect the complete
exhaust system and adjacent body areas for
broken, damaged, deteriorated, or misposi-
tioned parts. Open seams or loose connections
could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the
passenger compartment. In addition, have the
exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle
is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace
as required.
Under normal operating conditions, the cata-
lytic converter will not require maintenance.
However, it is important to keep the engine
properly tuned to ensure proper catalyst opera-
tion and prevent possible catalyst damage.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being
assessed against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunc-
tioning engine operation, a scorching odor may
suggest severe and abnormal catalyst over-
heating. If this occurs, stop the vehicle, turn off
the engine and allow it to cool. Service,
including a tune-up to manufacturer's specifica-
tions, should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter
damage:
Do not interrupt the ignition when the transmis-
sion is in gear and the vehicle is in motion.
Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or
towing the vehicle.
Do not idle the engine with any ignition compo-
nents disconnected or removed, such as when
diagnostic testing, or for prolonged periods
during very rough idle or malfunctioning oper-
ating conditions.
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you uncon-
scious and can eventually poison you. To
avoid breathing CO, refer to “Safety Tips” in
“Safety” for further information.
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you
park over materials that can burn. Such
materials might be grass or leaves coming
into contact with your exhaust system. Do not
park or operate your vehicle in areas where
your exhaust system can contact anything
that can burn.
CAUTION!
The catalytic converter requires the use of
unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will
destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as
an emissions control device and may seri-
ously reduce engine performance and cause
serious damage to the engine.
Damage to the catalytic converter can result
if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating
condition. In the event of engine malfunction,
particularly involving engine misfire or other
apparent loss of performance, have your
vehicle serviced promptly. Continued opera-
tion of your vehicle with a severe malfunction
could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter
and vehicle.
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 180
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 181
Cooling System
Coolant Checks
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection
every 12 months (before the onset of freezing
weather, where applicable). If the engine
coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or rusty in appear-
ance, the system should be drained, flushed
and refilled with fresh engine coolant (anti-
freeze). Check the front of the A/C condenser
for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If
dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a
garden hose vertically down the face of the
condenser.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE:
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to
the system please contact an authorized dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
contains visible sediment, have an authorized
dealer clean and flush with OAT coolant (anti-
freeze) (conforming to MS.90032).
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section
for the proper maintenance intervals.
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
Specifications” for further information.
NOTE:
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT)
engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in
engine damage and may decrease corrosion
protection. Organic Additive Technology (OAT)
engine coolant is different and should not be
mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology
(HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “glob-
ally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a
non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is intro-
duced into the cooling system in an emergency,
the cooling system will need to be drained,
flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not
use additional rust inhibitors or antirust prod-
ucts, as they may not be compatible with the
radiator engine coolant and may plug the radi-
ator.
This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (anti-
freeze). Use of propylene glycolbased engine
coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from
your radiator. If you see or hear steam
coming from under the hood, do not open the
hood until the radiator has had time to cool.
Never open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away
from the radiator cooling fan when the hood
is raised. The fan starts automatically and
may start at any time, whether the engine is
running or not.
When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the igni-
tion to the OFF mode. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at any time the igni-
tion is in the ON mode.
7
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 181
182 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added
to the system please contact an authorized
dealer.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that
allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine
coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to 10 years or
150,000 miles (240,000 km) before replacement.
To prevent reducing this extended maintenance
period, it is important that you use the same engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032)
throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for
using Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine
coolant (antifreeze) that meets the require-
ments of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
We recommend using Mopar Antifreeze/
Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km)
Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology)
that meets the requirements of FCA Material
Standard MS.90032.
Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine
coolant that meets the requirements of FCA
Material Standard MS.90032 and distilled
water. Use higher concentrations (not to
exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F
(−37°C) are anticipated. Please contact an
authorized dealer for assistance.
Use only high purity water such as distilled or
deionized water when mixing the water/engine
coolant (antifreeze) solution. The use of lower
quality water will reduce the amount of corro-
sion protection in the engine cooling system.
NOTE:
It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the
proper level of protection against freezing
according to the temperatures occurring in the
area where the vehicle is operated.
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added
to the system, please contact a local autho-
rized dealer.
Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not
recommended and can result in cooling system
damage. If HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in
an emergency, have a authorized dealer drain,
flush, and refill with OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) as soon as possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss
of engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure
that engine coolant (antifreeze) will return to
the radiator from the coolant expansion bottle/
recovery tank if so equipped.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if
there is any accumulation of foreign material on
the sealing surfaces.
WARNING!
Do not open hot engine cooling system.
Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when
the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or
remove the cap to cool an overheated
engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in
the cooling system. To prevent scalding or
injury, do not remove the pressure cap while
the system is hot or under pressure.
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 182
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 183
Disposal Of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze)
is a regulated substance requiring proper
disposal. Check with your local authorities to
determine the disposal rules for your commu-
nity. To prevent ingestion by animals or chil-
dren, do not store ethylene glycol-based coolant
in open containers or allow it to remain in
puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or
pet, seek emergency assistance immediately.
Clean up any ground spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant expansion bottle provides a quick
visual method for determining that the coolant
level is adequate. With the engine off and cold,
the level of the coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle
should be between the “MAX” and “MIN” lines
marked on the bottle.
As long as the engine operating temperature is
satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be
checked once a month.
When additional coolant (antifreeze) is needed
to maintain the proper level, it should be added
to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
See an authorized dealer for service.
Points To Remember
NOTE:
When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor
coming from the front of the engine compart-
ment. This is normally a result of moisture from
rain, snow, or high humidity accumulating on the
radiator and being vaporized when the thermo-
stat opens, allowing hot engine coolant (anti-
freeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment
shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks,
the vehicle may be safely driven. The vapor will
soon dissipate.
Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator
and in the coolant expansion bottle. If engine
coolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, the
contents of the coolant expansion bottle must
also be protected against freezing.
If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) addi-
tions are required, the cooling system should
be pressure tested for leaks.
Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concen-
tration at a minimum of 50% OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032) and distilled water
for proper corrosion protection of your engine
which contains aluminum components.
Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your
vehicle is equipped with air conditioning, keep
the front of the condenser clean.
Do not change the thermostat for Summer or
Winter operation. If replacement is ever neces-
sary, install ONLY the correct type of thermo-
stat. Other designs may result in unsatisfactory
engine coolant (antifreeze) performance, poor
gas mileage, and increased emissions.
Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or
engine damage may result.
WARNING! (Continued)
7
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 183
184 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
Brake System
In order to ensure brake system performance,
all brake system components should be
inspected periodically. Refer to the “Mainte-
nance Plan” in this section for the proper main-
tenance intervals.
Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid in the master cylinder should be
checked when performing under hood services
or immediately if the “Brake Warning Light” is
illuminated.
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder
area before removing the cap. If necessary, add
fluid to bring the fluid level up to the require-
ments described on the brake fluid reservoir.
With disc brakes, fluid level can be expected to
fall as the brake pads wear. Brake fluid level
should be checked when pads are replaced.
However, low fluid level may be caused by a
leak and a checkup may be needed.
Use only manufacturer's recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Tech-
nical Specifications” for further information.
Automatic Transmission
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission
fluid to ensure optimum transmission perfor-
mance and life. Use only the manufacturer's
specified transmission fluid. Refer to “Fluids
And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications”
for fluid specifications. It is important to main-
tain the transmission fluid at the correct level
using the recommended fluid.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure
and possibly a collision. Driving with your
foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can
result in abnormally high brake
temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have
your full braking capacity in an emergency.
WARNING!
Use only manufacturer's recommended
brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants”
in “Technical Specifications” for further infor-
mation. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/
or impair its performance. The proper type of
brake fluid for your vehicle is also identified
on the original factory installed hydraulic
master cylinder reservoir.
To avoid contamination from foreign matter
or moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid
that has been in a tightly closed container.
Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap
secured at all times. Brake fluid in a open
container absorbs moisture from the air
resulting in a lower boiling point. This may
cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or
prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake
failure. This could result in a collision.
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result
in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts,
causing the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake
fluid can also damage painted and vinyl
surfaces, care should be taken to avoid its
contact with these surfaces.
Do not allow petroleum based fluid to
contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal
components could be damaged, causing
partial or complete brake failure. This could
result in a collision.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 184
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 185
NOTE:
No chemical flushes should be used in any
transmission; only the approved lubricant
should be used.
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends
against using any special additives in the
transmission.
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engi-
neered product and its performance may be
impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore,
do not add any fluid additives to the transmis-
sion. The only exception to this policy is the use
of special dyes for diagnosing fluid leaks. Avoid
using transmission sealers as they may
adversely affect seals.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and
does not require adjustment under normal
operating conditions. Routine fluid level
checks are not required; therefore the trans-
mission has no dipstick. An authorized dealer
can check your transmission fluid level using
special service tools. If you notice fluid
leakage or transmission malfunction, visit an
authorized dealer immediately to have the
transmission fluid level checked. Operating
the vehicle with an improper fluid level can
cause severe transmission damage.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid
installed at the factory will provide satisfactory
lubrication for the life of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not
required. However, change the fluid and filter if
the fluid becomes contaminated (with water,
etc.), or if the transmission is disassembled for
any reason.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the
manufacturer’s recommended fluid may
cause deterioration in transmission shift
quality and/or torque converter shudder.
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in
“Technical Specifications” for fluid
specifications.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your
transmission as the chemicals can damage
your transmission components. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an
authorized dealer immediately. Severe
transmission damage may occur. An
authorized dealer has the proper tools to
adjust the fluid level accurately.
7
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 185
186 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
RAISING THE VEHICLE
In the case where it is necessary to raise the
vehicle, go to an authorized dealer or service
station.
TIRES
Tire Safety Information
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the
following information: Tire Markings, Tire Identi-
fication Numbers, Tire Terminology and Defini-
tions, Tire Pressures, and Tire Loading.
Tire Markings
Tire Markings
NOTE:
P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based
on US design standards. P-Metric tires have
the letter “P” molded into the sidewall
preceding the size designation. Example:
P215/65R15 95H.
European — Metric tire sizing is based on Euro-
pean design standards. Tires designed to this
standard have the tire size molded into the
sidewall beginning with the section width. The
letter "P" is absent from this tire size designa-
tion. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on
US design standards. The size designation for
LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric tires
except for the letters “LT” that are molded into
the sidewall preceding the size designation.
Example: LT235/85R16.
1 — US DOT Safety Standards Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and Temperature
Grades
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 186
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 187
Temporary spare tires are designed for tempo-
rary emergency use only. Temporary high pres-
sure compact spare tires have the letter “T” or
“S” molded into the sidewall preceding the size
designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
High flotation tire sizing is based on US design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter
molded into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5
R15 LT.
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The Tire Identification Number (TIN) may be
found on one or both sides of the tire; however,
the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN,
including the date code, located on the white
sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the
outboard side of black sidewall tires as
mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found
on the outboard side, then you will find it on the
inboard side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the US Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
01 means the year 2001
Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031
could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
7
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 187
188 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the
driver's side door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire,
including the spare tire (if equipped), at least
monthly and inflate to the recommended pres-
sure for your vehicle.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door) Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
Term Definition
B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for
a minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per
square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation
pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire
placard.
Tire Placard A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity,
the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 188
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 189
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information
about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in
the vehicle
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front,
rear, and spare tires
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not
exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on
your vehicle. You will not exceed the tire's load
carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading
conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation pres-
sures specified on the Tire and Loading Infor-
mation placard in “Vehicle Loading” in the
“Starting And Operating” section of this manual.
NOTE:
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWR) for the front and
rear axles must not be exceeded.
For further information on GAWR, vehicle loading,
and trailer towing, refer to “Vehicle Loading” in
the “Starting And Operating” section of this
manual.
To determine the maximum loading conditions
of your vehicle, locate the statement “The
combined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the
Tire and Loading Information placard. The
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage
and trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should
never exceed the weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load
Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your
vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kg or
XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the avail-
able amount of cargo and luggage load
capacity. For example, if “XXX” amount
equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five
150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage
load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750
(5x150) = 650 lbs.)
7
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 189
190 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(5) Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be transferred
to your vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the avail-
able cargo and luggage load capacity of
your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg
and there will be five 68 kg passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo and
luggage load capacity is 295 kg (635-340
(5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
NOTE:
If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle.
The following table shows examples on how to
calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing
capacities of your vehicle with varying seating
configurations and number and size of occu-
pants. This table is for illustration purposes
only and may not be accurate for the seating
and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
For the following example, the combined
weight of occupants and cargo should never
exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 190
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 191
7
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 191
192 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tires — General Information
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the
safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle.
Four primary areas are affected by improper tire
pressure:
Safety
Fuel Economy
Tread Wear
Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
Safety Both underinflation and overinflation affect the
stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling
of sluggish response or over responsiveness in
the steering.
NOTE:
Unequal tire pressures from side to side may
cause erratic and unpredictable steering
response.
Unequal tire pressure from side to side may
cause the vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling
resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause
abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life,
resulting in the need for earlier tire replace-
ment.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfort-
able ride. Overinflation produces a jarring and
uncomfortable ride.
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous.
Overloading can cause tire failure, affect
vehicle handling, and increase your stopping
distance. Use tires of the recommended
load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
WARNING!
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and
can cause collisions.
Underinflation increases tire flexing and can
result in overheating and tire failure.
Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to
cushion shock. Objects on the road and
chuckholes can cause damage that result in
tire failure.
Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly,
resulting in loss of vehicle control.
Unequal tire pressures can cause steering
problems. You could lose control of your
vehicle.
Unequal tire pressures from one side of the
vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to
drift to the right or left.
Always drive with each tire inflated to the
recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 192
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 193
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver's side B-Pillar or rear edge of the
driver's side door.
At least once a month:
Check and adjust tire pressure with a good
quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not
make a visual judgement when determining
proper inflation. Tires may look properly
inflated even when they are under-inflated.
Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible
damage.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are
always “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire
inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)
after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The
cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the
tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a
wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire
pressures vary with temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi
(7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature
change. Keep this in mind when checking tire
pressure inside a garage, especially in the
Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C)
and the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then
the cold tire inflation pressure should be
increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi
(7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside
temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13
to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce this
normal pressure build up or your tire pressure
will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe
speeds and within posted speed limits. Where
speed limits or conditions are such that the
vehicle can be driven at high speeds, main-
taining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced
vehicle loading may be required for high-speed
vehicle operation. Refer to an authorized tire
dealer or original equipment vehicle dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
Radial Ply Tires
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire
pressure, always reinstall the valve stem
cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from
entering the valve stem, which could
damage the valve stem.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under
maximum load is dangerous. The added
strain on your tires could cause them to fail.
You could have a serious collision. Do not
drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum
capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of
tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle
to handle poorly. The instability could cause
a collision. Always use radial ply tires in sets
of four. Never combine them with other types
of tires.
7
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 193
194 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be
repaired if it meets the following criteria:
The tire has not been driven on when flat.
The damage is only on the tread section of your
tire (sidewall damage is not repairable).
The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch
(6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs
and additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that
have experienced a loss of pressure, should be
replaced immediately with another Run Flat tire
of identical size and service description (Load
Index and Speed Symbol). Replace the tire pres-
sure sensor as well as it is not designed to be
reused.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive
50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a
rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss
of inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode.
A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation
pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the Run Flat mode it has
limited driving capabilities and needs to be
replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not
repairable. When a Run Flat tire is changed
after driving with underinflated tire condition,
please replace the TPM sensor as it is not
designed to be reused when driven under Run
Flat mode 14 psi (96 kPa) condition.
NOTE:
The TPM Sensor must be replaced after driving
the vehicle on a flat tire condition.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded
at full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in
the run flat mode.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for
more information.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice condi-
tions, do not spin your vehicle's wheels above
30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30
seconds continuously without stopping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “In Case Of
Emergency” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may
cause tire damage or failure. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin
your vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph
(48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds
continuously when you are stuck, and do not
let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter
what the speed.
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 194
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 195
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equip-
ment tires to help you in determining when your
tires should be replaced.
Tire Tread
These indicators are molded into the bottom of
the tread grooves. They will appear as bands
when the tread depth becomes a 1/16 of an
inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced.
Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for
further information.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon
varying factors including, but not limited to:
Driving style
Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pres-
sures can cause uneven wear patterns to
develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life, resulting in
the need for earlier tire replacement
Distance driven
Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of
V or higher, and Summer tires typically have a
reduced tread life. Rotation of these tires per
the vehicle scheduled maintenance is highly
recommended
NOTE:
Wheel valve stem must be replaced as well when
installing new tires due to wear and tear in
existing tires.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with
as little exposure to light as possible. Protect
tires from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance
of many characteristics. They should be
inspected regularly for wear and correct cold
tire inflation pressures. The manufacturer
strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-
lent to the originals in size, quality and perfor-
mance when replacement is needed. Refer to
the paragraph on “Tread Wear Indicators” in
this section. Refer to the Tire and Loading Infor-
mation placard or the Vehicle Certification Label
for the size designation of your tire. The Load
Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be
found on the original equipment tire sidewall.
See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the
“Tire Safety Information” section of this manual
for more information relating to the Load Index
and Speed Symbol of a tire.
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced
after six years, regardless of the remaining
tread. Failure to follow this warning can
result in sudden tire failure. You could lose
control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death.
7
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 195
196 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
It is recommended to replace the two front tires
or two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire
can seriously affect your vehicle’s handling. If
you ever replace a wheel, make sure that the
wheel’s specifications match those of the orig-
inal wheels.
It is recommended you contact an authorized
tire dealer or original equipment dealer with any
questions you may have on tire specifications or
capability. Failure to use equivalent replace-
ment tires may adversely affect the safety,
handling, and ride of your vehicle.
Tire Types
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons
(Spring, Summer, Autumn, and Winter). Traction
levels may vary between different all season
tires. All season tires can be identified by the
M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the tire
sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety
and handling of your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If
Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and
dry conditions, and are not intended to be
driven in snow or on ice. If your vehicle is
equipped with Summer tires, be aware these
tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving
conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle
when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F
(5°C) or if roads are covered with ice or snow.
For more information, contact an authorized
dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season
designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on
the tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only in sets
of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or
speed rating other than that specified for
your vehicle. Some combinations of unap-
proved tires and wheels may change suspen-
sion dimensions and performance
characteristics, resulting in changes to
steering, handling, and braking of your
vehicle. This can cause unpredictable
handling and stress to steering and suspen-
sion components. You could lose control and
have a collision resulting in serious injury or
death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with
load ratings approved for your vehicle.
Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally
equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with a
smaller load index could result in tire over-
loading and failure. You could lose control
and have a collision.
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in
sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a
different size may result in false
speedometer and odometer readings.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice
conditions. You could lose vehicle control,
resulting in severe injury or death. Driving
too fast for conditions also creates the
possibility of loss of vehicle control.
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 196
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 197
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of
snow tires during the Winter. Snow tires can be
identified by a “mountain/snowflake” symbol
on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the orig-
inal equipment tires. Use snow tires
only in sets of four; failure to do so
may adversely affect the safety and handling of
your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings
than what was originally equipped with your
vehicle and should not be operated at
sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h). For
speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to orig-
inal equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on
ice, skid and traction capability on wet or dry
surfaces may be poorer than that of
non-studded tires. Some states prohibit
studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
Spare Tires — If Equipped
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with a Tire Service Kit
instead of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire
Service Kit” in “In Case Of Emergency” for further
information.
Refer to “Towing Requirements - Tires” in
“Starting And Operating” for restrictions when
towing with a spare tire designated for tempo-
rary emergency use.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
And Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire
and wheel equivalent in look and function to the
original equipment tire and wheel found on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle. This spare tire
may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle.
If your vehicle has this option, refer to an autho-
rized tire dealer for the recommended tire rota-
tion pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency
use only. You can identify if your vehicle is
equipped with a compact spare by looking at
the spare tire description on the Tire and
Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of
the tire. Compact spare tire descriptions begin
with the letter “T” or “S” preceding the size
designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)
and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount
a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel,
since the wheel is designed specifically for the
compact spare tire. Do not install more than
one compact spare tire and wheel on the
vehicle at any given time.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance,
do not take your vehicle through an
automatic car wash with a compact or
limited use temporary spare installed.
Damage to the vehicle may result.
7
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 197
198 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped
The collapsible spare is for temporary emer-
gency use only. You can identify if your vehicle is
equipped with a collapsible spare by looking at
the spare tire description on the Tire and
Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of
the tire.
Collapsible spare tire description example:
165/80-17 101P.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)
and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is
properly installed to the vehicle. Inflate the
collapsible tire using the electric air pump
before lowering the vehicle.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount
a conventional tire on the collapsible spare
wheel, since the wheel is designed specifically
for the collapsible spare tire.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire may look like the originally
equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. This spare tire may have
limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use full
size spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is
not the same as your original equipment tire,
replace (or repair) the original equipment tire
and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportu-
nity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary
emergency use only. This tire is identified by
a label located on the limited use spare
wheel. This label contains the driving limita-
tions for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle
of your vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this
limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. Since it is not the same as your orig-
inal equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the
vehicle at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for
temporary emergency use only. With these
spares, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary use spares have
limited tread life. When the tread is worn to
the tread wear indicators, the temporary use
spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to
follow the warnings, which apply to your
spare. Failure to do so could result in spare
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
WARNING!
Compact and Collapsible spares are for
temporary emergency use only. With these
spares, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary use spares have
limited tread life. When the tread is worn to
the tread wear indicators, the temporary use
spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to
follow the warnings, which apply to your
spare. Failure to do so could result in spare
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 198
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 199
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum
and chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned
regularly using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water
to maintain their luster and to prevent corro-
sion. Wash wheels with the same soap solution
recommended for the body of the vehicle and
remember to always wash when the surfaces
are not hot to the touch.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration
caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium
chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other road
chemicals used to melt ice or control dust on
dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild
soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh
chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the
wheel’s protective coating that helps keep them
from corroding and tarnishing.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including
excessive brake dust, care must be taken in the
selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemicals
and equipment to prevent damage to the
wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar
Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is recom-
mended or select a non-abrasive, non-acidic
cleaner for aluminum or chrome wheels.
NOTE:
If you intend on parking or storing your vehicle for
an extended period after cleaning the wheels
with wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply
the brakes to remove the water droplets from the
brake components. This activity will remove the
red rust on the brake rotors and prevent vehicle
vibration when braking.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use
only. Installation of this limited use spare tire
affects vehicle handling. With this tire, do
not drive more than the speed listed on the
limited use spare wheel. Keep inflated to the
cold tire inflation pressures listed on your
Tire and Loading Information Placard
located on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the
rear edge of the driver’s side door. Replace
(or repair) the original equipment tire at the
first opportunity and reinstall it on your
vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss
of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that
use acidic solutions or strong alkaline
additives or harsh brushes. Many
aftermarket wheel cleaners and automatic
car washes may damage the wheel's
protective finish. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar Wheel
Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a
bristle brush, metal polishes or oven cleaner.
These products may damage the wheel's
protective finish. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar Wheel
Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
7
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 199
200 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or
Low Gloss Clear Coat Wheels
Tire Chains and Traction Devices
Use of traction devices require sufficient
tire-to-body clearance. Follow these recommen-
dations to guard against damage.
Traction device must be of proper size for the
tire, as recommended by the traction device
manufacturer.
Install on front tires only.
Due to limited clearance, on a 205/55 R16,
use reduced size snow chains or traction
devices with a maximum projection of 9 mm
beyond the tire profile.
Tire Rotation Recommendations
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle
operate at different loads and perform different
steering, driving, and braking functions. For
these reasons, they wear at unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation
of tires. The benefits of rotation are especially
worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such
as those on all season type tires. Rotation will
increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow
and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these
specialty wheels, DO NOT USE wheel
cleaners, abrasives, or polishing
compounds. They will permanently damage
this finish and such damage is not covered
by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. HAND
WASH ONLY USING MILD SOAP AND WATER
WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular
basis; this is all that is required to maintain
this finish.
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S,
Snow) between front and rear axles can
cause unpredictable handling. You could
lose control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires,
observe the following precautions:
Because of restricted traction device clear-
ance between tires and other suspension
components, it is important that only traction
devices in good condition are used. Broken
devices can cause serious damage. Stop the
vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could
indicate device breakage. Remove the
damaged parts of the device before further
use.
Install device as tightly as possible and then
retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and
large bumps, especially with a loaded
vehicle.
Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry
pavement.
Observe the traction device manufacturer’s
instructions on the method of installation,
operating speed, and conditions for use.
Always use the suggested operating speed of
the device manufacturer’s if it is less than
30 mph (48 km/h).
Do not use traction devices on a compact
spare tire.
CAUTION! (Continued)
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 200
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 201
Refer to the “Scheduled Servicing” in this
section for the proper maintenance intervals.
The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear
should be corrected prior to rotation being
performed.
The suggested rotation method is the “forward
cross” shown in the following diagram. This
rotation pattern does not apply to some direc-
tional tires that must not be reversed.
Tire Rotation (Forward Cross)
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories
were established by the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
The specific grade rating assigned by the
tire's manufacturer in each category is
shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform
to Federal safety requirements in addi-
tion to these grades.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative
rating, based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would
wear one and one-half times as well on
the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to varia-
tions in driving habits, service practices,
and differences in road characteristics
and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades
represent the tire's ability to stop on wet
pavement, as measured under
controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
7
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 201
202 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Temperature Grades
The Temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the tire's
resistance to the generation of heat and
its ability to dissipate heat, when tested
under controlled conditions on a speci-
fied indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause
the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance, which all
passenger vehicle tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A repre-
sent higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel, than the minimum
required by law.
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you will not be using your vehicle for more
than 21 days, you may want to take the
following steps to preserve your battery.
Negative (-) Battery Cable
Disconnect the negative (-) connector from the
battery post and be sure that the battery is fully
charged , press button to detach connector
from negative (-) post.
Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more,
run the air conditioning system at idle for about
five minutes in the fresh air and high blower
setting. This will ensure adequate system lubri-
cation to minimize the possibility of
compressor damage when the system is
started again.
NOTE:
When the vehicle has not been started or driven
for at least 30 days, an Extended Park Start
Procedure is required to start the vehicle. Refer
to “Starting The Engine” in “Starting And Oper-
ating” for further information.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated
and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
under-inflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
1 — Release Button
2 — Negative (-) Cable Connector
3 — Negative (-) Post
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 202
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 203
BODYWORK
Protection From Atmospheric Agents
Vehicle body care requirements vary according
to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals
that make roads passable in snow and ice and
those that are sprayed on trees and road
surfaces during other seasons are highly corro-
sive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside
parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne
contaminants, road surfaces on which the
vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold weather
and other extreme conditions will have an
adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and under-
body protection.
The following maintenance recommendations
will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from
the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or
removal of paint and protective coatings from
your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation
Stone and gravel impact
Insects, tree sap and tar
Salt in the air near seacoast localities
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants
Body And Underbody Maintenance
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights
and fog lights that are lighter and less suscep-
tible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and
therefore different lens cleaning procedures
must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the
lenses and reducing light output, avoid wiping
with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with
a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components,
solvents, steel wool or other aggressive mate-
rial to clean the lenses.
Preserving The Bodywork
Washing
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your
vehicle in the shade using Mopar Car Wash, or
a mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels
completely with clear water.
If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have
accumulated on your vehicle, use Mopar Super
Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove.
Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to
protect your paint finish. Take care never to
scratch the paint.
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power
buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out
the paint finish.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning mate-
rials such as steel wool or scouring powder
that will scratch metal and painted surfaces.
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8,274 kPa) can result in damage or removal
of paint and decals.
7
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 203
204 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Special Care
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you
drive near the ocean, hose off the undercar-
riage at least once a month.
It is important that the drain holes in the lower
edges of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be
kept clear and open.
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the
paint, touch them up immediately. The cost of
such repairs is considered the responsibility of
the owner.
If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or
similar cause that destroys the paint and
protective coating, have your vehicle repaired
as soon as possible. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals,
fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such
materials are well packaged and sealed.
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads,
consider mud or stone shields behind each
wheel.
Use Mopar Touch Up Paint on scratches as
soon as possible. An authorized dealer has
touch up paint to match the color of your
vehicle.
INTERIORS
Seats And Fabric Parts
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric uphol-
stery and carpeting.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chem-
ical solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will
weaken the fabric. Sun damage can also
weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solu-
tion or lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts
from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft
cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn
or if the buckles do not work properly.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning
purposes. Many are potentially flammable,
and if used in closed areas they may cause
respiratory harm.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection.
Inspect the belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or
modify the system. Seat belt assemblies
must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
torn webbing, etc.).
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 204
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 205
Plastic And Coated Parts
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this
vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When
cleaning the lenses, care must be taken to
avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap
solution may be used, but do not use high
alcohol content or abrasive cleaners. If
soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
cloth.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Leather Parts
Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended
for leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved
by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth.
Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive
and damage the leather upholstery and should
be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stub-
born soils can be removed easily with a soft
cloth and Mopar Total Clean. Care should be
taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery
with any liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils,
cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or
ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner
is not required to maintain the original condi-
tion.
NOTE:
If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to
show any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye
transfer more so than darker colors. The leather
is designed for easy cleaning, and FCA recom-
mends Mopar Total Clean leather cleaner applied
on a cloth to clean the leather seats as needed.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a
regular basis with Mopar Glass Cleaner, or any
commercial household-type glass cleaner.
Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution
when cleaning the inside rear window equipped
with electric defrosters or windows equipped
with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or
other sharp instruments that may scratch the
elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray
cleaner on the towel or cloth that you are using.
Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror.
CAUTION!
Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repel-
lents, suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to
the plastic, painted, or decorated surfaces of
the interior may cause permanent damage.
Wipe away immediately.
Damage caused by these type of products
may not be covered by your New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/
or Ketone based cleaning products to clean
leather upholstery, as damage to the
upholstery may result.
7
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 205
206
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
IDENTIFICATION DATA
Vehicle Identification Number
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found
on the left front corner of the instrument panel,
visible through the windshield.
Vehicle Identification Number
NOTE:
It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic
brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic
systems loses normal capability, the remaining
system will still function. However, there will be
some loss of overall braking effectiveness. You
may notice increased pedal travel during appli-
cation, greater pedal force required to slow or
stop, and potential activation of the Brake
Warning Light.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason
(i.e., repeated brake applications with the
engine off) the brakes will still function.
However, the effort required to brake the
vehicle will be much greater than that required
with the power system operating.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to
ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to
the vehicle. Any time a wheel has been removed
and reinstalled on the vehicle, the lug nuts/
bolts should be torqued using a properly cali-
brated torque wrench using a high quality six
sided (hex) deep wall socket.
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 206
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 207
Torque Specifications
**Use only authorized dealer recommended
lug nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or
oil before tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to
mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or
loose particles.
Wheel Mounting Surface
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until
each nut/bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure
that the socket is fully engaged on the lug nut/
bolt (do not insert it halfway).
Torque Patterns
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt
torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are
properly seated against the wheel.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
1.4L Turbo
This engine is designed to meet all
emission regulations, provide satis-
factory fuel economy and perfor-
mance when using high-quality
unleaded “Regular” gasoline having a posted
octane number of 87 as specified by the (R+M)/
2 method. For optimum performance and fuel
economy the use of “Premium” 91 octane gaso-
line or higher is recommended.
Lug Nut/Bolt
Torque
**Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
Lug Nut/Bolt
Socket Size
63 Ft-Lbs
(86 N·m)
Steel Wheels
Only
89 Ft-Lbs
(120 N·m)
Aluminum
Wheels Only
M12 x 1.25 17 mm
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully
until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to
follow this warning may result in personal
injury.
8
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 207
208 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
While operating on gasoline with an octane
number of 87, hearing a light knocking sound
from the engine is not a cause for concern.
However, if the engine is heard making a heavy
knocking sound, see an authorized dealer
immediately. Use of gasoline with an octane
number lower than 87 can cause engine failure
and may void or not be covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you
experience these symptoms, try another brand
of gasoline before considering service for the
vehicle.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of
cleaner burning gasoline referred to as “Refor-
mulated Gasoline”. Reformulated gasoline
contains oxygenates and are specifically
blended to reduce vehicle emissions and
improve air quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recom-
mended. Properly blended reformulated
gasoline will provide improved performance
and durability of engine and fuel system
components.
Materials Added To Fuel
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the
proper octane rating, gasolines that contain
detergents, corrosion and stability additives are
recommended. Using gasolines that have these
additives will help improve fuel economy,
reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle perfor-
mance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gaso-
line contains a higher level of deter-
gents to further aide in minimizing
engine and fuel system deposits.
When available, the usage of TOP TIER Deter-
gent Gasoline is recommended. Visit
www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER Deter-
gent Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning
agents should be avoided. Many of these mate-
rials intended for gum and varnish removal may
contain active solvents or similar ingredients.
These can harm fuel system gasket and
diaphragm materials.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline
with oxygenates such as ethanol.
Problems that result from using gasoline
containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15) or
gasoline containing methanol are not the
responsibility of the manufacturer and may void
or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing
methanol, or gasoline containing more than
15% ethanol (E-15). Use of these blends
may result in starting and drivability
problems, damage critical fuel system
components, cause emissions to exceed the
applicable standard, and/or cause the
Malfunction Indicator Light to illuminate.
Please observe pump labels as they should
clearly communicate if a fuel contains
greater than 15% ethanol (E-15).
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 208
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 209
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible
with gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol
(E-15). Use of gasoline with higher ethanol
content may void the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with
E-85 fuel, the engine will have some or all of
these symptoms:
Operate in a lean mode
OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on
Poor engine performance
Poor cold start and cold drivability
Increased risk for fuel system component
corrosion
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications
Modifications that allow the engine to run on
Compressed Natural Gas (CNG) or Liquid
Propane (LP) may result in damage to the
engine, emissions, and fuel system compo-
nents. Problems that result from running CNG
or LP are not the responsibility of the manufac-
turer and may void or not be covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MMT In Gasoline
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl
(MMT) is a manganese-containing metallic addi-
tive that is blended into some gasoline to
increase octane. Gasoline blended with MMT
provides no performance advantage beyond
gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces
spark plug life and reduces emissions system
performance in some vehicles. The manufac-
turer recommends that gasoline without MMT
be used in your vehicle. The MMT content of
gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline
pump; therefore, you should ask your gasoline
retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT.
MMT is prohibited in Federal and California
reformulated gasoline.
8
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 209
210 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
(Continued)
Fuel System Cautions
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being
assessed against you.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your
vehicle’s performance:
The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by
Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can
impair engine performance and damage the
emissions control system.
An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or igni-
tion malfunctions can cause the catalytic
converter to overheat. If you notice a pungent
burning odor or some light smoke, your
engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning
and may require immediate service. Contact
an authorized dealer for service assistance.
The use of fuel additives, which are now
being sold as octane enhancers, is not
recommended. Most of these products
contain high concentrations of methanol.
Fuel system damage or vehicle performance
problems resulting from the use of such fuels
or additives is not the responsibility of the
manufacturer and may void or not be covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION! (Continued)
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is
deadly. Follow the precautions below to
prevent carbon monoxide poisoning:
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain
carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless
gas, which can kill. Never run the engine in a
closed area, such as a garage, and never sit
in a parked vehicle with the engine running
for an extended period. If the vehicle is
stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust
the ventilation system to force fresh, outside
air into the vehicle.
Guard against carbon monoxide with proper
maintenance. Have the exhaust system
inspected every time the vehicle is raised.
Have any abnormal conditions repaired
promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side
windows fully open.
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 210
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 211
FLUID CAPACITIES
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Engine
US Metric
Fuel (Approximate) 12.7 Gallons 48.1 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
1.4L Turbo Engine 4 Quarts 3.8 Liters
Cooling System
1.4L Turbo Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/
150,000 Mile Formula).
6.1 Quarts 5.8 Liters
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant – 1.4L Turbo Engine We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic
Additive Technology) or equivalent meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS-90032.
Engine Oil – 1.4L Turbo Engine We recommend you use SAE 5W-40 API Certified Synthetic Engine Oil, meeting the
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-12991. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct
SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter – 1.4L Turbo Engine We recommend you use Mopar Engine Oil Filter.
Spark Plugs – 1.4L Turbo Engine We recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs.
Fuel Selection – 1.4L Turbo Engine 91 Octane Recommended – 87 Octane Acceptable (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% Ethanol.
8
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 211
212 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
(Continued)
(Continued)
CAUTION!
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other
than specified Organic Additive Technology
(OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result
in engine damage and may decrease corro-
sion protection. Organic Additive Technology
(OAT) engine coolant is different and should
not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive
Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (anti-
freeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant
(antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant
(antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system
will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled
with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not
use additional rust inhibitors or antirust prod-
ucts, as they may not be compatible with the
radiator engine coolant and may plug the
radiator.
CAUTION! (Continued)
This vehicle has not been designed for use
with propylene glycol-based engine coolant
(antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recom-
mended.
CAUTION! (Continued)
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 212
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 213
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission Use only Mopar AW-1 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent.
Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance
of your transmission.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use Mopar DOT 4. If DOT 4 brake fluid is not
available, then DOT 3 is acceptable.
If using DOT 4 brake fluid, the fluid must be changed every 24 months.
This interval is time based only, mileage intervals do not apply.
8
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 213
214
MULTIMEDIA
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and
may be equipped with both wired and wireless
networks. These networks allow your vehicle to
send and receive information. This information
allows systems and features in your vehicle to
function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain secu-
rity features to reduce the risk of unauthorized
and unlawful access to vehicle systems and
wireless communications. Vehicle software
technology continues to evolve over time and
FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers, evalu-
ates and takes appropriate steps as needed.
Similar to a computer or other devices, your
vehicle may require software updates to
improve the usability and performance of your
systems or to reduce the potential risk of unau-
thorized and unlawful access to your vehicle
systems.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to
your vehicle systems may still exist, even if the
most recent version of vehicle software (such as
Uconnect software) is installed.
NOTE:
FCA US LLC or your dealer may contact you
directly regarding software updates.
To help further improve vehicle security and
minimize the potential risk of a security breach,
vehicle owners should:
Routinely check www.driveucon-
nect.com/support/soft-
ware-update.html (U.S. Residents) or
www.driveuconnect.ca (Canadian Resi-
dents) to learn about available Uconnect
software updates.
Only connect and use trusted media
devices (e.g. personal mobile phones,
USBs, CDs).
Privacy of any wireless and wired communica-
tions cannot be assured. Third parties may
unlawfully intercept information and private
communications without your consent. For
further information, refer to “Onboard Diag-
nostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel”.
WARNING!
It is not possible to know or to predict all of
the possible outcomes if your vehicle’s
systems are breached. It may be possible
that vehicle systems, including safety related
systems, could be impaired or a loss of
vehicle control could occur that may result in
an accident involving serious injury or death.
ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or CD)
into your vehicle if it came from a trusted
source. Media of unknown origin could
possibly contain malicious software, and if
installed in your vehicle, it may increase the
possibility for vehicle systems to be
breached.
As always, if you experience unusual vehicle
behavior, take your vehicle to your nearest
authorized dealer immediately.
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 214
MULTIMEDIA 215
UCONNECT SETTINGS
Uconnect 4/4 NAV Settings
Push the Settings button to display the menu
setting screen. In this mode the Uconnect
system allows you to access programmable
features that may be equipped such as
Language, Display, Units, Voice, Clock & Date,
Safety/ Driving Assistance, Lights, Doors &
Locks, Engine Off Options, Phone, SiriusXM®
Setup, Restore Settings to Default and Clear
Personal Data.
NOTE:
Only one touchscreen area may be selected at
a time.
Depending on the vehicles options, feature
settings may vary.
When making a selection, press the button on
the touchscreen to enter the desired mode.
Once in the desired mode, press and release
the preferred setting until a check-mark
appears next to the setting, showing that setting
has been selected. Once the setting is
complete, either press the back arrow button on
the touchscreen to return to the previous menu,
or press the X button on the touchscreen to
close out of the settings screen. Pressing the Up
or Down Arrow button on the right side of the
screen will allow you to toggle up or down
through the available settings.
9
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 215
216 MULTIMEDIA
Language
After pressing the Language button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Display
After pressing the Display button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Language English Français Español
Setting Name Selectable Options
Display Mode Auto Manual
NOTE:
When Day or Night is selected for the Display Mode, the usage of the Parade Mode feature will cause the radio to activate the Display Brightness Day
control even though the headlights are on.
Display Brightness With Headlights ON + –
Display Brightness With Headlights OFF + –
Units US Metric
AutoShow Smartphone Display Upon
Connection — If Equipped
Touchscreen Beep On Off
Display Trip B On Off
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 216
MULTIMEDIA 217
Units
Units
When in this display, you may select to have the instrument cluster display, odometer, and navigation system changed between US and Metric units of
measure. Press “US,” “Metric” or “Custom.”
Custom
When “Custom” is selected, you may select each unit of measure independently displayed in the instrument cluster display, and navigation system.
Voice
After pressing the Voice button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
US Distance Fuel Consumption Pressure Temperature
Metric Distance Fuel Consumption Pressure Temperature
Custom Distance Fuel Consumption Pressure Temperature
Setting Name Selectable Options
Voice Response Length Brief Detailed
Show Command List Never With Help Always
9
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 217
218 MULTIMEDIA
Clock & Date
After pressing the Clock button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Sync Time With GPS On Off
NOTE:
This feature allows you to automatically have the radio set the time. To change the Sync Time setting, press the Sync Time With GPS button on the touch-
screen.
Set Time Hours + –
NOTE:
This feature allows you to adjust the hours. The Sync Time With GPS button on the touchscreen must be unchecked.
Set Time Minutes + –
NOTE:
This feature allows you to adjust the minutes. The Sync Time With GPS button on the touchscreen must be unchecked.
Time Format 12 hrs 24 hrs
AM PM
Show Time In Status Bar — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
This feature allows you to turn on or shut off the digital clock in the status bar.
Set Date (MM/DD/YY) - +
NOTE:
This feature allows you to set the date, month, and year using the plus and minus buttons.
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 218
MULTIMEDIA 219
Safety & Driving Assistance
After pressing the Safety & Driving Assistance button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
ParkView Backup Camera Active
Guide Lines
On Off
NOTE:
The “ParkView Backup Camera Active Guide Lines” feature overlays the Rear Backup Camera image with active, or dynamic, grid lines to help illustrate
the width of the vehicle and its projected backup path, based on the steering wheel position when the option is checked. A dashed center line overlay
indicates the center of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver.
ParkView Backup Camera Delay On Off
NOTE:
The “ParkView Backup Camera Delay” setting determines whether or not the screen displays the rear view image with dynamic grid lines for up to
10 seconds after the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (R). This delay is canceled if the vehicle’s speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is
shifted into PARK (P), or the ignition is switched to the OFF position.
Park Assist— If Equipped OFF Sound Only Sound & Display
NOTE:
The “Park Assist” system setting scans for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission gear selector is in REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less
than 7 mph (11 km/h), when enabled. It provides an alert (audible and/or visual) to indicate the proximity to other objects. The system can be enabled
with “OFF,” Sound Only,” or “Sound & Display.”
Rear Park Assist Volume— If
Equipped
Low Medium High
9
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 219
220 MULTIMEDIA
Lights
After pressing the Lights button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Doors & Locks
After pressing the Doors & Locks button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Interior Ambient Lights + –
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the brightness of the interior ambient lighting.
Greeting Lights - +
Daytime Running Lights On Off
NOTE:
When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned On or Off. This feature is only available if allowed by law
in the country of the vehicle purchase.
Cornering Lights On Off
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, if the steering wheel rotation angle is large or the turn signal indicators are on, a light (incorporated in the fog light) will turn
on, on the relevant side to improve visibility at night.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Door Locks On Off
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h).
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 220
MULTIMEDIA 221
Engine Off Options
After pressing the Engine Off Options button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Audio
After pressing the Audio button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Radio Off Delay 0 MIN 20 MIN
Setting Name Selectable Options
Balance/Fade Speaker Icon Arrow Buttons
NOTE:
When in this display you may adjust the Balance and Fade settings.
Equalizer + –
NOTE:
When in this display you may adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble settings.
Speed Adjust Volume — If
Equipped
Off 1 2 3
Surround Sound — If
Equipped
On Off
9
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 221
222 MULTIMEDIA
Loudness — If Equipped On Off
AUX Volume Offset — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
The “AUX Volume Offset” feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through the AUX input.
Auto Play On Off
NOTE:
USB devices will automatically play media when AutoPlay is turned On.
Auto-On Radio On Off Recall Last
NOTE:
The Radio automatically turns on when vehicle is in run or will recall whether it was on or off at last ignition off.
Setting Name Selectable Options
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 222
MULTIMEDIA 223
Phone/Bluetooth®
After pressing the Phone/Bluetooth® button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be
used only in safe driving conditions following
all applicable laws. Your attention should be
focused on safely operating the vehicle.
Failure to do so may result in a collision
causing serious injury or death.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Do Not Disturb Do Not Disturb Options
NOTE:
The “Do Not Disturb” feature allows the paired phone to send a predetermined call, text or both, to any incoming call, or text, before sending it directly to
voicemail. It also allows a choice between a Default or Custom auto reply message. In the Customize Auto Reply Message, a customized message can be
typed. It also keeps a counter of all missed calls and texts while on the road.
Paired Phones and Audio Devices Paired Phones and Audio Devices
9
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 223
224 MULTIMEDIA
SiriusXM® Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the SiriusXM® Setup button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Tune Start On Off
NOTE:
The “Tune Start” feature begins playing the current song from the beginning when you tune to a music channel using one of the twelve presets, so you
can enjoy the complete song. This feature occurs the first time the preset is selected during that current song. Tune Start works in the background, so you
will not even realize it's on, except that you will miss the experience of joining your favorite song with only a few seconds left to play.
Channel Skip Channel Skip
NOTE:
SiriusXM® can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude undesirable channels while scanning.
To make your selection, press the Channel Skip button on the touchscreen, and select the channels you would like to skip.
Subscription Information Subscription Info
NOTE:
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM® Satellite Radio with your radio. Following the expiration of the
free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.
1. Press the Subscription Info button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
2. Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the screen or visit the provider
online.
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 224
MULTIMEDIA 225
Restore Settings To Default
After pressing the Restore Settings button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Clear Personal Data
After pressing the Clear Personal Data Settings button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Restore Settings Yes No
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, it will reset Display, Clock, Audio, and Radio Settings to their default.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Clear Personal Data Yes No
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, it will remove personal data including Bluetooth® devices and presets.
9
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 225
226 MULTIMEDIA
SAFETY AND GENERAL INFORMATION
Safety Guidelines
Ensure that all persons read this manual care-
fully before using the system. It contains
instructions on how to use the system in a safe
and effective manner.
Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen.
Doing so can result in damage to the touch-
screen.
Please read and follow these safety precau-
tions. Failure to do so may result in injury or
property damage.
Glance at the screen only when safe to do so. If
prolonged viewing of the screen is required,
park in a safe location and set the parking
brake.
Stop use immediately if a problem occurs.
Failure to do so may cause injury or damage to
the product. Return it to an authorized dealer
for repair.
Ensure the volume level of the system is set to
a level that still allows you to hear outside
traffic and emergency vehicles.
Safe Usage Of The Uconnect System
Read all instructions in this manual carefully
before using your system to ensure proper
usage.
The Uconnect system is a sophisticated elec-
tronic device. Do not let young children use the
system.
Permanent hearing loss may occur if you play
your music or the system at loud volumes. Exer-
cise caution when setting the volume on the
system.
Keep drinks, rain and other sources of mois-
ture away from the system. Besides damage to
the system, moisture can cause electric shocks
as with any electronic device.
NOTE:
Many features of this system are speed depen-
dent. For your own safety, it is not possible to use
some of the touchscreen features while the
vehicle is in motion.
Exposure To Radio Frequency Radiation
The internal wireless radio operates within
guidelines found in radio frequency safety stan-
dards and recommendations, which reflect the
consensus of the scientific community. The
radio manufacturer believes the internal wire-
less radio is safe for use by consumers. The
level of energy emitted is far less than the elec-
tromagnetic energy emitted by wireless devices
such as mobile phones. However, the use of
wireless radios may be restricted in some situa-
tions or environments, such as aboard
airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you
are encouraged to ask for authorization before
turning on the wireless radio.
Care And Maintenance
Touchscreen
Do not press the touchscreen with any hard or
sharp objects (pen, USB stick, jewelry, etc.),
which could scratch the touchscreen surface!
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility
and assume all risks related to the use of
the Uconnect features and applications in
this vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is
safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in
an accident involving serious injury or death.
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 226
MULTIMEDIA 227
Do not spray any liquid or caustic chemicals
directly on the screen! Use a clean and dry
microfiber lens cleaning cloth in order to clean
the touchscreen.
If necessary, use a lint-free cloth dampened
with a cleaning solution, such as isopropyl
alcohol or an isopropyl alcohol and water solu-
tion ratio of 50:50. Be sure to follow the solvent
manufacturer's precautions and directions.
UCONNECT 4/4 NAV WITH 7-INCH
DISPLAY
Introduction
Uconnect 4/4 NAV With 7-Inch Display
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration
purposes only and may not reflect exact software
for your vehicle.
1.
Radio
Press the Radio button on the touchscreen
to enter Radio Mode. The different tuner
modes; AM, FM, and SXM can be selected
by pressing the corresponding buttons on
the touchscreens in Radio Mode.
2. Media
Press the Media button on the touch-
screen to access media sources such as:
USB Device, AUX, and Bluetooth® as long
as the requested media is present.
3. Phone
Press the Phone button on the touch-
screen to access the Uconnect Phone fea-
ture.
4. Uconnect
Press the Uconnect button on the touch-
screen to access applications for your
Uconnect System.
5. Nav
Press the Nav button on the touchscreen
to set a navigation route and/or alter the
navigation settings.
6. Settings
Press the Settings button on the touch-
screen to access the Uconnect Settings
menu.
7. Trip
Press the Trip button on the display to view
the car’s trip information. This function is
composed of the “Instant info” items
(“Range” and “Current fuel consumption”)
and the two separate trips called “Trip A”
and “Trip B” for monitoring the vehicle’s
“complete journey” in a reciprocally inde-
pendent manner.
9
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 227
228 MULTIMEDIA
Drag & Drop Menu Bar
The Uconnect features and services in the main
menu bar are easily changed for your conve-
nience. Simply follow these steps:
Uconnect 4/4 NAV Main Menu
1. Press the Uconnect button to open the
App screen.
2. Press and hold, then drag the selected App
to replace an existing shortcut in the main
menu bar.
The new App shortcut, that was dragged
down onto the main menu bar, will now be
an active App/shortcut.
NOTE:
This feature is only available if the vehicle is in
PARK (P).
Radio Mode
Radio Controls
Radio Operation
The radio is equipped with the following modes:
AM
FM
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio (if equipped)
Press the Radio button on the touchscreen,
bottom left corner, to enter the Radio Mode. The
different tuner modes; AM, FM, and SXM, can
then be selected by pressing the corresponding
buttons in the Radio mode.
Volume/Power Control
Push the Volume/Power control knob to turn off
the screen and mute the radio. Push the
Volume/Power control knob a second time to
turn the screen back on and unmute the radio.
The electronic volume control turns continu-
ously (360 degrees) in either direction, without
stopping. Turning the Volume/Power control
knob clockwise increases the volume, and
counterclockwise decreases it.
Tune/Scroll Control
When the audio system is turned on, the sound
will be set at the same volume level as last
played.
Turn the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob clock-
wise to increase or counterclockwise to
decrease the radio station frequency. Push the
Enter/Browse button to choose a selection.
Screen Close
The X button on the touchscreen at the top right,
provides a means to close the Direct Tune
Screen. The Direct Tune Screen also auto
closes if no activity occurs within a few seconds.
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 228
MULTIMEDIA 229
Seek And Direct Tune Functions
The Seek Up and Down functions are activated
by pressing the double arrow buttons on the
touchscreen to the right and left of the radio
station display, or by pressing the left “Steering
Wheel Audio Control” (if equipped) up or down.
Seek Up
Press and release the Seek Up button on the
touchscreen to tune the radio to the next listen-
able station or channel. During a Seek Up func-
tion, if the radio reaches the starting station
after passing through the entire band two times,
the radio will stop at the station where it began.
Fast Seek Up
Press and hold the Seek Up button on the
touchscreen to advance the radio through the
available stations or channels at a faster rate,
the radio stops at the next available station or
channel when the button on the touchscreen is
released.
Seek Down
Press and release the Seek Down button on
the touchscreen to tune the radio to the next
listenable station or channel. During a Seek
Down function, if the radio reaches the starting
station after passing through the entire band
two times, the radio will stop at the station
where it began.
Fast Seek Down
Press and hold the Seek Down button on the
touchscreen to advance the radio through the
available stations or channel at a faster rate,
the radio stops at the next available station or
channel when the button on the touchscreen is
released.
Direct Tune
Press the Tune button on the touchscreen
located at the bottom of the radio screen. The
Direct Tune button on the touchscreen is avail-
able in AM, FM, and SXM. Radio modes can be
used to direct tune the radio to a desired station
or channel.
Press the available number button on the
touchscreen to begin selecting a desired
station. Once a number has been entered, any
numbers that are no longer possible (stations
that cannot be reached) will become deacti-
vated/grayed out.
Undo
You can backspace an entry by pressing the
bottom left on the touchscreen.
OK
Once the last digit of a station has been
entered, press the OK button and the Direct
Tune screen will close and the system will auto-
matically tune to that station.
The selected Station or Channel number is
displayed in the Direct Tune text box.
Setting The Presets
The Presets are available for all Radio Modes,
and are activated by pressing any of the six
Preset buttons on the touchscreen, located at
the top of the screen.
When you are receiving a station that you wish
to commit into memory, press and hold the
desired numbered button on the touchscreen
for more than two seconds or until you hear a
confirmation beep.
The Radio stores up to 12 presets in each of the
Radio modes. A set of six presets are visible at
the top of the radio screen.
9
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 229
230 MULTIMEDIA
You can switch between the two radio presets
by pressing the arrow button located in the
upper right of the radio touchscreen.
Browse In AM/FM
When in either AM or FM, the Browse Screen
provides a means to edit the Presets List and is
entered by pushing the ENTER/BROWSE
button.
Scrolling Preset List
Once in the Browse Presets screen, you can
scroll the preset list by rotation of the TUNE/
SCROLL knob, or by pressing the “Up and
Down” arrow keys, located on the right of the
screen.
Preset Selection From List
A Preset can be selected by pressing any of the
listed Presets, or by pushing the ENTER/
BROWSE button on the TUNE/SCROLL knob to
select the currently highlighted Preset.
When selected, the radio tunes to the station
stored in the Preset and returns to the main
radio screen.
Deleting Presets
A Preset can be deleted in the Presets Browse
screen by pressing the trash can icon for the
corresponding Preset.
Return To Main Radio Screen
You can return to the Main Radio Screen, by
pressing the X button on the touchscreen when
in the Browse Presets screen.
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio Mode — If
Equipped
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio uses direct satel-
lite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to
provide clear, coast to coast radio content. Siri-
usXM® is a subscription based service.
SiriusXM® All Access Package
All satellite radio equipped vehicles come with a
one year trial to the SiriusXM® All Access
package, providing over 160 channels of the
best programming for all the places life takes
you.
In your vehicle — You’ll get every channel avail-
able on your radio, including all the premium
programming like Howard Stern, every NFL®
game, every MLB® game, every NASCAR®
race, Oprah Radio, and more.
On the go — With a SiriusXM® Internet Radio
subscription included with the All Access trial,
you’ll get SiriusXM® on your computer, smart-
phone, or tablet. Including:
A huge On Demand catalog
Xtra Channels featuring SiriusXM®
Latino – a collection of
Spanish-language channels
MySXM – allowing you to personalize
your favorite music channels
Go to siriusxm.com/getallaccess for more infor-
mation
SiriusXM® services require subscriptions, sold
separately after the 12-month trial included
with the new vehicle purchase. If you decide to
continue your service at the end of your trial
subscription, the plan you choose will automat-
ically renew and bill at then-current rates until
you call SiriusXM® at 866-635-2349 to cancel.
See SiriusXM® Customer Agreement for
complete terms at www.siriusxm.com. All fees
and programming subject to change. Our satel-
lite service is available only to those at least 18
years and older in the 48 contiguous USA and
D.C. Our SiriusXM® satellite service is also
available in PR (with coverage limitations). Our
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 230
MULTIMEDIA 231
Internet radio service is available throughout
our satellite service area and in AK. © 2019 Siri-
usXM® Radio Inc. SiriusXM® and all related
marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM®
Radio Inc. Service available in Canada; see
www.siriusxm.ca.
This functionality is only available for radios
equipped with a Satellite receiver. In order to
receive satellite radio, the vehicle needs to be
outside with a clear view to the sky.
If the screen shows Acquiring Signal, you might
have to change the vehicle’s position in order to
receive a signal. In most cases, the satellite
radio does not receive a signal in underground
parking garages or tunnels.
No Subscription
Radios equipped with a Satellite receiver,
require a subscription to the SiriusXM® Service.
When the Radio does not have the necessary
subscription, the Radio is able to receive the
Pre-View channel only.
Acquiring SiriusXM® Subscription
To activate the SiriusXM® Satellite Radio
subscription, US residents call:
1-800-643-2112
Canadian residents call: 1-877-438-9677
NOTE:
You will need to provide the SiriusXM® ID (RID)
located at the bottom of the Channel 0 screen.
The Satellite Mode is activated by a press of the
SXM button on the touchscreen.
When in Satellite mode:
The SXM button on the touchscreen is high-
lighted.
The SiriusXM® Presets are displayed at the top
of the screen.
The Genre is displayed below the Presets Bar.
The SiriusXM® Channel Number is displayed in
the center.
The Program Information is displayed at the
bottom of the Channel Number.
The SiriusXM® function buttons are displayed
below the Program Information.
Tuning is done by operating the Tune Knob or by
Direct Tune, similar to other Radio Bands. Refer
to Presets, Browse, Tune Knob, and Direct
Tune.
In addition to the tuning Operation functions
common to all Radio modes, the replay, Traffic/
Weather Jump, and Fav button functions are
available in SiriusXM® Mode.
Replay
The replay function provides a means to store
and replay up to 22 minutes of music audio and
48 minutes of talk radio. Once the channel is
switched, content in replay memory is lost.
Press the Replay button on the touchscreen.
The play/pause, rewind/forward and live
buttons will display at the top of the screen,
along with the replay time.
You can exit by pressing the Replay button on
the touchscreen, any time during the Replay
mode.
Play/Pause
Press the Pause/Play button on the touch-
screen to pause the playing of live or rewound
content at any time. Play can be resumed again
by pressing of the Pause/Play button on the
touchscreen.
9
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 231
232 MULTIMEDIA
Rewind
Press the RW button on the touchscreen to
rewind the content in steps of five seconds.
Pressing the RW button on the touchscreen for
more than two seconds rewinds the content.
The Radio begins playing the content at the
point at which the press is released.
Forward
Each press of the FW button on the touchscreen
forwards the content in steps of five seconds.
Forwarding of the content can only be done
when the content is previously rewound, and
therefore, can not be done for live content. A
continuous press of the FW button on the touch-
screen also forwards the content. The Radio
begins playing the content at the point at which
the press is release.
Live
Press the Live button on the touchscreen to
resume playing of Live content.
Favorites
Press the Fav. button on the touchscreen to
activate the favorites menu, which will time out
in five seconds in absence of user interaction.
You can exit the Favorites Menu by a press of
the X in the top right corner.
The favorites feature enables you to set a
favorite artist, or song that is currently playing.
The Radio then uses this information to alert
you when either the favorite song, or favorite
artist are being played at any time by any of the
SiriusXM® Channels.
The maximum number of favorites that can be
stored in the Radio is 50.
Fav. Artist: While the song is playing to set a
Favorite Artist, press the Fav. button on the
touchscreen and then the Fav. Artist button on
the touchscreen.
Fav. Song: While the song is playing to set a
Favorite Song, press the Fav. button on the
touchscreen and then the Fav Song button on
the touchscreen.
Browse In SXM
Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to
edit Presets, Favorites, Game Zone, and Jump
settings, along with providing the SiriusXM®
Channel List.
This Screen contains many sub menus. You can
exit a sub menu to return to a parent menu by
pressing the back arrow.
All
Press the All button at the left of the Browse
Screen.
Channel List
Press the Channel List, or Genre, to display all
the SiriusXM® Channel Numbers. You can
scroll the Channel list by pressing the up and
down arrows, located on the right side of the
screen. Scrolling can also be done by operating
the TUNE/SCROLL knob.
Genre
Press the Genre button on the touchscreen to
display a list of Genres. You can select any
desired Genre by pressing the “Genre” list, the
Radio tunes to a channel with the content in the
selected Genre.
Presets
Press the Presets button located at the left of
the Browse screen.
You can scroll the Presets list pressing the up
and down arrows located at the right side of the
screen. Scrolling can also be done by operating
the TUNE/SCROLL knob as well.
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 232
MULTIMEDIA 233
Preset Selection
A Preset can be selected by pressing any of the
listed “Presets”, or by pushing the ENTER/
BROWSE button on the TUNE/SCROLL knob to
select the currently highlighted Preset. When
selected, the Radio tunes to the station stored
in the Preset, and returns to the main Radio
screen.
Deleting A Preset
A Preset can be deleted in the Presets Browse
screen by pressing the trash can Icon for the
corresponding Preset.
Favorites
Press the Favorites button located at the left of
the Browse screen.
The Favorites menu provides a means to Edit
the Favorites list and to configure the Alert
Settings, along with providing a list of Channels
currently airing any of the items in the Favorites
list.
You can scroll the Favorites list by pressing the
up and down arrows located at the right side of
the screen. Scrolling can also be done by oper-
ating the TUNE/SCROLL knob as well.
Remove Favorites
Press the Remove Favorites tab at the top of the
screen. Press the Delete All button on the touch-
screen to delete all of the Favorites or press the
trash can icon next to the Favorite to be deleted.
Alert Settings
Press the Alert Setting tab at the top of the
screen. The Alert Settings menu allows you to
choose from a Visual alert or Audible and Visual
alert when one of your favorites is airing on any
of the SiriusXM® channels.
Game Zone
Press the Game Zone button, located at the left
of the Browse screen. This feature provides you
with the ability to select teams, edit the selec-
tion, and set alerts.
On Air
Press the On-Air tab at the top of the screen. The
On-Air list provides a list of Channels currently
airing any of the items in the Selections list, and
pressing any of the items in the list tunes the
radio to that channel.
Select Teams
Press the Select Teams button on the touch-
screen to activate the League Scroll list. Press
the chosen league and a scroll list of all teams
within the league will appear, then you can
select a team by pressing the corresponding
box. A check mark appears for all teams that
are chosen.
Remove Selection
Press the Remove Selection tab at the top of the
screen. Press the Delete All button on the touch-
screen to delete all of the Selections or press
the trash can icon next to the Selection to be
deleted.
Alert Settings
Press the Alert Setting tab at the top of the
screen. The Alert Settings menu allows you to
choose from “Alert me to on-air games upon
start” or “Alert upon score update” or both when
one or more of your selections is airing on any
of the SiriusXM® channels.
Featured
Press the Featured button, located on the left of
the Browse screen. This feature provides a list
of your favorited stations.
9
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 233
234 MULTIMEDIA
Audio Settings
Press the Audio button on the Satellite Radio
main menu, or within the Settings main menu,
to activate the Audio settings screen to adjust
Balance & Fade, Equalizer, Speed Adjusted
Volume, Loudness, AUX Volume Offset, Auto
Play, and Auto on radio.
You can return to the Radio screen by pressing
the X located at the top right.
Balance & Fade
Balance & Fade
Press the Balance & Fade button on the touch-
screen to Balance audio between the front
speakers or fade the audio between the rear
and front speakers.
Pressing the Front, Rear, Left, or Right buttons
or press and drag the red Speaker Icon to adjust
the Balance/Fade.
Equalizer — If Equipped
Equalizer
Press the Equalizer button on the touchscreen
to activate the Equalizer screen.
Press the + or – buttons, or by pressing and
dragging over the level bar for each of the equal-
izer bands. The level value, which spans
between plus or minus nine, is displayed at the
bottom of each of the Bands.
AUX Volume Offset
Press the AUX Volume Offset button on the
touchscreen to activate the AUX Volume Offset
screen.
The AUX Volume Offset is adjusted by pressing
of the + and – buttons. This alters the AUX input
audio volume. The level value, which spans
between plus or minus three, is displayed above
the adjustment bar.
Speed Adjusted Volume
Press the Speed Adjusted Volume button on the
touchscreen to activate the Speed Adjusted
Volume screen.
The Speed Adjusted Volume is adjusted by
selecting from “Off,” “1,” “2” or “3.” This alters
the automatic adjustment of the audio volume
with variation to vehicle speed. Volume
increases automatically as speed increases to
compensate for normal road noise.
Auto Play
Auto Play
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 234
MULTIMEDIA 235
Press the Auto Play button on the touchscreen
to activate the Auto Play screen.
The Auto Play feature has two settings “On” and
“Off.” With Auto Play on, music will begin to play
from a connected device, immediately after it is
connect to the radio.
Auto On Radio
Auto On Radio
Press the Auto On Radio button on the touch-
screen to activate the Auto On Radio screen.
The Auto On Radio feature, when activated,
turns the radio on automatically when the
vehicle is in RUN, or will recall whether it was on
or off at last ignition cycle, if option is selected.
Media Mode
USB/iPod® Mode
Overview
USB/iPod® Mode is entered by either inserting
a USB device or iPod® with cable into the USB
Port or by pressing the Select Source button on
the left side of the display, and then selecting
USB 1, or USB 2 (if equipped).
Seek Up /Seek Down
Press and release the Seek Up button on the
touchscreen for the next selection on the USB
device/iPod®. Press and release the Seek
Down button on the touchscreen to return to
the beginning of the current selection, or to
return to the beginning of the previous selection
if the USB device/iPod® is within the first three
seconds of the current selection.
Browse
Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to
display the browse window. The left side of the
browse window displays a list of ways you can
browse through the contents of the USB device/
iPod®. If supported by the device, you can
browse by Folders, Artists, Playlists, Albums,
Songs, etc. Press the desired button on the left
side of the screen. The center of the browse
window shows items and it’s sub-functions,
which can be scrolled by pressing the Up and
Down buttons to the right. The Tune/Scroll knob
can also be used to scroll.
Media Mode
Press the Media button on the touchscreen to
select the desired audio source: USB.
Repeat
Press the Repeat button on the touchscreen to
toggle the repeat functionality. The Repeat
button on the touchscreen is highlighted when
active. The Radio will continue to play the
current track, repeatedly, as long as the repeat
is active. Press the Repeat button on the touch-
screen a second time to turn this feature off.
Shuffle
Press the Shuffle button on the touchscreen to
play the selections on the USB/iPod® device in
random order to provide an interesting change
of pace. Press the Shuffle button on the touch-
screen a second time to turn this feature off.
9
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 235
236 MULTIMEDIA
Info
Press the Info button on the touchscreen to
display the current track information. Press the
Info button on the touchscreen a second time to
cancel this feature.
Tracks
Press the Tracks button on the touchscreen to
display a pop up with the Song List. The
currently playing song is indicated by an arrow
and lines above and below the song title. When
in the Tracks List screen you can rotate the
Tune/Scroll knob to highlight a track (indicated
by the line above and below the track name)
and then push the Enter/Browse knob to start
playing that track.
Pressing the Tracks button on the touchscreen
while the pop up is displayed will close the pop
up.
Audio
Refer to Radio Mode in this section for adjusting
the audio settings.
AUX Mode
Overview
AUX (Auxiliary Mode) is entered by inserting an
AUX device using a cable with a 3.5 mm audio
jack into the AUX port or by pressing the AUX
button on the left side of the display.
Inserting Auxiliary Device
Gently insert the Auxiliary device cable into the
AUX Port. If you insert an Auxiliary device with
the ignition ON and the radio ON, the unit will
switch to AUX mode and begin to play when you
insert the device cable if the device is already
playing.
Controlling The Auxiliary Device
The control of the auxiliary device (e.g.,
selecting playlists, play, fast forward, etc.)
cannot be provided by the radio; use the device
controls instead. Adjust the volume with the
Volume/Mute rotary knob, or with the volume of
the attached device.
NOTE:
The radio unit is acting as the amplifier for audio
output from the Auxiliary device. Therefore if the
volume control on the Auxiliary device is set too
low, there will be insufficient audio signal for the
radio unit to play the music on the device.
Media Mode
Press the Media button on the touchscreen to
select the desired audio source: AUX.
Audio
Refer to Radio Mode in this section for adjusting
the audio settings.
Bluetooth® Mode
Overview
Bluetooth® Streaming Audio (BTSA) or Blue-
tooth® Mode is entered by pairing a Bluetooth®
device, containing music, to the Uconnect
System.
Before proceeding, the Bluetooth® device must
be paired to the Uconnect Phone to communi-
cate with the Uconnect System.
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 236
MULTIMEDIA 237
NOTE:
See the pairing procedure in the Uconnect Phone
section for more details.
To access Bluetooth® mode, press the Select
Source button on the left side of the display,
and then select Bluetooth®.
Select Source
Seek Up /Down
Press and release the Right Arrow button on
the touchscreen for the next selection on the
Bluetooth® device. Press and release the Left
Arrow button on the touchscreen to return to
the beginning of the current selection, or return
to the beginning of the previous selection if the
Bluetooth® device is within the first second of
the current selection.
Media Mode
Press the Media button on the touchscreen to
select the desired audio source: Bluetooth®.
Tracks
If the Bluetooth® device supports this feature,
press the Tracks button on the touchscreen to
display a pop up with the Song List. The
currently playing song is indicated by a red
arrow and lines above and below the song title.
Pressing the Tracks button on the touchscreen
while the pop up is displayed will close the pop
up.
Audio
Refer to Radio Mode in this section for adjusting
the audio settings for further information.
Android Auto™
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile phone manufacturer. Some Android
Auto™ features may or may not be available in
every region and/or language.
Android Auto™ is a feature of your Uconnect
system, and your Android™ 5.0 (Lollipop), or
higher, powered smartphone with a data plan,
that allows you to project your smartphone and
a number of its apps onto the touchscreen radio
display. Android Auto™ automatically brings you
useful information, and organizes it into simple
cards that appear just when they are needed.
Android Auto™ can be used with Google's
best-in-class speech technology, the steering
wheel controls, the knobs and buttons on your
radio faceplate, and the radio display’s touch-
screen to control many of your apps. To use
Android Auto™ follow the following procedure:
1. Download the Android Auto™ app from the
Google Play store on your
Android™-powered smartphone.
2. Connect your Android™ powered smart-
phone to one of the media USB ports in
your vehicle. If the Android Auto™ app was
not downloaded, the first time you plug
your device in, the app will begin to down-
load.
9
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 237
238 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
Be sure to use the factory-provided USB cable
that came with your phone, as aftermarket
cables may not work.
Android Auto™
Once Android Auto™ is up and running on your
Uconnect system, the following features can be
utilized using your smartphone’s data plan:
Google Maps™ for navigation
Google Play Music, Spotify, iHeart Radio, etc.
for music
Handsfree Calling, and Texting for communica-
tion
Hundreds of compatible apps
NOTE:
To use Android Auto™, make sure you are in an
area with cellular coverage. Android Auto™ may
use cellular data and your cellular coverage is
shown in the upper right corner of the radio
screen.
Signal Strength
NOTE:
Requires compatible smartphone running
Android™ 5.0 (Lollipop) or higher and download
app on Google Play. Android™, Android Auto™
and Google Play are trademarks of Google Inc.
Android Auto™ Maps
Push and hold the VR button on the steering
wheel or tap the microphone icon to ask Google
to take you to a desired destination by voice.
You can also touch the Navigation icon in
Android Auto™ to access Google Maps™.
NOTE:
If the Voice Recognition button is not held, and is
only pushed, the built-in Uconnect VR will prompt
you and any navigation command said to launch
the built-in Uconnect navigation system.
While using Android Auto™, Google Maps™
provides voice-guided information for:
Navigation
Live traffic information
Lane guidance
Android Auto™ Maps
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 238
MULTIMEDIA 239
NOTE:
If you are using the built-in Uconnect navigation
system, and you try and start a new route using
the Android Auto™, via voice or any other method,
a pop-up will appear asking if you would like to
switch from Uconnect navigation to smartphone
navigation. A pop-up will also appear, asking if
you’d like to switch, if Android Auto™ is currently
in use and you attempt to launch a built-in
Uconnect route. Selecting “Yes” will switch the
navigation type to the newly used method of navi-
gation and a route will be planned for the new
destination. If “No” is selected the navigation
type will remain unchanged.
Swapping Navigation
For further information, refer to
www.android.com/auto/.
For further information on the navigation func-
tion, please refer to https://
support.google.com/android or https://
support.google.com/androidauto/.
Android Auto™ Music
Android Auto™ allows you to access and stream
your favorite music with apps like Google Play
Music, iHeartRadio, and Spotify. Using your
smartphone’s data plan, you can stream
endless music on the road.
NOTE:
Music apps, playlists, and stations must be set
up on your smartphone prior to using Android
Auto™, for them to work with Android Auto™.
Android Auto™ Music
NOTE:
To see the metadata for the music playing
through Android Auto™, select the Uconnect
System’s media screen.
For further information refer to https://
support.google.com/androidauto.
9
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 239
240 MULTIMEDIA
Android Auto™ Communication
With Android Auto™ connected, press and hold
the Voice Recognition button on the steering
wheel to activate voice recognition specific to
the Android Auto™. This will allow you to send
and reply to text messages, have incoming text
messages read out loud, and place and receive
hands-free calls.
Contact List
Call In Progress
Android Auto™ Apps
The Android Auto™ App will display all the
compatible apps that are available to use with
Android Auto™, every time it is launched. You
must have the compatible app downloaded,
and you must be signed into the app for it to
work with Android Auto™. Refer to g.co/android-
auto to see the latest list of available apps for
Android Auto™.
Apple CarPlay® Integration
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile phone manufacturer. Some Apple
CarPlay® features may or may not be available in
every region and/or language.
Uconnect works seamlessly with Apple
CarPlay®, the smarter, more secure way to use
your iPhone® in the car, and stay focused on
the road. Use your Uconnect Touchscreen
display, the vehicle's knobs and controls, and
your voice with Siri to get access to Apple
Music®, Maps, Messages, and more.
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 240
MULTIMEDIA 241
To use Apple CarPlay®, make sure you are
using iPhone® 5 or later, have Siri enabled in
Settings, ensure your iPhone® is unlocked for
the very first connection only, and then use the
following procedure:
1. Connect your iPhone® to one of the media
USB ports in your vehicle.
NOTE:
Be sure to use the factory-provided Lightning
cable that came with your phone, as aftermarket
cables may not work.
Apple CarPlay®
Once Apple CarPlay® is up and running on your
Uconnect system, the following features can be
utilized using your iPhone’s® data plan:
Phone
Music
Maps
Messages
NOTE:
To use Apple CarPlay® make sure that cellular
data is turned on, and that you are in an area with
cellular coverage. Your data and cellular
coverage is shown on the left side of the radio
screen.
Signal Strength
NOTE:
Requires compatible iPhone®. See dealer for
phone compatibility. Data plan rates apply.
Vehicle user interface is a product of Apple®.
Apple CarPlay® is a trademark of Apple® Inc.
iPhone® is a trademark of Apple® Inc., regis-
tered in the US and other countries. Apple®
terms of use and privacy statements apply.
9
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 241
242 MULTIMEDIA
Apple CarPlay® Phone
With Apple CarPlay®, push and hold
the Voice Recognition button on the
steering wheel to activate a Siri voice
recognition session. You can also
push and hold the Home button within Apple
CarPlay® to start talking to Siri. This allows you
to make calls or listen to voice mail as you
normally would using Siri on your iPhone®.
NOTE:
Only temporarily pushing the Voice Recognition
button on the steering wheel launches a built-in
VR session, not a Siri session, and it will not func-
tion with Apple CarPlay®.
Apple CarPlay® Music
Apple CarPlay® allows you to access
all your artists, playlists, and music
from iTunes®. Using your iPhone’s®
data plan, you can also use select
third party audio apps including music, news,
sports, podcasts and more.
Apple CarPlay® Music
Apple CarPlay® Messages
Apple CarPlay® also allows you to use
Siri to send or reply to text messages.
Siri can also read incoming text
messages, but driver’s will not be able
to read messages, as everything is done via
voice.
Apple CarPlay® Maps
To use your Apple® Maps for naviga-
tion on your Uconnect system, launch
Apple CarPlay®, and push and hold
the Voice Recognition button on the
steering wheel to use Siri to set your desired
destination. Alternatively, choose a Nearby
destination by pressing Destinations and
selecting a category, by launching Siri from the
destinations page, or even by typing in a desti-
nation.
Apple CarPlay® Maps
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 242
MULTIMEDIA 243
NOTE:
If the Voice Recognition button is not held, and
is only pushed, the built-in Uconnect VR will
prompt you and any navigation command said
will launch the built-in Uconnect navigation
system.
If you are using the built-in Uconnect navigation
system, and you try and start a new route using
Apple CarPlay®, via voice or any other method,
a pop-up will appear asking if you would like to
switch from Uconnect navigation to iPhone®
navigation. A pop-up will also appear, asking if
you’d like to switch, if an Apple CarPlay® navi-
gation is currently in use and you attempt to
launch a built-in Uconnect route. Selecting
“Yes” will switch the navigation type to the
newly used method of navigation and a route
will be planned for the new destination. If “No”
is selected the navigation type will remain
unchanged.
Navigation Swap
Apple CarPlay® Apps
To use a compatible app with Apple CarPlay®,
you must have the compatible app downloaded,
and you must be signed into the app.
Refer to http://www.apple.com/ios/carplay/
(US Residents) or https://www.apple.com/ca/
ios/carplay/ (Canadian Residents) to see the
latest list of available apps for Apple CarPlay®.
Android Auto™ And Apple CarPlay® Tips And
Trick
AutoPlay
AutoPlay is a feature of the Uconnect system
that automatically begins playing music off of
the connected device, as soon as it is
connected. This feature can be turned on or off
in the Uconnect Settings, within the Audio
Settings category. It’s default setting is on.
NOTE:
AutoPlay is not supported by Android Auto™.
AutoShow
AutoShow is a feature of the Uconnect system
that automatically launches and displays
Android Auto™/Apple CarPlay® when the
phone is initially connected to the USB media
port. This feature can be turned on and off in
the Uconnect Settings, within the Display
Settings category. The default setting is on.
9
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 243
244 MULTIMEDIA
Android Auto™ Automatic Bluetooth® Pairing
After connecting to Android Auto™ for the first
time and undergoing the setup procedure, the
smartphone will automatically pair to the
Uconnect system via Bluetooth® without any
setup required every time it is within range, if
Bluetooth® is turned on.
NOTE:
Android Auto™ features cannot be used with
Bluetooth®, a USB connection is required for its
use. Android Auto™ uses both Bluetooth® and
USB connections to function, and the connected
device will be unavailable to other devices when
connected using Android Auto™.
Multiple Devices Connecting To The Uconnect
System
It is possible to have multiple devices
connected to the Uconnect system. For
example, if using Android Auto™/Apple
CarPlay®, the connected device will be the one
that will be used to place hands-free phone calls
or send hands-free text messages. However,
another device can also be paired to the
Uconnect system, via Bluetooth®, as an audio
source, so the passenger can stream music.
NOTE:
If using a Samsung device, every time it is
connected to a media USB, and there is
another device plugged in, you will need to
manually change the configuration of the USB
connection in order for the Samsung device to
send data.
The Uconnect 4 built-in media functions will be
unavailable when Android Auto™/Apple
CarPlay® are in use.
Phone Mode
Overview
Uconnect 4 Phone Menu
Uconnect Phone is a voice-activated,
hands-free, in-vehicle communications system.
Uconnect Phone allows you to dial a phone
number with your mobile phone.
1 — Currently Paired Mobile Phone
2 — Siri
3 — Mute Microphone
4 — Transfer To/From Uconnect System
5 — Conference Call*
6 — Phone Settings
7 — Text Messaging**
8 — Direct Dial Pad
9 — Recent Call Log
10 — Browse Phone Book Entries
11 — End Call
12 — Call/Redial/Hold
13 — Favorite Contacts
14 — Mobile Phone Battery Life
15 — Do Not Disturb
16 — Reply with Text Message
* — Conference Call feature only available on GSM
mobile devices
** — Text messaging feature not available on all mo-
bile phones (requires Bluetooth® Message Access
Profile (MAP) profile)
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 244
MULTIMEDIA 245
Uconnect Phone supports the following
features:
Voice Activated Features:
Hands-Free dialing via Voice (“Call John Smith
Mobile” or, “Dial 248-555-1212”).
Hands-Free text to speech listening of your
incoming SMS (Short Message Service)
messages.
Hands-free text message reply. (Forward one of
18 pre-defined SMS messages to incoming
calls/text messages).
Redialing last dialed numbers (“Redial”).
Calling back the last incoming call number
(“Call Back”).
View call logs on screen (“Show incoming calls,
” “Show Outgoing calls,” “Show missed Calls,”
“Show Recent Calls”).
Searching contacts phone number (“Search for
John Smith Mobile”).
NOTE:
Examples of Voice Commands are provided
throughout this manual. For quick use, go to the
Uconnect Voice Recognition Quick Tips Section.
Screen Activated Features:
Dialing via keypad using touchscreen.
Viewing and calling contacts from phonebooks
displayed on the touchscreen.
Setting favorite contact phone numbers so
they are easily accessible on the main phone
screen.
Viewing and calling contacts from recent call
logs.
Reviewing your recent incoming SMS.
Listen to music on your Bluetooth® device via
the touchscreen.
Pairing up to 10 phones/audio devices for easy
access to connect to them quickly.
NOTE:
Your phone must be capable of SMS messaging
via Bluetooth® for messaging features to work
properly.
Your mobile phone’s audio is transmitted
through your vehicle’s audio system; the system
automatically mutes your radio when using the
Uconnect Phone.
For Uconnect customer support:
US residents - visit UconnectPhone.com or call:
877-855-8400
Canadian residents - (English) call:
800-465-2001
or (French) call: 800-387-9983
Visit UconnectPhone.com
Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls
between the system and your mobile phone as
you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to
mute the system's microphone for private
conversation.
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility
and assume all risks related to the use of
the Uconnect features and applications in
this vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is
safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in
an accident involving serious injury or death.
9
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 245
246 MULTIMEDIA
The Uconnect Phone is driven through your
Bluetooth® “Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone.
Uconnect features Bluetooth® technology - the
global standard that enables different elec-
tronic devices to connect to each other without
wires or a docking station, so Uconnect Phone
works no matter where you stow your mobile
phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as
long as your phone is turned on and has been
paired to the vehicle's Uconnect Phone. The
Uconnect Phone allows up to 10 mobile phones
or audio devices to be linked to the system. Only
one linked (or paired) mobile phone, and one
audio device, can be used with the system at a
time.
Uconnect Phone Button
The Uconnect Phone button on your steering
wheel is used to get into the phone mode and
make calls, show recent, incoming, outgoing
calls, view phonebook etc.
Uconnect Voice Command Button
The Uconnect Voice Command button on
your steering wheel is only used for “barge in”
and when you are already in a call and you want
to send tones or make another call.
The button on your steering wheel is also
used to access the Voice Commands for the
Uconnect Voice Command features if your
vehicle is equipped. Please see the Uconnect
Voice Command section for direction on how to
use the button.
The Uconnect Phone is fully integrated with the
vehicle's audio system. The volume of the
Uconnect Phone can be adjusted either from
the radio volume control knob or from the
steering wheel radio control (right switch), if
equipped.
Phone Operation
Operation
Voice commands can be used to operate the
Uconnect Phone and to navigate through the
Uconnect Phone menu structure. Voice
commands are required after most Uconnect
Phone prompts. There are two general methods
for how Voice Command works:
1. Say compound commands like “Call John
Smith mobile.”
2. Say the individual commands and allow
the system to guide you to complete the
task.
You will be prompted for a specific command
and then guided through the available options.
Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait
for the beep, which follows the “Listen” prompt
or another prompt.
For certain operations, compound commands
can be used. For example, instead of saying
“Call” and then “John Smith” and then
“mobile”, the following compound command
can be said: “Call John Smith mobile.”
For each feature explanation in this section,
only the compound command form of the voice
command is given. You can also break the
commands into parts and say each part of the
command when you are asked for it. For
example, you can use the compound command
form voice command “Search for John Smith,”
or you can break the compound command
form into two voice commands: “Search
Contact” and when asked “John Smith.” Please
remember, the Uconnect Phone works best
when you talk in a normal conversational tone,
as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet/
meters away from you.
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 246
MULTIMEDIA 247
Natural Speech
Your Uconnect Phone Voice system uses a
Natural Language Voice Recognition (VR)
engine.
Natural speech allows the user to speak
commands in phrases or complete sentences.
The system filters out certain non-word utter-
ances and sounds such as “ah” and “eh.” The
system handles fill-in words such as “I would
like to.”
The system handles multiple inputs in the same
phrase or sentence such as “make a phone
call” and “to Kelly Smith.” For multiple inputs in
the same phrase or sentence, the system iden-
tifies the topic or context and provides the asso-
ciated follow-up prompt such as “Who do you
want to call?” in the case where a phone call
was requested but the specific name was not
recognized.
The system utilizes continuous dialog; when the
system requires more information from the user
it will ask a question to which the user can
respond without pushing the Voice Command
button on your steering wheel.
Help Command
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you
want to know your options at any prompt, say
“Help” following the beep.
To activate the Uconnect Phone from idle,
simply push the Phone VR button on your
steering wheel and say a command or say
“help.” All Uconnect Phone sessions begin with
a push of the Phone VR button on the steering
wheel controls.
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say
“Cancel” and you will be returned to the main
menu.
You can also push the Phone VR or Voice
Command button on your steering wheel
when the system is listening for a command and
be returned to the main or previous menu.
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone
To begin using your Uconnect Phone, you must
pair your compatible Bluetooth® enabled
mobile phone. Mobile phone pairing is the
process of establishing a wireless connection
between a cellular phone and the Uconnect
system.
To complete the pairing process, you will need
to reference your mobile phone Owner's
Manual. Please visit UconnectPhone.com for
complete mobile phone compatibility informa-
tion.
NOTE:
You must have Bluetooth® enabled on your
phone to complete this procedure.
The vehicle must be in PARK.
1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN
position.
2. Press the Phone button in the Menu Bar on
the touchscreen.
If there are no phones currently
connected with the system, a pop-up will
appear asking if you would like to pair a
mobile phone.
3. Select “Yes” to begin the pairing process.
9
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 247
248 MULTIMEDIA
4. Search for available devices on your Blue-
tooth® enabled mobile phone.
Press the Settings button on your mobile
phone.
Select Bluetooth® and ensure it is
enabled. Once enabled, the mobile
phone will begin to search for Blue-
tooth® connections.
Uconnect 4/4 NAV
If No is selected, and you still would like to
pair a mobile phone, press the Phone Set-
tings button from the Uconnect Phone
main screen.
Select Paired Phones then press the Add
Device button on the touchscreen.
Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth® enabled mobile phone (see
below). When prompted on the phone,
select Uconnect and accept the connec-
tion request.
5. Uconnect Phone will display an in progress
screen while the system is connecting.
6. When your mobile phone finds the
Uconnect system, select Uconnect.
7. When prompted on the mobile phone,
accept the connection request from
Uconnect Phone.
NOTE:
Some mobile phones will require you to enter the
PIN number.
8. When the pairing process has successfully
been completed, the system will prompt
you to choose whether or not this is your
favorite phone. Selecting “Yes” will make
this phone the highest priority. This phone
will take precedence over other paired
phones within range and will connect to
the Uconnect system automatically when
entering the vehicle. Only one mobile
phone and/or one Bluetooth® audio
device can be connected to the Uconnect
system at a time. If “No” is selected, simply
select Uconnect from the mobile phone/
audio device Bluetooth® screen, and the
Uconnect system will reconnect to the
Bluetooth® device.
Pair Additional Mobile Phones
1. Press the Phone button on the touch-
screen, then press the Settings button on
the touchscreen from the Phone main
screen.
2. Press the Add Device button on the touch-
screen.
3. Search for available devices on your Blue-
tooth® enabled mobile phone. When
prompted on the phone, enter the name
and PIN shown on the Uconnect screen.
4. Uconnect Phone will display an in process
screen while the system is connecting.
5.
When the pairing process has successfully
com
pleted, the system will prompt you to
choose whether or not this is your favorite
phone. Selecting “Yes” will make this
phone the highest priority. This phone will
take precedence over other paired phones
within range.
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 248
MULTIMEDIA 249
NOTE:
For phones which are not made a favorite, the
phone priority is determined by the order in which
it was paired. The latest phone paired will have
the higher priority.
You can also use the following VR commands to
bring up the Paired Phone screen from any
screen on the radio:
“Show Paired Phones” or
“Connect My Phone”
Pair A Bluetooth® Streaming Audio Device
1. Press the Media button on the touch-
screen to begin.
2. Change the Source to Bluetooth®.
3. Press the Bluetooth® button on the touch-
screen to display the Paired Audio Devices
screen.
4. Press the Add Device button on the touch-
screen.
NOTE:
If there is no device currently connected with the
system, a pop-up will appear.
5. Search for available devices on your Blue-
tooth® enabled audio device. When
prompted on the device, enter the PIN
shown on the Uconnect screen.
6. Uconnect Phone will display an in process
screen while the system is connecting.
7. When the pairing process has successfully
been completed, the system will prompt
you to choose whether or not this is your
favorite device. Selecting Yes will make
this device the highest priority. This device
will take precedence over other paired
devices within range.
NOTE:
For devices which are not made a favorite, the
device priority is determined by the order in which
it was paired. The latest device paired will have
the higher priority.
You can also use the following VR command to
bring up a list of paired audio devices.
“Show Paired Phones” or
“Connect My Phone”
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or Audio
Device After Pairing
Uconnect Phone will automatically connect to
the highest priority paired phone and/or Audio
Device within range. If you need to choose a
particular phone or Audio Device follow these
steps:
1. Press the Phone button on the touch-
screen, then the Settings button on the
touchscreen.
2. Press the Paired Phones or Paired Audio
Sources button on the touchscreen.
3. Press to select the particular Phone or the
particular Audio Device. A pop-up menu will
appear, press Connect Phone.
4. Press the X to exit out of the Settings
screen.
Disconnecting A Phone Or Audio Device
1. Press the Phone button on the touch-
screen, then the Settings button on the
touchscreen.
2. Press the Paired Phones or Paired Audio
Devices button on the touchscreen.
9
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 249
250 MULTIMEDIA
3. Select the Phone or the Audio Device that
you want to disconnect.
4. Press the Disconnect Device button or
Phone button on the touchscreen.
5. Press the X to exit out of the Settings
screen.
Deleting A Phone Or Audio Device
1. Press the Phone button on the touch-
screen, then press the Settings button on
the touchscreen.
2. Press the Pair Phones or Paired Audio
Devices button on the touchscreen.
3. Select the Phone or the Audio Device that
you want to delete.
4. Press the Delete Device button or the
Phone button on the touchscreen.
5. Press the X to exit out of the Settings
screen.
Making A Phone Or Audio Device A Favorite
1. Press the Phone button on the touch-
screen, then press the Settings button on
the touchscreen.
2. Press the Paired Phones or Paired Audio
Devices button on the touchscreen.
3. Select the Paired Phone or Paired Audio
Device you want to make a favorite.
4. Press the Add Favorite button on the touch-
screen; you will see the chosen device
move to the top of the list.
5. Press the X to exit out of the Settings
screen.
Managing Your Favorites
There are two ways you can add an entry to your
Favorites.
1. After loading the mobile phonebook, press
the Favorites button on the touchscreen,
and then press one of the +Add favorite
Contact buttons that appears on the list.
2. After loading the mobile phonebook, select
Contacts from the Phone main screen,
then select the appropriate number. Press
the down arrow symbol icon next to the
selected number to display the options
pop-up. In the pop-up select “Add to Favor-
ites.”
NOTE:
If the Favorites list is full, you will be asked to
remove an existing favorite.
Phonebook Download (Automatic Phonebook
Transfer From Mobile Phone) — If Equipped
If equipped and specifically supported by your
phone, Uconnect Phone automatically down-
loads names (text names) and number entries
from the mobile phone’s phonebook. Specific
Bluetooth® Phones with Phone Book Access
Profile may support this feature. See Uconnect
website, UconnectPhone.com, for supported
phones.
To call a name from a downloaded mobile
phone book, follow the procedure in the
“Uconnect Voice Recognition Quick Tips”
section.
Automatic download and update of a phone
book, if supported, begins as soon as the Blue-
tooth® wireless phone connection is made to
the Uconnect Phone, for example, after you
start the vehicle.
A maximum of 5,000 contact names with four
numbers per contact will be downloaded and
updated every time a phone is connected to
the Uconnect Phone.
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 250
MULTIMEDIA 251
Depending on the maximum number of entries
downloaded, there may be a short delay before
the latest downloaded names can be used.
Until then, if available, the previously down-
loaded phonebook is available for use.
Only the phonebook of the currently connected
mobile phone is accessible.
This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited
or deleted on the Uconnect Phone. These can
only be edited on the mobile phone. The
changes are transferred and updated to
Uconnect Phone on the next phone connection.
To Remove A Favorite
1. To remove a Favorite, select Favorites from
the Phone main screen.
2. Next select the down arrow icon next to the
contact you want to remove from your
favorites. This will bring up the options for
that favorite contact.
3. Press Remove from Favs.
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through
the Uconnect Phone if the feature(s) are avail-
able and supported by Bluetooth® on your
mobile service plan. For example, if your mobile
service plan provides three-way calling, this
feature can be accessed through the Uconnect
Phone. Check with your mobile service provider
for the features that you have.
Ways To Initiate A Phone Call
Listed below are all the ways you can initiate a
phone call with Uconnect Phone.
Redial
Dial by pressing in the number
Voice Commands (Dial by Saying a Name, Call
by Saying a Phonebook Name, Redial or Call
Back)
Favorites
Mobile Phonebook
Recent Call Log
SMS Message Viewer
Dial By Saying A Number
1. Push the VR button on your steering wheel
to begin.
2. After the “Listening” prompt and the
following beep, say “Dial 151-123-4444.”
3. The Uconnect Phone will dial the number
151-123-4444.
Call By Saying A Phonebook Name
1. Push the VR button on your steering wheel
to begin.
2. After the “Listening” prompt and the
following beep, say “Call John Doe Mobile.”
3. The Uconnect Phone will dial the number
associated with John Doe, or if there are
multiple numbers it will ask which number
you want to call for John Doe.
Call Controls
The touchscreen allows you to control the
following call features:
Answer
End
Ignore
9
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 251
252 MULTIMEDIA
Hold/unhold
Mute/unmute
Transfer the call to/from the phone
Swap two active calls
Join two active calls together
Touch-Tone Number Entry
1. Press the Phone button on the touch-
screen.
2. Press the Dial button on the touchscreen.
3. The Touch-Tone screen will be displayed.
4. Use the numbered buttons on the touch-
screens to enter the number and press
Call.
If your vehicle has two or three buttons on the
steering wheel (VR, Phone Send, and Phone
End) push the VR button to send a touch-tone
and say “Send 1234#”
Recent Calls
You may browse a list of the most recent of each
of the following call types:
All Calls
Incoming Calls
Outgoing Calls
Missed Calls
These can be accessed by pressing the recent
calls button on the Phone main screen.
You can also push the VR button on your
steering wheel and say “Show my incoming
calls” from any screen and the Incoming calls
will be displayed.
NOTE:
Incoming can also be replaced with “Outgoing,”
“Recent” or “Missed.”
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — No Call
Currently In Progress
When you receive a call on your mobile phone,
the Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle
audio system. Push the Phone button on the
steering wheel to accept the call. You can also
press the answer button on the touchscreen or
press the caller ID box.
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — Call
Currently In Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have
another incoming call, you will hear the same
network tones for call waiting that you normally
hear when using your mobile phone. Press the
Phone button on the steering wheel, answer
button on the touchscreen or caller ID box to
place the current call on hold and answer the
incoming call.
NOTE:
The Uconnect Phone compatible phones in the
market today do not support rejecting an
incoming call when another call is in progress.
Therefore, the user can only answer an incoming
call or ignore it.
Do Not Disturb
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifica-
tions from incoming calls and texts, allowing
you to keep your eyes on the road and hands on
the wheel. For your convenience, there is a
counter display to keep track of your missed
calls and text messages while you were using
Do Not Disturb.
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 252
MULTIMEDIA 253
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a
text message, a call or both, when declining an
incoming call and send it to voicemail.
Automatic reply messages can be:
“I am driving right now, I will get back to you
shortly.”
Create a custom auto reply message up to 160
characters.
NOTE:
Only the first 25 characters can be seen on the
touchscreen while typing a custom message.
While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be
selected so you can still place a second call
without being interrupted by incoming calls.
NOTE:
Reply with text message is not compatible with
iPhones®.
Auto reply with text message is only available
on phones that support Bluetooth® MAP.
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold
During an active call, press the Hold button on
the Phone main screen.
Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
Progress
You can place a call on hold by pressing the
Hold button on the Phone main screen, then
dial a number from the dialpad, recent calls,
SMS Inbox or from the phonebooks. To go back
to the first call, refer to “Toggling Between Calls”
in this section. To combine two calls, refer to
“Join Calls” in this section for further informa-
tion.
Toggling Between Calls
If two calls are in progress (one active and one
on hold), press the Swap button on the Phone
main screen. Only one call can be placed on
hold at a time.
You can also push the Phone button to
toggle between the active and held phone call.
Join Calls
When two calls are in progress (one active and
one on hold), press the Join Calls button on the
Phone main screen to combine all calls into a
Conference Call.
Call Termination
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the
Phone End button on the touchscreen or the
Phone End button on the steering wheel. Only
the active call(s) will be terminated and if there
is a call on hold, it will become the new active
call.
Redial
Press the Redial button on the touchscreen, or
push the VR button. After the “Listening”
prompt, and say “Redial” following the beep.
The Uconnect Phone will call the last number
that was dialed from your mobile phone.
Call Continuation
Call continuation is the progression of a phone
call on the Uconnect Phone after the vehicle
ignition has been switched to OFF.
NOTE:
The call will remain within the vehicle audio
system until the phone becomes out of range for
the Bluetooth® connection. It is recommended to
press the transfer button on the touchscreen
when leaving the vehicle.
9
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 253
254 MULTIMEDIA
Browsing SMS
Using the steering wheel commands, you can
view and manage the last ten SMS messages
received on the instrument panel. To use this
function, the mobile phone must support the
SMS exchange function through Bluetooth®.
Select Phone on the instrument panel menu
and then select SMS reader using the arrow
keys on the steering wheel controls.
The ‘SMS reader’ submenu allows the last ten
SMS messages to be displayed.
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone
The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be
transferred from your mobile phone to the
Uconnect Phone without terminating the call. To
transfer an ongoing call from your connected
mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone or vice
versa, press the Transfer button on the Phone
main screen.
Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The
Uconnect Phone And Mobile Phone
If you would like to connect or disconnect the
Bluetooth® connection between a Uconnect
Phone paired mobile phone and the Uconnect
Phone, follow the instructions described in your
mobile phone User's Manual.
Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect Phone
Voice Command
For the best performance:
Adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least ½
inch (1 cm) gap between the overhead console
(if equipped) and the mirror.
Always wait for the beep before speaking.
Speak normally, without pausing, just as you
would speak to a person sitting a few feet/
meters away from you.
Ensure that no one other than you is speaking
during a voice command period.
Performance is maximized under:
Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
Low Road Noise
Smooth Road Surface
Fully Closed Windows
Dry Weather Condition
Even though the system is designed for many
languages and accents, the system may not
always work for some.
NOTE:
It is recommended that you do not store names in
your favorites phonebook while the vehicle is in
motion.
Phonebook (Mobile and Favorites) name recog-
nition rate is optimized when the entries are not
similar. You can say “O” (letter “O”) for “0”
(zero).
Even though international dialing for most
number combinations is supported, some
shortcut dialing number combinations may not
be supported.
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to
do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 254
MULTIMEDIA 255
Far End Audio Performance
Audio quality is maximized under:
Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
Low Road Noise
Smooth Road Surface
Fully Closed Windows
Dry Weather Conditions
Operation From The Driver's Seat
Performance such as audio clarity, echo, and
loudness to a large degree rely on the phone
and network, and not the Uconnect Phone.
Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced
by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
In a convertible vehicle, system performance
may be compromised with the convertible top
down.
Bluetooth® Communication Link
Mobile phones have been found to lose connec-
tion to the Uconnect Phone. When this
happens, the connection can generally be
re-established by switching the mobile phone
OFF/ON. Your mobile phone is recommended to
remain in Bluetooth® ON mode.
Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to
either the ON or ACC position, or after a
language change, you must wait at least 15
seconds prior to using the system.
Navigation Mode — If Equipped
Navigation Main Menu
To access the Navigation system, press the Nav
button on the touchscreen.
Navigation Main Menu
Press Search to search for a Point Of Interest
(POI) or specific address.
Press Current Route to view and edit the
current navigational route programed into the
system. This menu option is only available
when navigating to a destination.
Press My Places to select from a list of saved
destinations, including the saved Home, Work,
and Recent destinations.
Press My Routes to select from a list of saved
routes.
Press Parking to open the map view with the
nearest parking locations labeled with markers
on the map.
Press Gas Station to open the map view with
the nearest gas station locations labeled with
markers on the map.
Press Settings, the gear icon, to open up the
settings menu and alter map, and route
settings.
Press Help, the question mark icon, to open up
the help menu to access the about page.
9
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 255
256 MULTIMEDIA
Navigating A Route
Once a route is programmed the map view will
be displayed highlighting the route as a light
blue bar in which the vehicle is to follow. On the
right hand side of the screen is a route track
that shows how far you are away from your final
destination, and indicates stops and other
points of interest along the way with icons that
move closer to your arrow icon as you approach
them in distance. The distance to the next direc-
tion is displayed at the top of the screen, and
the main menu can be accessed at any time by
pressing the Menu button on the touchscreen,
the four white dots icon in the bottom left-hand
corner of the screen. The route will continue to
be displayed behind the menu as you travel
along it.
Search
To search for a destination, and start navigating
a route, follow these steps:
1. While in the Navigation Main Menu, press
the Search button on the touchscreen.
2. If searching using an address begin typing
the address using the displayed keyboard,
but if searching using the name of the
destination press Point of Interest first
before typing.
3. Select the location from the list that
appears. The display will switch to the map
view and will show the location of the
selected destination.
4. Press the Navigate button, the red steering
wheel icon, to begin navigating to the
selected location.
NOTE:
Pressing the More button, the three dot icon, next
to the Navigate button, the steering wheel icon,
brings up the options to add the destination to
the My Places menu, add the destination to the
current route, and more. Within the More option
is the option to use the destination as a starting
point and information about the location.
Current Route
From the Navigation Main Menu, press the
Current Route button on the touchscreen and
select one of the following to adjust or change
your current route.
NOTE:
Current Route can only be selected from the Navi-
gation Main Menu if the navigation system is
currently navigating to a destination.
Clear Route
Press this button on the touchscreen to clear
the current route from the navigation system.
Change Route Type
Press this button on the touchscreen to change
the current routes type to one of the below
options:
Fastest route: routes the vehicle to the destina-
tion using the roads that will take the least
amount of time.
Shortest route: routes the vehicle to the desti-
nation using the roads that will be the shortest
amount of total distance traveled.
Most eco-friendly route: routes the vehicle to
the destination using the roads that will use the
least amount of fuel.
Avoid interstate highways: routes the vehicle to
the destination avoiding all interstate high-
ways.
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 256
MULTIMEDIA 257
Find Alternative
Press this button on the touchscreen to view an
overhead view of your route, along with several
others to choose from. Each with the time differ-
ence between your current route and these new
ones. Select the colored button that corre-
sponds to the new route you want to take.
Avoid Blocked Road
Press this button on the touchscreen to select a
road you wish to avoid on your route that is
blocked.
Avoid Part Of Route
Press this button on the touchscreen to bring up
the list of directions for your current route.
Select the part of the route you wish to avoid
and the system will re-route the navigation track
to your destination.
Avoid On This Route
Press this button on the touchscreen to select
certain types of roads to avoid on your naviga-
tional route.
Show Instructions
Press this button on the touchscreen to view the
directions of your route in list form.
Add Stop To Route
Press this button on the touchscreen to add an
additional stop to your current route. Pressing
the Search button will bring up the keyboard
where you can type in the address or name of
the destination you wish to add.
Add To My Routes
Press this button on the touchscreen to add the
current route to the list of save routes in the My
Routes main Menu option. When this button is
selected, a keyboard will appear so you may
name the route.
Reorder Stops
Press this button on the touchscreen to reorder
the different stops on the current route.
Play Route Preview
Press this button on the touchscreen to begin a
simulated preview of what your route will look
like. The vehicle icon will begin traveling along
your route until it reaches its destination. You
can also end the preview by returning to the
Current Route menu and selecting Stop Route
Preview.
My Places
Press the My Places button on the touchscreen
from the Navigation Main Menu to display a list
of saved destinations that can be selected to
navigate to. The following destinations are
selectable, along with any other destinations
that have been saved.
Home
Press this button on the touchscreen to navi-
gate to the saved Home destination. If no Home
destination is saved, the navigation system will
ask you to search for the destination you wish to
save as your Home destination.
Recent Destinations
Press this button on the touchscreen to display
a list of destinations the navigation has recently
routed to for you to select.
NOTE:
The Add and Edit List buttons allow you to add
more, remove and reorder destinations that
appear within the list.
9
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 257
258 MULTIMEDIA
My Routes
Press the My Routes button from the Navigation
Main Menu to view a list of all your saved
routes. Select the route from the list you wish to
use. If no routes have been saved “No saved
routes” will be displayed.
NOTE:
Press the Edit List button in the bottom right
corner to reorder and delete routes from the list.
Parking
From the Navigation Main Menu, press the
Parking button on the touchscreen to bring up a
view of your current location on the map. Within
this map view, blue “P” icons will appear
pointing out the locations of nearby parking lots.
Press the desired parking lot icon to bring up
the location, and select the steering wheel icon
to navigate to it.
Gas Stations
From the Navigation Main Menu, press the Gas
Stations button on the touchscreen to bring up
a view of your current location on the map.
Within this map view, white “Gas Station” icons
will appear pointing out the locations of nearby
gas stations. Press the desired gas station icon
to bring up its location, and select the steering
wheel icon to navigate to it.
SETTINGS
From the Navigation Main Menu, press the
Settings button, the gear icon, to open up the
Settings menu. The following settings catego-
ries are selectable within the Settings Main
Menu:
Appearance
Press this button on the touchscreen to adjust
the appearance settings of the navigation
system. The appearance settings allow you to
alter whether or not the system switches to
night colors when it is dark, change the arrival
information that is displayed, change what
appears on the route (i.e. highway exits), when
the system automatically zooms, and adjust the
guidance view style from 3D, 2D and whether or
not to show the 3D car icon.
Voices
Press this button on the touchscreen to adjust
what the navigation system calls out while navi-
gating. The voices settings allow you to turn on
and off whether the system reads early instruc-
tions, sign information, road numbers, street
names, and foreign street names out loud.
Route Planning
Press this button on the touchscreen to adjust
the route planning features of the navigation
system. The route planning settings allow you to
change whether or not the system will prompt
you when a faster route is available, which type
of route it should plan when setting one (i.e.
fastest, shortest, most eco-friendly, or to avoid
interstate highways), and what to avoid on every
route.
Sounds & Warnings
Press this button on the touchscreen to adjust
how the navigation system should warn yo
during a route. The sounds and warnings
settings allows you to set the warning type the
system will sound, and whether or not to warn
you when the vehicle is traveling above the
speed limit.
System
Press this button on the touchscreen to reset
the navigation system. This will reset the navi-
gation to its factory setting and remove all
saved data.
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 258
MULTIMEDIA 259
Help
Press the question mark icon to enter the
“Help” menu. Within the help menu you may
view the “about” page that display system infor-
mation.
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
The remote sound system controls are located
at the rear of the steering wheel. Reach behind
the wheel to access the switches.
Sound System Controls (Back View Of Steering Wheel)
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch
with a pushbutton in the center and controls the
volume and mode of the sound system. Pushing
the top of the rocker switch will increase the
volume, and pushing the bottom of the rocker
switch will decrease the volume.
Pushing the center button will make the radio
switch between the various modes available
(AM/FM/SAT/AUX/Media Player, etc.).
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with
a pushbutton in the center. The function of the
left-hand control is different depending on
which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control
operation in each mode.
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for
the next listenable station and pushing the
bottom of the switch will “Seek” down for the
next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand
control will tune to the next preset station that
you have programmed in the radio preset
button.
Player Operation
Pushing the top of the switch once will go to the
next track on the Player. Pushing the bottom of
the switch once will go to the beginning of the
current track, or to the beginning of the previous
track if it is within one second after the current
track begins to play.
If you push the switch up or down twice, it plays
the second track; three times, it will play the
third, etc.
IPOD®/USB/MEDIA PLAYER CONTROL
This feature allows an iPod® or external USB
device to be plugged into the USB ports.
Instrument Panel USB Port
1 — Standard USB Ports
9
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 259
260 MULTIMEDIA
Rear Seat Charge Only USB
There is also a Rear Seat USB port located on
the back of the center console that can be used
to charge USB devices.
Rear Seat USB
Refer to the Uconnect 4/4 NAV With 7-inch
Display section for iPod® and external USB
support capability.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone
being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or
noisy performance from your radio. This condi-
tion may be lessened or eliminated by relo-
cating the mobile phone antenna. This
condition is not harmful to the radio. If your
radio performance does not satisfactorily
“clear” by the repositioning of the antenna, it is
recommended that the radio volume be turned
down or off during mobile phone operation
when not using Uconnect (if equipped).
Regulatory And Safety Information
USA/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal wire-
less radio is far below the FCC and IC radio
frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the
wireless radio will be used in such a manner
that the radio is 8 in (20 cm) or further from the
human body.
The internal wireless radio operates within
guidelines found in radio frequency safety stan-
dards and recommendations, which reflect the
consensus of the scientific community.
The radio manufacturer believes the internal
wireless radio is safe for use by consumers. The
level of energy emitted is far less than the elec-
tromagnetic energy emitted by wireless devices
such as mobile phones. However, the use of
wireless radios may be restricted in some situa-
tions or environments, such as aboard
airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you
are encouraged to ask for authorization before
turning on the wireless radio.
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic Develop-
ment applicables aux appareils radio exempts
de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouil-
lage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en comprom-
ettre le fonctionnement.
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 260
MULTIMEDIA 261
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equip-
ment.
NOTE:
This equipment has been tested and found to
comply with the limits for a Class B digital
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reason-
able protection against harmful interference in
a residential installation. This equipment
generates, uses and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used
in accordance with the instructions, may cause
harmful interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interfer-
ence will not occur in a particular installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful interfer-
ence to radio or television reception, which can
be determined by turning the equipment off
and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct
the interference by one or more of the following
measures:
a. Increase the separation between the
equipment and receiver.
b. Consult an authorized dealer or an
experienced radio technician for help.
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK
TIPS
Introducing Uconnect
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition (VR)
with these helpful quick tips. It provides the key
Voice Commands and tips you need to know to
control your Uconnect 4/4 NAV system.
Uconnect 4 NAV
If you see the NAV icon on the bottom bar, or in
the Apps menus, of your touchscreen, you have
the Uconnect 4 NAV system. If not, you have a
Uconnect 4 system.
Get Started
All you need to control your Uconnect system
with your voice are the buttons on your steering
wheel.
1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile
device and feature compatibility and to
find phone pairing instructions.
2. Reduce background noise. Wind noise and
passenger conversations are examples of
noise that may impact recognition.
9
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 261
262 MULTIMEDIA
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume
while facing straight ahead.
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you
must first push either the VR or Phone
button, wait until after the beep, then say
your Voice Command.
5. You can interrupt the help message or
system prompts by pushing the VR or
Phone button and saying a Voice
Command from current category.
Uconnect Voice Command
Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be given
at any point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button on the steering wheel. After
the beep, say:
“Cancel” to stop a current voice session
“Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice
Commands
“Repeat” to listen to the system prompts again
Uconnect 4/4 NAV Basic Voice Commands
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your
voice recognition system’s status. Cues appear
on the touchscreen.
Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio stations you would
like to hear. (Subscription or included Siri-
usXM® Satellite Radio trial required.)
Push the VR button on the steering wheel. After
the beep, say:
“Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM”
“Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1”
TIP:
At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or
want to learn a Voice Command, push the VR
button on the steering wheel and say “Help.” The
system provides you with a list of commands.
Uconnect 4/4 NAV Radio
1 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send
Or Receive A Text
2 — Push To Say Vocal Commands
3 — Push To End Call
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 262
MULTIMEDIA 263
Media
Uconnect offers connections via USB or Blue-
tooth®. Voice operation is only available for
connected USB and iPod® devices.
Push the VR button on the steering wheel. After
the beep, say one of the following commands
and follow the prompts to switch your media
source or choose an artist.
“Change source to Bluetooth®”
“Change source to USB”
“Play artist Beethoven”; “Play album Greatest
Hits”; “Play song Moonlight Sonata”; “Play
genre Classical”
TIP:
Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to
see all of the music on your USB device. Your
Voice Command must match exactly how the
artist, album, song and genre information is
displayed.
Uconnect 4/4 NAV Media
Phone
Making and answering hands-free phone calls
is easy with Uconnect. When the Phone button
is illuminated on your touchscreen, your system
is ready to make a phone call. You may have to
wait for a few more moments to issue a Voice
Command for hands-free calling. Check Ucon-
nectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility
and pairing instructions (for U.S. and Canadian
residents).
Push the VR button on the steering wheel. After
the beep, say one of the following commands:
“Call John Smith”
“Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system
prompts”
“Redial (call previous outgoing phone
number)”
“Call back (call previous incoming phone
number)”
TIP:
When providing a Voice Command, push the VR
button on the steering wheel and say “Call,” then
pronounce the name exactly as it appears in your
phone book. When a contact has multiple phone
numbers, you can say “Call John Smith work,
home, cell, etc.”
Uconnect 4/4 NAV Phone
Navigation (4 NAV) — If Equipped
The Uconnect navigation feature helps you save
time and become more productive when you
know exactly how to get to where you want to go.
9
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 263
264 MULTIMEDIA
1. To enter a destination, push the VR button
on the steering wheel. After the beep, say,
“Navigate to 800 Chrysler Drive Auburn
Hills, Michigan or Enter State.”
2. Then follow the system prompts.
Uconnect 4 NAV Navigation
TIP:
To start a Point of Interest (POI) search, push the
VR button on the steering wheel. After the beep,
say: “Find nearest coffee shop.”
Siri® Eyes Free — If Equipped
Available on iPhone® 4s or later.
Siri lets you use your voice to send text
messages, schedule meetings, select media,
place phone calls and much more. Siri uses
your natural language and interacts with
requests. The system is designed to keep your
eyes on the road and your hands on the wheel
by letting Siri help you perform useful tasks.
Press and hold the VR button on the steering
wheel to activate Siri. As soon as your hear a
double beep, you can start interacting with Siri
to listen to music, get directions, read text
messages and more.
Siri® Eyes Free Available
Android Auto™ — If Equipped
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile phone manufacturer. Some Android
Auto™ features may or may not be available in
every region and/or language.
Android Auto™ allows you to use your voice to
interact with Android’s™ best-in-class speech
technology through your vehicle’s voice recogni-
tion system, and use your smartphone’s data
plan to project your Android™-powered smart-
phone and a number of its apps onto your
Uconnect touchscreen. Connect your Android™
5.0 (Lollipop) or higher to one of the media USB
ports, using the factory-provided USB cable, and
press the new Android Auto™ icon that replaces
your “Phone” icon on the main menu bar to
begin Android Auto™. Push and hold the VR
button on the steering wheel, or press and hold
the “Microphone” icon within Android Auto™, to
activate Android’s™ VR, which recognizes
natural voice commands, to use a list of your
smartphone’s features:
Maps
Music
Phone
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 264
MULTIMEDIA 265
Text Messages
Additional Apps
Android Auto™
Refer to the “Uconnect 4/4 NAV With 7-inch
Display” section for further information.
NOTE:
Requires compatible smartphone running
Android™ 5.0 (Lollipop) or higher and download
app on Google Play. Android™, Android Auto™,
and Google Play are trademarks of Google Inc.
Apple CarPlay® — If Equipped
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile phone manufacturer. Some Apple
CarPlay® features may or may not be available in
every region and/or language.
Apple CarPlay® allows you to use your voice to
interact with Siri through your vehicle’s voice
recognition system, and use your smartphone’s
data plan to project your iPhone® and a
number of its apps onto your Uconnect touch-
screen. Connect your iPhone® 5, or higher, to
one of the media USB ports, using the
factory-provided Lightning cable, and press the
new Apple CarPlay® icon that replaces your
“Phone” icon on the main menu bar to begin
Apple CarPlay®. Press and hold the VR button
on the steering wheel, or press and hold the
Home button within Apple CarPlay®, to activate
Siri, which recognizes natural voice commands
to use a list of your iPhone’s® features:
Phone
Music
Messages
Maps
Additional Apps
Apple CarPlay®
Refer to the “Uconnect 4/4 NAV With 7-inch
Display” section for further information.
NOTE:
Requires compatible iPhone®. See dealer for
phone compatibility. Data plan rates apply.
Vehicle user interface is a product of Apple®.
Apple CarPlay® is a trademark of Apple® Inc.
iPhone® is a trademark of Apple® Inc., regis-
tered in the US and other countries. Apple®
terms of use and privacy statements apply.
9
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 265
266 MULTIMEDIA
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic Develop-
ment applicables aux appareils radio exempts
de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouil-
lage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en comprom-
ettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equip-
ment.
Additional Information
© 2019 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar
and Uconnect are registered trademarks and
Mopar Owner Connect is a trademark of FCA US
LLC. Android™ is a trademark of Google Inc. Siri-
usXM® and all related marks and logos are
trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc.
Uconnect System Support:
US residents visit DriveUconnect.com or call:
1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7 days a
week)
Canadian residents visit DriveUconnect.ca or
call: 1-800-465-2001 (English) or
1-800-387-9983 (French)
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 266
267
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to
have the right papers with you. Take your
warranty folder. All work to be performed may
not be covered by the warranty. Discuss addi-
tional charges with the service manager. Keep a
maintenance log of your vehicle's service
history. This can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or
the specific work you want done. If you've had
an accident or work done that is not on your
maintenance log, let the service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have
your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the
situation with the service advisor and list the
items in order of priority. At many authorized
dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle at a
minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is
advisable to make these arrangements when
you call for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealers
are vitally interested in your satisfaction. We
want you to be happy with our products and
services.
Warranty service must be done by an autho-
rized dealer. We strongly recommend that you
take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. They
know your vehicle the best, and are most
concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer's authorized dealers
have the facilities, factory-trained technicians,
special tools, and the latest information to
ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a
timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an autho-
rized dealer service manager first. Most matters
can be resolved with this process.
If for some reason you are still not satisfied,
talk to the general manager or owner of the
authorized dealer. They want to know if you
need assistance.
If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the
concern, you may contact the manufacturer's
customer center.
Any communication to the manufacturer's
customer center should include the following
information:
Owner's name and address
Owner's telephone number (home, mobile, and
office)
Authorized dealer name
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
10
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 267
268 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
FCA US LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (888) 242-6342
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800)
387-9983 French
In Mexico Contact
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: (800) 505-1300
Outside Mexico City: +(52)55 50817568
Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands
FCA Caribbean LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Phone: (888) 242-6342
Fax: (787) 782-3345
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficul-
ties, the manufacturer has installed special
Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf (TDD)
equipment at its customer center. Any hearing
or speech impaired customer, who has access
to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY)
in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that
require assistance can use the special needs
relay service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY
teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice
callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a
Bell Relay Service operator.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for
a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost
of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer's
New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. The
Mopar Vehicle Protection plans are the ONLY
vehicle extended protection plans authorized,
endorsed and backed by FCA US LLC to provide
additional protection beyond your vehicle’s
warranty. If you purchased a Mopar Vehicle
Protection Plan, you will receive Plan Provisions
and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date.
If you have any questions about the service
contract, call the manufacturer's Service
Contract National Customer Hotline at
1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call
(800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983
French).
FCA US LLC is not responsible for any service
contract you may have purchased from another
manufacturer. If you require service after the
FCA US LLC New Vehicle Limited Warranty
expires, please refer to the contract documents,
and contact the person listed in those docu-
ments.
We appreciate that you have made a major
investment when you purchased the vehicle. An
authorized dealer has also made a major invest-
ment in facilities, tools, and training to assure
that you are absolutely delighted with the
ownership experience. You will be pleased with
their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty
issues or related concerns.
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 268
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 269
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information for the terms and
provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable
to this vehicle and market.
MOPAR PARTS
Mopar fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories
are available from an authorized dealer. They
are recommended for your vehicle in order to
help keep the vehicle operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington,
D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect that could cause a crash or cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addi-
tion to notifying FCA US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, an authorized
dealer, or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); or go to http://
www.safercar.gov; or write to: Adminis-
trator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue,
SE., West Building, Washington, D.C.
20590. You can also obtain other infor-
mation about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a
safety defect, you should contact the
Customer Service Department immedi-
ately. Canadian customers who wish to
report a safety defect to the Canadian
government should contact Transport
Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investiga-
tions and Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or
go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion
engines only), some of its constituents, and
certain vehicle components contain, or emit,
chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products
of component wear contain, or emit,
chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm.
10
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 269
270 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use
either the website or the phone numbers listed
below.
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide
the information that students and professional
technicians need in diagnosing/trouble-
shooting, problem solving, maintaining,
servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A
complete working knowledge of the vehicle,
system, and/or components is written in
straightforward language with illustrations,
diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with
diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations.
These practical manuals make it easy for
students and technicians to find and fix prob-
lems on computer-controlled vehicle systems
and features. They show exactly how to find and
correct problems the first time, using
step-by-step troubleshooting and drivability
procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a
complete list of all tools and equipment.
Owner's Manuals
These Owner's Manuals have been prepared
with the assistance of service and engineering
specialists to acquaint you with specific FCA US
LLC vehicles. Included are starting, operating,
emergency and maintenance procedures as
well as specifications, capabilities and safety
tips.
To access your Owner’s Information online, visit
www.mopar.com
To order a hard copy of your Owner’s Informa-
tion, call Tech Authority toll free at:
1-800-890-4038 (US)
1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
www.techauthority.com (US)
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 270
271
INDEX
A
About Your Brakes
..................................206
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze)
...............182
Adding Fuel
..........................................136
Adding Washing Fluid
...............................174
Additives, Fuel
.......................................208
Air Bag
Air Bag Operation
...............................93
Air Bag Warning Light .......................... 91
Driver Knee Air Bag .............................94
Enhanced Accident Response........ 98, 168
Event Data Recorder (EDR) ................. 168
If Deployment Occurs .......................... 97
Knee Impact Bolsters .......................... 94
Maintaining Your Air Bag System .......... 101
Maintenance ...................................101
Side Air Bags .....................................94
Transporting Pets ............................. 115
Air Bag Light
............................. 65, 91, 116
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter)
...177
Air Conditioner Maintenance
......................177
Air Conditioner Refrigerant
.........................177
Air Conditioner System
.............................177
Air Conditioning Filter
.................................39
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips
.....................38
Air Filter
..............................................177
Air Pressure
Tires ..............................................193
Alarm
Security Alarm
..............................12, 67
Alarm System
Security Alarm
....................................12
Alterations/Modifications
Vehicle
...............................................7
Android Auto
.........................................264
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant)
................181, 211
Disposal .........................................183
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
.......................75
Anti-Lock Warning Light
........................68, 71
Apple CarPlay
........................................265
Arming System
Security Alarm....................................12
Audio Settings
.......................................234
Auto Up Power Windows
..............................41
Automatic Dimming Mirror
...........................23
Automatic Transmission
....................122, 123
Adding Fluid ....................................185
Autostick ........................................127
Fluid And Filter Change ......................185
Fluid Change ...................................185
Fluid Level Check......................184, 185
Fluid Type ...............................184, 213
Special Additives ..............................185
Autostick
............................................ 127
Aux Mode
............................................ 236
B
Battery
..........................................67, 174
Charging System Light......................... 67
Belts, Seat
.......................................... 115
Bluetooth
Connect Or Disconnect Link Between
the Uconnect Phone And Mobile
Phone
........................................ 254
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone
Or Audio Device After Pairing
........... 249
Phone ........................................... 255
Bluetooth Mode
.................................... 236
Body Mechanism Lubrication
..................... 178
B-Pillar Location
.................................... 188
Brake Assist System
................................. 76
Brake Fluid
.......................................... 213
Brake System
................................184, 206
Anti-Lock (ABS)................................ 206
Fluid Check .................................... 184
Master Cylinder ............................... 184
Parking.......................................... 122
Warning Light.................................... 65
11
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 271
272
Brake/Transmission Interlock
.....................123
Bulb Replacement
..................................142
Bulbs, Light
.................................. 117, 142
C
Camera, Rear
........................................134
Capacities, Antifreeze (Engine Coolant)
..........211
Capacities, Fluid
....................................211
Caps, Filler
Oil (Engine) .....................................176
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ................182
Car Washes
..........................................203
Carbon Monoxide Warning
................. 115, 210
Cargo Area Cover
.....................................45
Cargo Compartment
..................................45
Cellular Phone
.......................................260
Center High Mounted Stop Light
..................146
Certification Label
..................................137
Chains, Tire
..........................................200
Changing A Flat Tire
........................ 152, 186
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light)
..74
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety
.................115
Checks, Safety
......................................115
Child Restraint
......................................102
Child Restraints
Booster Seats .................................. 104
Child Seat Installation........................ 113
How To Stow An UNUSED ALR
Seat Belt
.....................................110
Infant And Child Restraints ................. 103
Lower Anchors And Tethers For
Children ......................................106
Older Children And Child Restraints.......104
Seating Positions ..............................105
Child Safety Locks
....................................15
Cigar Lighter
...........................................53
Clean Air Gasoline
...................................208
Cleaning
Wheels...........................................199
Climate Control
........................................31
Automatic .........................................37
Compact Spare Tire
.................................197
Contract, Service
....................................268
Coolant (Antifreeze)
.................................211
Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap)
.............182
Cooling System
......................................181
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) .................182
Coolant Level...........................181, 183
Disposal Of Used Coolant ...................183
Drain, Flush, And Refill .......................181
Inspection.......................................183
Points To Remember .........................183
Pressure Cap ...................................182
Radiator Cap ...................................182
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ..........181
Corrosion Protection
................................203
Cruise Light
......................................72, 73
Cupholders
.............................................53
Customer Assistance
...............................267
Customer Programmable Features
................215
Cybersecurity
....................................... 214
D
Daytime Running Lights
............................. 25
Dealer Service
...................................... 175
Deck Lid, Emergency Release
....................... 45
Defroster, Windshield
.............................. 116
Diagnostic System, Onboard
........................ 73
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine)..................................... 174
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant)
................ 183
Do Not Disturb
...................................... 252
Door Ajar
.............................................. 68
Door Ajar Light
........................................ 68
Doors
.................................................. 13
Drag And Drop Menu
............................... 228
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt
............................... 15
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow
Standing Water
............................ 140
E
Electric Brake Control System
....................... 76
Anti-Lock Brake System ....................... 75
Brake Assist System ........................... 76
Electric Remote Mirrors
.............................. 24
Electrical Power Outlets
............................. 53
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
.................... 77
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control)
....... 128
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 272
273
Electronic Stability Control
(ESC)
...................................................77
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light
...........66
Emergency Deck Lid Release
........................45
Emergency Trunk Release
...........................45
Emergency, In Case Of
Jacking .................................. 152, 186
Jump Starting .................................. 161
Towing ...........................................167
Emission Control System Maintenance
.............74
Engine
Air Cleaner ......................................177
Break-In Recommendations ................ 119
Checking Oil Level ............................ 174
Compartment .................................. 173
Cooling...........................................181
Exhaust Gas Caution ................. 115, 210
Fails To Start ...................................119
Flooded, Starting .............................. 119
Fuel Requirements ........................... 207
Jump Starting .................................. 161
Oil......................................... 175, 211
Oil Filler Cap.................................... 176
Oil Filter .........................................176
Oil Selection .................................... 175
Oil Synthetic .................................... 176
Overheating ....................................163
Starting .......................................... 118
Enhanced Accident Response Feature
..... 98, 168
Ethanol
...............................................208
Exhaust Gas Cautions
......................115, 210
Exhaust System
.............................115, 179
Exterior Lights
.................................25, 117
F
Filters
Air Cleaner
......................................177
Air Conditioning ..................................39
Engine Fuel .....................................211
Engine Oil .......................................176
Engine Oil Disposal ...........................176
Flashers
..............................................142
Hazard Warning................................142
Turn Signals ..............................72, 117
Flash-To-Pass
..........................................26
Flat Tire Changing
...........................186, 197
Flat Tire Stowage
.................... 159, 186, 197
Flooded Engine Starting
............................119
Fluid Capacities
.....................................211
Fluid Leaks
...........................................117
Fluid Level Checks
Brake
.............................................184
Engine Oil .......................................174
Fluid, Brake
..........................................213
Fluids And Lubricants
...............................211
Fog Lights
..............................................26
Fold And Tumble Rear Seat
..........................18
Fold-Flat Seats
........................................15
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle
............................165
Fuel
.................................................. 207
Adding........................................... 136
Additives........................................ 208
Capacity ........................................ 211
Clean Air ........................................ 208
Ethanol.......................................... 208
Gasoline ........................................ 207
Light ............................................... 68
Materials Added .............................. 208
Methanol ....................................... 208
Octane Rating ................................. 207
Requirements ................................. 207
Tank Capacity ................................. 211
Fueling
............................................... 136
Fuses
................................................ 146
G
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink)
................... 48
Gasoline, (Fuel)
..............................207, 211
Gasoline, Clean Air
................................. 208
Gasoline, Reformulated
........................... 208
Gear Ranges
........................................ 124
Gear Selector Override
............................. 165
Glass Cleaning
...................................... 205
GVWR
................................................ 137
11
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 273
274
H
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or
Shallow Standing Water
..................140
Hazard Warning Flashers
..........................142
Head Restraints
.......................................20
Headlights
.............................................25
Cleaning......................................... 203
Passing ............................................26
Heated Mirrors
........................................24
Heated Steering Wheel
...............................22
Hill Start Assist
........................................80
Holder, Cup
............................................53
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener)
....................48
Hood Prop
.............................................43
Hood Release
.........................................43
I
Ignition
.................................................10
Switch.............................................. 10
Immobilizer (Sentry Key)
.............................11
Inside Rearview Mirror
...............................23
Instrument Cluster
....................................55
Descriptions ......................................72
Display............................................. 57
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning
..................205
Interior And Instrument Lights
.......................27
Interior Appearance Care
..........................204
Interior Lights
..........................................27
Introduction
.............................................6
iPod/USB/MP3 Control
.....................235, 259
J
Jack Location
........................................152
Jack Operation
...................... 152, 155, 186
Jacking Instructions
.................................155
Jump Starting
........................................161
K
Key Fob
Programming Additional Key Fobs
.......9, 11
Key-In Reminder
.......................................11
Keys
......................................................8
Replacement .....................................11
Sentry (Immobilizer) ............................11
L
Lap/Shoulder Belts
...................................86
Latches
...............................................117
Hood ...............................................43
Lead Free Gasoline
.................................207
Leaks, Fluid
..........................................117
Life Of Tires
..........................................195
Liftgate
.................................................44
Light Bulbs
...................................117, 142
Lighter
Cigar................................................53
Lights
...........................................25, 117
Air Bag ...............................65, 91, 116
Brake Assist Warning .......................... 78
Brake Warning .................................. 65
Bulb Replacement............................ 142
Center Mounted Stop........................ 146
Cruise ........................................72, 73
Electronic Stability Program(ESP)
Indicator....................................... 66
Exterior.....................................25, 117
Interior ............................................ 27
Low Fuel .......................................... 68
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine)...... 69
Park...........................................26, 72
Passing ........................................... 26
Seat Belt Reminder ............................ 67
Security Alarm..............................12, 67
Service .......................................... 142
Traction Control ................................. 78
Turn Signals...............................72, 117
Vanity Mirror ..................................... 24
Warning Instrument Cluster
Descriptions
.............................66, 72
Loading Vehicle
..................................... 137
Tires ............................................. 188
Locks
Child Protection ................................. 15
Power Door....................................... 13
Lubrication, Body
................................... 178
Lug Nuts/Bolts
..............................206, 207
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 274
275
M
Maintenance Free Battery
.........................174
Maintenance Schedule
.............................169
Making A Phone Call
................................251
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine)
.. 69, 74
Manual
Service........................................... 270
Media Hub
...........................................259
Methanol
.............................................208
Mirrors
.................................................23
Automatic Dimming............................. 23
Electric Powered................................. 24
Electric Remote.................................. 24
Heated.............................................24
Rearview .......................................... 23
Vanity .............................................. 24
Modifications/Alterations
Vehicle
...............................................7
Monitor, Tire Pressure System
.......................81
Mopar Parts
.........................................269
MP3 Control
.........................................259
Multi-Function Control Lever
.........................25
N
New Vehicle Break-In Period
.......................119
O
Occupant Restraints
..................................84
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel)
....................207
Oil Change Indicator
..................................58
Reset...............................................58
Oil Filter, Change
....................................176
Oil Filter, Selection
..................................176
Oil Pressure Light
.....................................67
Oil, Engine
...................................175, 211
Capacity .........................................211
Change Interval ................................175
Checking ........................................174
Dipstick ..........................................174
Disposal .........................................176
Filter..............................................176
Filter Disposal..................................176
Identification Logo ............................176
Materials Added To ...........................176
Pressure Warning Light ........................67
Recommendation .....................175, 211
Synthetic ........................................176
Viscosity .........................................176
Onboard Diagnostic System
..........................73
Operating Precautions
................................73
Operator Manual
Owner's Manual
...........................7, 270
Overheating, Engine
................................163
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual)
...................7
P
Paint Care
............................................203
Park Assist System, Rear
...........................130
Parking Brake
.......................................122
Personalized Main Menu
.......................... 228
Pets
.................................................. 115
Phonebook
.......................................... 251
Placard, Tire And Loading Information
........... 188
Power
Brakes
.......................................... 206
Door Locks ....................................... 13
Mirrors ............................................ 24
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ........... 53
Seats .............................................. 19
Sunroof ........................................... 41
Power Steering Fluid
............................... 213
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts
................... 89
Preparation For Jacking
............................ 154
Pretensioners
Seat Belts
........................................ 89
R
Radial Ply Tires
..................................... 193
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap)
............ 182
Radio
Presets
.......................................... 229
Radio Operation
.............................228, 260
Rear Camera
........................................ 134
Rear Liftgate
.......................................... 44
Reclining Rear Seats
................................. 17
Recreational Towing
............................... 139
Reformulated Gasoline
............................ 208
Refrigerant
.......................................... 177
Release, Hood
........................................ 43
11
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 275
276
Reminder, Seat Belt
..................................85
Remote Keyless Entry
Programming Additional Key Fobs
..........11
Replacement Bulbs
.................................142
Replacement Keys
....................................11
Replacement Tires
..................................195
Reporting Safety Defects
...........................269
Restraints, Child
....................................102
Restraints, Head
......................................20
Rotation, Tires
.......................................200
S
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle
......................115
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle
....................117
Safety Defects, Reporting
..........................269
Safety Information, Tire
............................186
Safety Tips
...........................................115
Safety, Exhaust Gas
................................115
Schedule, Maintenance
............................169
Seat Belts
......................................85, 115
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) ..........90
Child Restraints................................102
Energy Management Feature.................89
Front Seat............................. 85, 86, 88
Inspection.......................................115
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ................89
Lap/Shoulder Belts .............................86
Operating Instructions..........................88
Pregnant Women ................................89
Pretensioners ....................................89
Rear Seat .........................................86
Reminder....................................67, 85
Seat Belt Pretensioner .........................89
Untwisting Procedure...........................89
Seat Belts Maintenance
............................204
Seats
...................................................15
Adjustment........................................15
Fold And Tumble Rear..........................18
Power ..............................................19
Rear Folding ......................................15
Reclining ..........................................16
Seatback Release ...............................15
Tilting...............................................15
Security Alarm
...................................12, 67
Sentry Key
Key Programming
............................... 11
Sentry Key (Immobilizer)
............................. 11
Service Assistance
................................. 267
Service Contract
.................................... 268
Service Manuals
.................................... 270
Settings
.............................................. 215
Personal ........................................ 215
Shift Lever Override
................................ 165
Shoulder Belts
........................................ 86
Signals, Turn
...................................72, 117
Siri
................................................... 264
Sirius Satellite Radio
............................... 230
Favorites........................................ 232
Replay........................................... 231
SiriusXM Satellite Radio
Browse in SXM
................................ 232
Favorites........................................ 232
Replay........................................... 231
Snow Chains (Tire Chains)
......................... 200
Snow Tires
.......................................... 197
Spare Tires
...................................197, 198
Spark Plugs
......................................... 211
Speed Control
Cancel
........................................... 130
Speed Control (Cruise Control)
.................... 128
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 276
277
Starting
..............................................118
Automatic Transmission .....................118
Button .............................................10
Cold Weather...................................118
Engine Fails To Start..........................119
Steering
Tilt Column........................................22
Wheel, Heated ...................................22
Wheel, Tilt......................................... 22
Steering Wheel Audio Controls
....................259
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System
Controls
..............................................259
Storage
......................................... 52, 202
Storage, Vehicle
.......................................38
Store Radio Presets
................................229
Stuck, Freeing
.......................................165
Sun Roof
...............................................41
Sun Visor Extension
...................................25
Synthetic Engine Oil
................................176
T
Telescoping Steering Column
........................22
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC)
..............37
Tilt Steering Column
..................................22
Tire And Loading Information Placard
............188
Tire Markings
........................................186
Tire Safety Information
.............................186
Tires
.......................... 117, 192, 197, 201
Aging (Life Of Tires) ...........................195
Air Pressure.....................................192
Chains ...........................................200
Changing ................................152, 186
Compact Spare ................................197
General Information ..................192, 197
High Speed .....................................193
Inflation Pressure .............................193
Jacking...................................152, 186
Life Of Tires .....................................195
Load Capacity ..........................188, 189
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)..69, 81
Quality Grading ................................201
Radial ............................................193
Replacement ...................................195
Rotation .........................................200
Safety ....................................186, 192
Snow Tires ......................................197
Spare Tires..............................197, 198
Spinning .........................................194
Tread Wear Indicators........................195
Wheel Nut Torque .............................206
To Open Hood
.........................................43
Towing
................................................138
Disabled Vehicle...............................167
Recreational ....................................139
Towing Behind A Motorhome
......................139
Traction
..............................................140
Traction Control
.......................................80
Trailer Towing
....................................... 138
Transmission
Automatic
.......................122, 123, 184
Maintenance .................................. 184
Transporting Pets
.................................. 115
Tread Wear Indicators
............................. 195
Trunk Lid (Deck Lid)
.................................. 45
Trunk Release, Emergency
.......................... 45
Turn Signals
........................................... 72
U
Uconnect
Advanced Phone Connectivity
............. 254
Phone Call Features ......................... 251
Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect Phone........................... 254
Uconnect Settings ............................ 215
Uconnect (Hands-Free Phone)
Making A Phone Call ......................... 251
Uconnect Phone
.....................247, 248, 249
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call
— Call Currently In Progress
............. 252
Call Continuation ............................. 254
Call Termination .............................. 253
Cancel Command............................. 247
Connect Or Disconnect Link
Between The Uconnect Phone
And Mobile Phone
......................... 254
11
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 277
278
Connecting To A Particular Mobile
Phone Or Audio Device After Pairing
..249
Deleting A Phone Or Audio Device......... 250
Dial By Saying A Number .................... 251
Disconnecting A Phone Or Audio
Device
........................................249
Help Command ................................247
Making A Call................................... 251
Making A Phone Or Audio Device A
Favorite
......................................250
Managing Your Favorites .................... 250
Operation ....................................... 246
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile
Phone ........................................ 247
Pair A Bluetooth Streaming Audio
Device
........................................249
Pair Additional Mobile Phones ............. 248
Phonebook Download........................ 250
Receiving A Call................................252
Recent Calls ....................................252
To Remove A Favorite ........................ 251
Touch-Tone Number Entry .................. 252
Transfer Call To And From Mobile
Phone ........................................ 254
Uconnect Settings
Customer Programmable Features........215
Uconnect Voice Command
.........................261
Uniform Tire Quality Grades
........................201
Universal Garage Door Opener (HomeLink)
........48
Universal Transmitter
.................................48
Unleaded Gasoline
..................................207
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt
.....................89
USB
...................................................259
V
Vanity Mirrors
..........................................24
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
...............206
Vehicle Loading
.............................137, 189
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations
.....................7
Vehicle Security Alarm
................................12
Vehicle Storage
................................38, 202
Voice Command
.....................................254
Voice Recognition System (VR)
....................261
W
Warning Lights
(Instrument Cluster Descriptions)
.................. 68
Warnings And Cautions
................................ 7
Warranty Information
.............................. 269
Washer
Adding Fluid.................................... 174
Washers, Windshield
................................. 28
Washing Vehicle
.................................... 203
Water
Driving Through
............................... 140
Wheel And Wheel Tire Care
....................... 199
Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim
........................ 199
Wind Buffeting
...................................41, 43
Window Fogging
...................................... 38
Windows
............................................... 40
Windshield Defroster
............................... 116
Windshield Washers
................................. 28
Windshield Wiper Blades
.......................... 178
Windshield Wipers
................................... 28
Wipers Blade Replacement
....................... 178
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 278
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in an accident and
personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their attention off the
road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is
moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you
nd yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces
prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new FIAT
®
brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference source for
common questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit www.mopar.com (U.S.), www.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local
FIAT
®
brand dealer.
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle.
This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle.
Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make
changes in design and specications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself
to install them on products previously manufactured.
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in
substitution therefore.
If you are the rst registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by calling
1-888-242-6342 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143 (Canada) or by contacting your dealer.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual,
Navigation/Uconnect manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover. U.S. residents can purchase
replacement kits by visiting www.techauthority.com and Canadian residents can purchase replacement kits by calling 1-800-387-1143.
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reexes are slower and your
judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
WARNING
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL: Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability
can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive.
Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend or use public transportation.
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not
idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear
gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information
go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
2020 FIAT
®
500L OWNER’S MANUAL
2020 FIAT
®
500L
20_BG_OM_EN_USC
First Edition
atusa.com (U.S.) or atcanada.com/en (Canada)
©2019 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. FIAT is a registered trademark of FCA Group
Marketing S.p.A., used under license by FCA US LLC. App Store is a registered trademark
of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
Whether it’s providing information about specic product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what
steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you’ll nd the app an important extension of
your FIAT
®
brand vehicle.
Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App Store
®
or Google
Play
®
Store and enter the search keyword “FIAT” (U.S. residents only).
mopar.com owners.mopar.ca
DOWNLOAD A FREE ELECTRONIC COPY OF THE MOST
UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL, UCONNECT AND
WARRANTY BOOKLETS
U. S. Canada
